Variador Reliance Nru

GV3000/SE AC Drive
Hardware Reference, Installation,

and Troubleshooting
Version 6.06
Instruction Manual D2-3360-5

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Throughout this manual, the following notes are used to alert you to safety considerations:
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal
injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
!
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
The thick black bar shown on the outside margin of this page will be used throughout this instruction manual to
signify new or revised text or figures.
ATTENTION: Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of
this equipment and the hazards involved should install, adjust, operate, or service this equipment.
! Read and understand this manual and other applicable manuals in their entirety before
proceeding. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: Do not install or remove modification kits with power applied to the drive. Disconnect
and lock out incoming power before attempting such installation or removal. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input power has been
disconnected. After disconnecting input power, wait five (5) minutes for the DC bus capacitors
to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are
discharged before touching any internal components. Failure to observe this precaution could
result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: The drive is capable of operating at and maintaining zero speed. The user is
responsible for assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards,
audible or visual alarms, or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating or may operate
at or near zero speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or
loss of life.
ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of
the drive circuitry. This circuit must disable the system in case of improper operation. Uncontrolled
machine operation may result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
ATTENTION: The drive contains ESD- (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies.
Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the drive.
Erratic machine operation and damage to, or destruction of, equipment can result if this procedure
is not followed. Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily injury.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local, national, and
international codes. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction
of, the equipment.
DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.

ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd
PROFIBUS is a trademark of PROFIBUS International.
GV3000, AutoMax, and Reliance are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
©2000 Rockwell International Corporation

CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Related Publications ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric....................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 About the Drive

2.1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number ........................................................... 2-1
2.2 NEMA Enclosures ........................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 1-25 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations .......................................... 2-4
2.4 25-60 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations ........................................ 2-7
2.5 60-100 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations ...................................... 2-8
2.6 100-150 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations .................................... 2-9
2.7 200-400 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations .................................. 2-10
2.8 Regulator Board Description ......................................................................... 2-11
2.8.1 Jumper Locations and Settings ........................................................... 2-15
2.8.1.1 Setting the Analog Input Speed Reference Jumper (J4) ...... 2-15
2.8.1.2 Setting the Analog Output Jumper (J17)............................... 2-16
2.8.2 Wiring the Terminal Strip..................................................................... 2-17
2.8.3 RS-232 Communication Port............................................................... 2-18
2.8.4 Option Board Connector ..................................................................... 2-19
2.8.5 Operator Interface Module Connector................................................. 2-19
2.8.6 Keypad/Display ................................................................................... 2-19
2.9 Optional Equipment ....................................................................................... 2-20
Chapter 3 Planning Before Installing

3.1 General Requirements for the Installation Site ................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Making Sure Environmental Conditions are Met ................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Determining Total Area Required Based on Drive Dimensions ............ 3-2
3.1.3 Verifying the Site Provides for Recommended Air Flow Clearances .... 3-4
3.1.4 Verifying Power Module Input Ratings Match Supplied Power ............. 3-5
3.2 Wiring Requirements for the Drive .................................................................. 3-5
3.2.1 Meeting Terminal Strip Input and Output Specifications ....................... 3-5
3.2.2 Determining Wire Size Requirements ................................................... 3-5
3.2.2.1 Conduit Entry Opening Sizes.................................................. 3-5
3.2.2.2 Recommended Power Wire Sizes .......................................... 3-5
3.2.2.3 Recommended Control and Signal Wire Sizes ....................... 3-7
3.2.2.4 Recommended Motor Lead Lengths....................................... 3-7
3.2.2.5 Recommended Serial Communication Cable Lengths ........... 3-9
3.2.3 Selecting Input Line Branch Circuit Fuses ............................................ 3-9
3.2.4 Meeting Encoder Specifications (FVC Regulation Only)....................... 3-9
3.2.4.1 Encoder Wiring Guidelines ..................................................... 3-9
3.2.5 Verifying Power Module Output Current Rating Is Greater Than
Motor Full Load Amps .......................................................................... 3-9
Contents I
Chapter 4 Mounting the Drive, Grounding, and Finding Wire Routing Locations
4.1 Mounting the Drive ...........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Verifying the Drive’s Watts Loss Rating.................................................4-1
4.2 Determining Input, Motor Output, Ground, and Control Wire Routing
for the Drive......................................................................................................4-1
4.2.1 Replacing Conduit Plugs .......................................................................4-2
4.3 Grounding the Drive .........................................................................................4-2
Chapter 5 Installing Input Power Wiring

5.1 Installing Transformers and Reactors (Optional) .............................................5-1
5.2 Installing Fuses for Branch Circuit Protection ..................................................5-2
5.3 Installing a Required External/Separate Input Disconnect...............................5-2
5.4 Installing Power Wiring from the AC Input Line to the Drive’s Power
Terminals .........................................................................................................5-5
5.5 Installing Power Wiring from an External DC Bus to the Drive’s Internal
DC Bus Terminals ............................................................................................5-6
5.6 Changing Blower Transformer Taps ................................................................5-6
Chapter 6 Installing Output Power Wiring

6.1 Installing Output Contactors (Optional) ............................................................6-1
6.2 Installing Mechanical Motor Overload Protection (Optional) ............................6-1
6.3 Installing Output Wiring from the Drive Output Terminals to the Motor............6-1
Chapter 7 Wiring the Regulator Board Terminal Strip

7.1 Stopping the Drive............................................................................................7-6
7.1.1 Compliance with Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1:1992...........7-6
7.2 Wiring the Encoder Feedback Device (FVC Regulation Only).........................7-7
7.3 Wiring the Signal and Control I/O.....................................................................7-9
Chapter 8 Completing the Installation

8.1 Checking the Installation ..................................................................................8-1
8.2 Installing the Cover for NEMA 4X/12 Drives ....................................................8-2
8.3 Powering Up After Installation Is Complete......................................................8-2
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting the Drive

9.1 Test Equipment Needed To Troubleshoot .......................................................9-1
9.2 Drive Alarms and Faults...................................................................................9-1
9.3 Verifying That DC Bus Capacitors Are Discharged..........................................9-1
9.4 Checking Out the Drive with Input Power Off...................................................9-8
9.5 Replacement Parts.........................................................................................9-12
Appendix A Technical Specifications........................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Compliance with Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1:1992 ............................. B-1
Appendix C Compliance with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards ..................................... C-1
Appendix D 200-400 HP GV3000/SE System Wiring Diagrams ................................................. D-1
Index ...........................................................................................................................Index-1
II GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

List of Figures
Figure 2.1 – Identifying the Drive Model Number ..................................................... 2-1

Figure 2.2 – 1-5 HP Drive Component Locations ..................................................... 2-4
Figure 2.3 – 7.5-10 HP Drive Component Locations ................................................ 2-5
Figure 2.4 – 15-25 HP Drive Component Locations ................................................. 2-6
Figure 2.5 – 25-60 HP Drive Component Locations ................................................. 2-7
Figure 2.6 – 60-100 HP Drive Component Locations ............................................... 2-8
Figure 2.7 – 100-150 HP Drive Component Locations ............................................. 2-9
Figure 2.8 – 200-400 HP Drive Component Locations ........................................... 2-10
Figure 2.9 – 1-60 HP Regulator Board Component Locations ............................... 2-12
Figure 2.10 – 60-150 HP Regulator Board Component Locations ......................... 2-13
Figure 2.11 – 200-400 HP Regulator Board Component Locations ....................... 2-14
Figure 2.12 – Jumper J4 Settings for Analog Input Speed Reference ................... 2-16
Figure 2.13 – Jumper J17 Settings for Analog Outputs.......................................... 2-17
Figure 2.14 – Typical Terminal Strip Connections.................................................. 2-18
Figure 2.15 – Keypad/Display................................................................................. 2-19
Figure 3.1 – Drive Dimensions ................................................................................. 3-3

Figure 3.2 – Recommended Air Flow Clearances .................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.3 – How to Calculate Motor Lead Lengths ................................................. 3-7
Figure 4.1 – Wire Routing Locations for 1-5 HP Drives............................................ 4-3

Figure 4.2 – Wire Routing Locations for 7.5-10 HP Drives....................................... 4-4
Figure 4.3 – Wire Routing Locations for 15-25 HP Drives........................................ 4-5
Figure 4.4 – Wire Routing Locations for 25-60 HP Drives........................................ 4-6
Figure 4.5 – Wire Routing Locations for 60-100 HP Drive........................................ 4-7
Figure 4.6 – Wire Routing Locations for 100-150 HP Drives.................................... 4-8
Figure 4.7 – Wire Routing Locations for 200-400 HP Drives.................................... 4-9
Figure 5.1 – Typical AC Input Electrical Connections............................................... 5-3

Figure 5.2 – Typical DC Bus Electrical Connections ................................................ 5-4
Figure 7.1 – Two-Wire Start/Stop Sample Control Wiring ........................................ 7-4

Figure 7.2 – Three-Wire Start/Stop Sample Control Wiring...................................... 7-5
Figure 7.3 – Encoder Wiring Connections ................................................................ 7-8
Figure 9.1 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1-25 HP Drives) ....................................... 9-3

Figure 9.2 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (25-60 HP Drives) ..................................... 9-4
Figure 9.3 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (60-100 HP Drives) ................................... 9-5
Figure 9.4 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (100-150 HP Drives) ................................. 9-6
Figure 9.5 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (200-400 HP Drives) ................................. 9-7
Contents III
IV GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06
List of Tables
Table 2.1 – Power and NEMA Enclosure Ratings .................................................... 2-2

Table 2.2 – Standard Kits and Options .................................................................. 2-20
Table 3.1 – Environmental Conditions...................................................................... 3-2

Table 3.2 – Drive Dimensions and Weights.............................................................. 3-2
Table 3.3 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 1-10 HP Drives .......................... 3-5
Table 3.4 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 15-25 HP Drives ........................ 3-6
Table 3.5 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 25-60 HP Drives ........................ 3-6
Table 3.6 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 60-100 HP Drives ...................... 3-6
Table 3.7 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 100-150 HP Drives .................... 3-6
Table 3.8 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 200-400 HP Drives .................... 3-6
Table 3.9 – Recommended Terminal Strip Wire Sizes............................................. 3-7
Table 3.10 – Recommended Motor Lead Lengths for Reliance Inverter
Duty Motors.......................................................................................... 3-8
Table 3.11 – Compatible Reactors ........................................................................... 3-8
Table 3.12 – AC Input Line Fuse Selection Values ................................................ 3-10
Table 5.1 – AC Line Reactors................................................................................... 5-2

Table 5.2 – Terminal Tightening Torques................................................................. 5-5
Table 7.1 – RS-232 Connections (Terminals 1-3) .................................................... 7-1

Table 7.2 – Encoder Connections (Terminals 4-9) ................................................... 7-1
Table 7.3 – Analog Output Connections (Terminals 10 and 11)............................... 7-2
Table 7.4 – Analog Speed/Torque Reference Connections (Terminals 12-15)........ 7-2
Table 7.5 – Digital Input Connections (Terminals 16-25) ......................................... 7-2
Table 7.6 – Snubber Resistor Braking Connections (Terminals 26 and 27)............. 7-3
Table 7.7 – Status Relay Connections (Terminals 28-31) ........................................ 7-3
Table 7.8 – Encoder Connections ............................................................................ 7-7
Table 7.9 – Wiring Signal and Control I/O to the Terminal Strip............................... 7-9
Table 9.1 – Resistance Checks ................................................................................ 9-9

Table 9.2 – 1-5 HP Drive Replacement Parts......................................................... 9-12
Table 9.3 – 7.5-10 HP Drive Replacement Parts.................................................... 9-12
Table 9.4 – 15-25 HP Drive Replacement Parts..................................................... 9-13
Table 9.5 – 25-60 HP Drive Replacement Parts..................................................... 9-14
Table 9.6 – 60-100 HP Drive Replacement Parts................................................... 9-15
Table 9.7 – 100-150 HP Drive Replacement Parts................................................. 9-16
Table 9.8 – 200-400 HP Drive Replacement Parts................................................. 9-17
Contents V
VI GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
This instruction manual describes the GV3000/SE drive hardware. It does not cover
the GV3000/SE drive software. For software information, refer to the GV3000/SE AC
General Purpose (V/Hz) and Vector Duty Drive Software Start-Up and Reference
Manual (D2-3359).
This manual is intended for qualified electrical personnel. It is organized according to

a logical progression of steps to be followed to install and troubleshoot the drive.
GV3000/SE drives will typically be referenced by horsepower in the manual. If

additional clarity is required, drive model numbers will also be included.
1.1 Related Publications

Refer to the following related publications as necessary for more information:
• D2-3359 GV3000/SE AC General Purpose (V/Hz) and Vector Duty Drive

Software Start-Up and Reference Manual
• D2-3391 Snubber Resistor Braking Kit
• D2-3305 Motor Encoder Cable Kit
• D2-3308 AutoMax Network Communication Option Board
• D2-3348 Control and Configuration Software (CS3000)
• D2-3341 Super Remote Meter Interface (RMI) Board
• D2-3342 Operator Interface Module (OIM)
• D2-3390 ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
1.2 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric

If you have any questions or problems with the products described in this instruction
manual, contact your local Reliance Electric sales office. For technical assistance, call
1-800-726-8112.
Introduction 1-1
1-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06
CHAPTER 2
About the Drive
This chapter provides an overview of the drive including how to identify the drive, a
description of the Regulator board, and the identification of major components of the
drive.
The GV3000/SE AC drive is a PWM (pulse-width-modulated) drive that provides

vector and general purpose regulation for a wide range of applications.
Using vector regulation, the drive can provide high dynamic response, maintain full
rated motor torque to zero speed, and precisely control motor speed in both
directions. The drive can provide this functionality either with encoder feedback (flux
vector control or FVC) or without (sensorless vector control or SVC).
Using general purpose (volts/hertz or V/Hz) regulation, the drive is suited for a broad
range of applications requiring adjustable speed control of motors.
2.1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number

Each GV3000/SE AC drive can be identified by its model number. See figure 2.1. This
number appears on the shipping label and on the drive’s nameplate. The drive’s model
number includes the Power Module and the regulator. Drive power ratings are
provided in table 2.1.
NNN A N N NN AA
Horsepower Ratings
T = V/Hz or Vector
V = V/Hz or Vector
GV3000/SE
R = V/Hz or Vector
G = V/Hz Only
Voltage
2 = 200 V to 230 V
4 = 380 V to 460 V
Enclosure
1 = NEMA 1
2 = NEMA 12 Only
4 = NEMA 4x (Indoor Only) or NEMA 12
Regulator Version
60 = Vector and V/Hz Regulator Version 6.0 Firmware
Disconnect Switch
DS = Disconnect Switch (200-400 HP Only; Optional)
Figure 2.1 – Identifying the Drive Model Number
About the Drive 2-1

Table 2.1 – Power and NEMA Enclosure Ratings
Power
Selected Output Output Output Loss
Regulation1 and Amps Amps Amps Watts
Model Horsepower NEMA Input Input at at at (Full
Number Rating Rating KVA Amps2 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz Load)
1V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 2.0 2.5 2.1 2.1 2.1 60
1V4460 (1 HP) 4X/12
2V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 3.3 4.2 3.4 3.4 3.4 100
2V4460 (2 HP) 4X/12
3V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 5.1 6.4 5.3 5.3 5.3 140
3V4460 (3 HP) 4X/12
5V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 7.9 9.9 8.2 8.2 8.2 180
5V4460 (5 HP) 4X/12
7V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 10.7 13.4 11.1 11.1 11.1 210
7V4260 (7.5 HP) 12
10V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 13.4 16.8 14.2 14.2 14.2 250
10V4260 (10 HP) 12
15V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 20.2 25.4 21.0 21.0 21.0 375
15V4260 (15 HP) 12
20V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 26.1 32.7 27.0 27.0 27.0 600
20V4260 (20 HP) 12
25G4160 V/Hz 1 29.5 37.0 30.4 30.4 30.4 600
25G4260 (25 HP) 12
25V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 30.2 38.0 34.5 34.5 34.5 750
25V4260 (25 HP) 12
30V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 35.0 44.0 39.0 39.0 39.0 800
30V4260 (30 HP) 12
40V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 46.2 58.0 54.0 54.0 54.0 960
40V4260 (40 HP) 12
50V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1 57.3 72.0 67.0 67.0 67.0 1200
50V4260 (50 HP) 12
50R4160 Vector (50 HP) or 1 65.0 81.0 70.0 56.0 41.0 1420
50T4160 V/Hz (75 HP) 81.0 102 90.0 72.0 54.0
60G4160 V/Hz 1 71.7 90.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 1200
60G4260 (60 HP) 12
75R4160 Vector (60-75 HP) 1 80.0 101 89.0 71.0 53.0 1400
75T4160 or V/Hz (100 HP) 100 126 116 93.0 70.0 1780
125R4160 Vector (100-125 HP) 1 127 159 152 122 91.0 2410
or V/Hz (125-150 HP) 170 213 210 168 126 3200
200V4160 Vector (150-200 HP) 1A 224 281 240 240 - 3290
200V4160DS3 or V/Hz (200 HP)
250V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1A 269 337 302 302 - 4160
250V1460DS3 (250 HP)
300V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1A 310 389 361 361 - 5100
300V4160DS3 (300 HP)
350V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1A 352 442 414 414 - 6150
350V4160DS3 (350 HP)
400V4160 V/Hz or Vector 1A 394 494 477 4774 - 7350
400V4160DS3 (400 HP)
1
With V/Hz regulation, 110% continuous output current capability. With vector regulation, 150% output current capability for one minute.
2
Input Voltage: 380-460 VAC (+/-10%)
3With optional input disconnect factory installed
4110% overload only at 4KHz in V/Hz and vector modes.

2.2 NEMA Enclosures
Each of the GV3000/SE drives have one of following NEMA ratings:
• NEMA 1: Vented. Contains a communication access door that allows access to the
communication port without removing the cover. Intended for general-purpose
indoor applications.
• NEMA 1A: Ventilated with fan and filter. Contains a communication access door that
allows access to the communication port without removing the cover. Intended for
general-purpose indoor applications.
• NEMA 4X/12: Not vented. Supplied with base and keypad gaskets. Intended for use
in indoor environments that require a water-tight/dust-tight enclosure. An enclosure
with this NEMA rating encompasses both ratings (4X and 12).
• NEMA 12: Intended for use in indoor environments that require a dust-tight/drip-tight
enclosure.
See table 2.1 for a listing of the drives and their individual NEMA ratings.
About the Drive 2-3

2.3 1-25 HP GV3000/SE Drive Component Locations
The 1-25 HP GV3000/SE drives have the following main components. The numbered
items listed below correspond to the numbers used in figures 2.2 to 2.4. Replacement
parts are listed in chapter 9.
1. Fan Assembly 7. Power Supply PCB (15-25 HP drives only)
2. Membrane Switch (Keypad/Bracket) 8. Gate Driver PCB (15-25 HP drives only)
3. Regulator Printed Circuit Board (PCB) 9. Internal Fan Assembly
4. Capacitor PCB/Input Capacitors 10. IGBT Module
5. Current Feedback PCB 11. Diode Bridge
6. Power PCB (15-25 HP drives only) 12. Fan Wire Harness
M/N M/N
1V41XX 3V41XX
1V44XX 3V44XX
2V41XX 5V41XX
2V44XX 5V44XX
Figure 2.2 – 1-5 HP Drive Component Locations

M/N
7V41XX
7V42XX
10V41XX
10V42XX
Figure 2.3 – 7.5-10 HP Drive Component Locations
About the Drive 2-5

M/N M/N
15V41XX 25G41XX
15V42XX 25G42XX
20V41XX
20V42XX

The 25-60 HP drives have the following main components. The numbered items listed
below correspond to the numbers used in figure 2.5. Replacement parts are listed in
chapter 9.
1. Fan 7. Power Supply PCB
2. Membrane Switch (Keypad/Bracket) 8. Gate Driver PCB
3. Regulator Printed Circuit Board (PCB) 9. Internal Fan Assembly
4. Bus Capacitors 10. IGBT Module
5. Not Used 11. Diode Bridge
6. Power PCB 12. Wire Harness
M/N M/N M/N

25V41XX 40V41XX 60G41XX
25V42XX 40V42XX 60G42XX
30V41XX 50V41XX
30V42XX 50V42XX
About the Drive 2-7

The 60-100 HP drives have the following main components. The numbered items
listed below correspond to the numbers used in figure 2.6. Replacement parts are
listed in chapter 9.
1. Regulator Printed Circuit Board (PCB) 9. Precharge Contactor
2. Power Module Interface PCB 10. Current Transformer
3. Gate Driver PCB 11. Ground Fault Transformer
4. Bus Clamp PCB - Right 12. Output Reactor
5. Bus Clamp PCB - Left 13. Precharge Resistor
6. Intelligent Power Module PCB 14. Bus Discharge Resistor
7. Diode Bridge 15. Fan
8. DC Bus Fuse 16. Keypad
14
14
7
45 47 12 45 47
10
16 10
1 6
5 4
2
11 9 8
13
15
M/N
50R41XX
50T41XX
75R41XX
75T41XX

The 100-150 HP drive has the following main components. The numbered items listed
chapter 9.
1. Regulator Printed Circuit Board (PCB) 10. Current Transformer
2. Power Module Interface PCB 11. Ground Fault Transformer
3. Gate Driver PCB 12. Output Reactor
4. Bus Clamp PCB - Right 13. Not Used
5. Bus Clamp PCB - Left 14. Bus Discharge Resistor
6. Intelligent Power Module PCB 15. Fan
7. Thyristor Precharge Module 16. Keypad
8. DC Bus Fuse 17. Thyristor Firing Pulse PCB
9. Not Used
14
7
11
3
12
17
6
3
2
5
16
8 1
10
15
M/N
125R41XX
About the Drive 2-9

The 200-400 HP drive has the following main components. The numbered items listed
chapter 9.
1. Terminal Block Assembly 9. Blower Assembly
2. Blower Fuses 10. Blower Transformer Assembly
3. Power Module Power Interface PCB 11. AC Input Fuse
4. SCR-Precharge Assembly 12. AC Disconnect (Optional)
5. Keypad 13. Ground Fault Current Transformer
6. Regulator Printed Circuit Board (PCB) 14. DC Bus Discharge Resistor
7. Option Board (Optional) 15. Current Feedback Assembly
8. Phase Module Assembly 16. Capacitor Bank
M/N
200V41XX
200V41XXDS
250V41XX
250V41XXDS
300V41XX Front door and sidewalls removed.
300V41XXDS Control panel door is partially shown.
350V41XX
350V41XXDS
400V41XX
400V41XXDS

2.8 Regulator Board Description
Drive regulation is performed by a microprocessor on the Regulator board. See
figures 2.9, 2.10, and 2.11. Drive operation is adjusted by the parameters entered
through the keypad. The Regulator board accepts power circuit feedback signals and
an external speed reference signal, as well as data from an encoder that is attached to
the motor when set up for FVC regulation. The Regulator board provides:
• PWM gating signals to the IGBT power devices
Based on the output of the control loop, the regulator sends PWM gating signals
through the Current Feedback board to isolated drivers on the Gate Driver board.
These drivers switch the Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs), producing a
PWM waveform that corresponds to the speed (FVC regulation) or frequency (V/Hz
regulation) reference. The IGBTs can be switched at either a 2, 4, or 8 kHz carrier
frequency.
• Form A and B contacts for drive status indicators
The Form A and B contacts are under control of the user via programmable
parameters. A Form A or B transition can indicate drive status. The contacts are
rated for 5 amps resistive load at 250 VAC/ 30 VDC and are made available through
the terminal strip.
• Display data for a four-character display and fourteen indicator LEDs
For a description of the keypad/display, refer to section 2.8.6. For operational
instructions, see the GV3000/SE software reference manual (D2-3359).
• An analog output
The analog output is a scaled voltage (0-10 VDC) or current (4-20 mA) signal
proportional to either motor speed (RPM) or motor torque or current (%TORQUE).
The current signal selection (via jumper J17) requires a power supply for operation.
The power can be sourced from the encoder terminals (4 and 9) or from an external
15V power supply. See tables 7.3 and 7.8, terminals 10 and 11, for more
information. The analog output signal is available through the terminal strip.
• A snubber resistor braking signal
The 1-60 HP Regulator board provides a signal for use by an optional snubber
resistor braking kit for 1-10 HP drives. The signal is available through the terminal
strip.
Three Regulator boards are used on the GV3000/SE drives:

• 1-60 HP Regulator boards are used with 1-60 HP drives (M/N 1V4XXX to
60G4XXX)
• 60-150 HP Regulator boards are used with 60-150 HP drives (M/N 75R4XXX to
125R4XXX)
• 200-400 HP Regulator boards are used with 200-400 HP drives (M/N 200V4XXX to
400V4XXX).
As shown in figures 2.9, 2.10, and 2.11, the Regulator boards are similar but have
different Power Module interface connectors.
About the Drive 2-11

J5
USER DISPLAY
26-Pin Ribbon Cable

J3
34-Pin Ribbon Cable
J9
J7
J8
J17 J4 USER I/O TERMINAL STRIP
J3 - Option Board Connector J8 - RS232C Port

J4 - Analog Input Jumper J9 - Keypad/Display Connector
J5 - Power Module Feedback Cable J17 - Analog Output Jumper
J7 - OIM (Optional) Connector
Figure 2.9 – 1-60 HP Regulator Board Component Locations

J16 60-Pin Ribbon Cable
USER DISPLAY
J3
34-Pin Ribbon Cable
J9
J7
J17 J4
J8
USER I/O TERMINAL STRIP
J3 - Option Board Connector J9 - Keypad/Display Connector

J4 - Analog Input Jumper J16 - Power Module Feedback Cable
J7 - OIM (Optional) Connector J17 - Analog Output Jumper
J8 - RS232C Port

J16 60-Pin Ribbon Cable
USER DISPLAY
J3
34-Pin Ribbon Cable
J9
J7
J17 J4
J8
USER I/O TERMINAL STRIP
J3 - Option Board Connector J9 - Keypad/Display Connector

J4 - Analog Input Jumper J16 - Power Module Feedback Cable
J7 - OIM (Optional) Connector J17 - Analog Output Jumper
J8 - RS232C Port

2.8.1 Jumper Locations and Settings
Jumpers J4 and J17 on the Regulator board are factory-set for voltage in and voltage
out signals. Refer to figures 2.9, 2.10, and 2.11 for their locations on the Regulator
boards. If you need to change the jumpers’ settings, use the following procedures.
ATTENTION: Do not alter the setting of any jumper not described in this
instruction manual. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
! damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
2.8.1.1 Setting the Analog Input Speed Reference Jumper (J4)
Jumper J4 is the analog speed/torque (U.000) reference jumper. This jumper selects
either +/- 10 VDC or 0-20 mA input. Parameters P.009, P.010, and P.011 are used in
conjunction with the jumper.
Note that if the position of jumper J4 is changed after the parameters are
programmed, the software will not recognize that the input reference or polarity has
been changed. Be sure to verify that parameters P.009, P.010, and P.011 are correct
before starting the drive. Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference
manual for more information.
Use the following procedure to set jumper J4:
ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input

power has been disconnected. After disconnecting input power, wait five
! (5) minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the
voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are discharged
before touching any internal components. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
Step 1. Turn off input power to the drive and wait five minutes.
Step 2. Remove the cover from the drive by unscrewing the four attaching screws.
On 200-400 HP drives, open the outer cabinet door.
ATTENTION: Do not operate 200-400 HP drives with the outer and inner
cabinet doors open due to possible exposure to high voltage. Close the
! outer and inner cabinet doors before putting the drive into run. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
Step 3. Verify that the DC bus voltage is zero by following the procedure in section
9.3.
Step 4. Locate jumper J4 on the Regulator board. Refer to figures 2.9, 2.10, and
2.11.
Step 5. Locate pin 1 on jumper J4. Move the jumper to the desired setting as shown
in figure 2.12.
Step 6. Reattach the cover. On 200-400 HP drives, close the outer cabinet door.
Step 7. Reapply input power.

Step 8. Verify that Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset (P.009), Terminal Strip Analog
Input Gain (P.010), and Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure (P.011) are
correctly set.
Note that the jumper settings must match the software settings otherwise the
reference value may differ from what is expected. Refer to the GV3000/SE
Software Start-Up and Reference manual for more information.
Voltage Input Option Current Input Option

Pins 2-3 Pins 1-2
10 VDC 0-20 mA
J4 J4
(default)
Figure 2.12 – Jumper J4 Settings for Analog Input Speed Reference
2.8.1.2 Setting the Analog Output Jumper (J17)
Jumper J17 is the analog output jumper. This jumper selects either a 0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA scaled signal output that is programmable to be proportional to either speed
or torque using parameter P.012. Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and
Reference manual for more information on this parameter.
The jumper only selects a 0-10 VDC source voltage or 4-20 mA sink current to
represent speed or torque. Note that the 4-20 mA current selection requires a power
supply for operation as shown in tables 7.3 and 7.8, terminals 10 and 11.
Use the following procedure to set jumper J17:

Step 1. Turn off input power to the drive and wait five minutes.
Step 2. Remove the cover from the drive by unscrewing the four attaching screws.
On 200-400 HP drives, open the outer cabinet door.

Step 3. Verify that the DC bus voltage is zero by following the procedure in section
9.3.
Step 4. Locate jumper J17 on the Regulator board. Refer to figures 2.9, 2.10, and
2.11.
Step 5. Locate pin 1 on jumper J17. Move the jumper to the desired setting as shown
in figure 2.13.
Step 6. Reattach the cover. On 200-400 HP drives, close the outer cabinet door.
Step 8. Verify that parameter P.012 is set correctly for either speed or current.
Voltage Output Option Current Output Option

Pins 2-3 Pins 1-2
10 VDC 4-20 mA
J17 J17
(default)
Figure 2.13 – Jumper J17 Settings for Analog Outputs
2.8.2 Wiring the Terminal Strip
The terminal strip on the Regulator board provides terminals for connecting customer
I/O devices. See figures 2.9, 2.10, 2.11, and 2.14. The following terminals are
provided:
• Terminals 1-3: RS-232 connections
• Terminals 4-9: encoder connections
• Terminals 10-11: analog output connections
• Terminals 12-15: analog speed/torque reference connections
• Terminals 16-25: 24V DC digital input connections
• Terminals 26-27: snubber resistor braking control connections
(1-10 HP Regulator boards only) for older Snubber Resistor Braking Kits
(for example, the M/N 2DB4010 series)
• Terminals 28-31: status relay connections

DIGITAL INPUT 6 (FORWARD/REVERSE)
DIGITAL INPUT 8 (REMOTE/LOCAL)
DIGITAL INPUT 7 (RAMP1/RAMP2)

PHASE B NOT
FACTORY
INSTALLED
ENCODER
CONNECTIONS
WIRES BETWEEN TERMINALS 16+16A AND

20 + 20A ARE NECESSARY FOR PROPER
OPERATION OF THE FUNCTION LOSS
INPUT. THEY SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED.
Figure 2.14 – Typical Terminal Strip Connections
2.8.3 RS-232 Communication Port
The Regulator board contains a 9-pin D-shell RS-232 communication port (J8). This
port provides RS-232 communication between the GV3000/SE drive and a personal
computer running the Control and Configuration (CS3000) software. See figures 2.9,
2.10, and 2.11. Refer to instruction manual D2-3348 for more information about the
CS3000 software.

2.8.4 Option Board Connector
The flat-ribbon cable connector (J3) on the left side of the Regulator board is a parallel
bus connection port that provides a means of attaching optional boards such as the
DeviceNet Option board, the RMI board, the AutoMax Network Option board, or
similar boards to the GV3000/SE drive. See figures 2.9, 2.10, and 2.11. The option
board is mounted below the Regulator board inside the drive. Refer to the appropriate
board instruction manual for more information. Refer to section 2.9 of this manual for
more information on optional drive kits.
2.8.5 Operator Interface Module Connector
Flat-ribbon connector J7 provides a means of attaching the optional Operator

Interface Module (OIM). The OIM is available for use as a remote keypad for the drive.
Refer to the Operator Interface Module manual (D2-3342) for more information.
2.8.6 Keypad/Display
The front panel keypad/display is used to program and operate the drive. See figure
2.15. The four-character display is used to indicate drive parameters, parameter
values, and error codes. The fourteen single LEDs indicate drive status and operating
mode, as well as identify drive outputs whose values are displayed on the
four-character display.
Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for more
information about the keypad/display.
Drive Status LEDs

Display Keypad
! AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING MAN Reverse
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG
Hz
RUN
AUTO PROGRAM
Monitor Mode Kw FORWARD
JOG
LEDs TORQUE REVERSE
Password PROGRAM ENTER
Password LED STOP
START RELIANCE
RESET
ELECTRIC
STOP/RESET START Key

Key
Figure 2.15 – Keypad/Display

2.9 Optional Equipment
Table 2.2 lists standard GV3000/SE kits and options.
Table 2.2 – Standard Kits and Options
Description Model Number Instruction Manual

2SR20400 D2-3291
2SR20600
2SR21200
Snubber Resistor Braking Kits 2SR21800
(NEMA 1 Enclosed) 2SR40400
2SR40600
2SR41200
2SR41800
2ST20019 D2-3291
2ST20054
2ST40009
2ST40027
Snubber Transistor Braking Kits
2ST40075
(Transistor Only, Open Frame Type)
2ST40125
2ST40150
2ST40200
2ST40300
1RG22008 N/A
1RG22015
1RG22025
1RG22045
1RG42008
Line Regeneration Modules
1RG42015
1RG42025
1RG42045
1RG42060
1RG42090
2TC3025 D2-3305
2TC3075
2TC4025
Motor Encoder Cable
2TC4075
2TC4100
2TC4300
2DF4283 D2-3360
2DF4284
CE-Compliant AC Mains Filters 2DF4285
2DF4286
2DF4125
Fan Kit for Line Regeneration Modules 1RG1000 N/A
ControlNet Network Option Board 2CN3000 D2-3390
Interbus-S Network Option Board 2NB3000 49’1333
AutoMax Network Option Board with 2AX3000 D2-3308
762 mm (30”) of Cable
AutoMax RS-232 Adapter Cable 2CA3001 D2-3348
Super Remote Meter Interface (RMI) 2SI3000 D2-3341

Table 2.2 – Standard Kits and Options (Continued)
Description Model Number Instruction Manual

DeviceNet Network Option Board 2DV3000 MAN0096-03
Operator Interface Module (OIM) 2RK3000 D2-3342
CS3000 Control and Configuration 2CS3000 D2-3348
Software
CS3000 RS-232 Computer Cable 2CA3000 D2-3348
115 VAC Interface Option Board 2LB3000 D2-3376
PROFIBUS Interface Board 2PB3000 49.1355

CHAPTER 3
Planning Before Installing
This chapter describes how to plan a GV3000/SE drive installation.
ATTENTION: Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the

construction and operation of this equipment and the hazards involved
! should install, adjust, operate, or service this equipment. Read and
understand this manual and other applicable manuals in their entirety
before proceeding. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: When the level-sense start feature is enabled (P.054 = ON,
the user must ensure that automatic start up of the driven equipment will
not cause injury to operating personnel or damage to the driven
equipment. In addition, the user is responsible for providing suitable
audible or visual alarms or other devices to indicate that this function is
enabled and the drive may start at any moment. Refer to the
GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual (D2-3359) for
additional information. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
ATTENTION: Use of power correction capacitors on the output of the
drive can result in erratic operation of the motor, nuisance tripping, and/or
permanent damage to the drive. Remove power correction capacitors
damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable
local, national, and international codes. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
3.1 General Requirements for the Installation Site

It is important to properly plan before installing a GV3000/SE drive to ensure that the
drive’s environment and operating conditions are satisfactory. Note that no devices are
to be mounted behind the drive. This area must be kept clear of all control and power
wiring. Read the following recommendations before continuing with drive installation.
3.1.1 Making Sure Environmental Conditions are Met
Before deciding on an installation site, consider the following guidelines:

• Verify that NEMA 1 drives can be kept clean, cool, and dry.
• The area chosen should allow the space required for proper air flow as defined in
section 3.1.3.
• Be sure that NEMA 1 drives are away from oil, coolants, or other airborne
contaminants.
Planning Before Installing 3-1

• Do not install the drive above 1000 meters (3300 feet) without derating output
power. For every 91.4 meters (300 feet) above 1000 meters (3300 feet), derate the
output current 1%.
• Verify that the drive location will meet the environmental conditions specified in table
3.1.
Table 3.1 – Environmental Conditions
Condition Specification
Operating Temperature (Ambient) 0° to +40°C (32° to 104°F)
Storage Temperature (Ambient) -40° to +65°C (−40° to +149°F)
Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
3.1.2 Determining Total Area Required Based on Drive Dimensions

Drive dimensions and weights are listed in table 3.2. Overall drive dimensions are
illustrated in figure 3.1 as an aid in calculating the total area required by the drive.
Table 3.2 – Drive Dimensions and Weights
GV3000 Drive Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. D Dim. E Weight

1V4160 1V4460 222.3 mm 280.7 mm 198.1 mm 254.3 mm 200.0 mm 6.3 kg
2V4160 2V4460 8.75" 11.05" 7.80" 10.01" 7.87" 14 lbs
3V4160 3V4460
5V4160 5V4460
7V4160 7V4260 280.6 mm 338.4 mm 248.0 mm 309.1 mm 200.0 mm 9 kg
10V4160 10V4260 11.05" 13.32" 9.76" 12.17" 7.87" 20 lbs
15V4160 15V4260 288.0 mm 463.0 mm 223.0 mm 442.0 mm 238.1 mm 15.75 kg
20V4160 20V4260 11.34" 18.23" 8.78" 17.40" 9.37" 35 lbs
25G4160 25G4260
25V4160 25V4260 376.0 mm 605.0 mm 308.0 mm 565.2 mm 350.0 mm 23.6 kg
30V4160 30V4260 14.80" 23.82" 12.13" 22.25" 13.78" 52 lbs
40V4160 40V4260
50V4160 50V4260 376.0 mm 605.0 mm 308.0 mm 565.2 mm 350.0 mm 25.8 kg
60G4160 60G4260 14.80" 23.82" 12.13" 22.25" 13.78" 57 lbs
50R4160 50T4160 421.0 mm 880.0 mm 360.0 mm 850.0 mm 322.0 mm 70 kg
75R4160 75T4160 16.60" 34.65" 14.17" 33.46" 12.68" 154 lbs
125R4160 465.0 mm 1457 mm 330.0 mm 1414 mm 355.0 mm 96 kg
18.30" 57.36" 12.99" 55.66" 13.97" 211 lbs
200V4160 250V4160 600 mm 2200 mm N/A N/A 600 mm* 382.5 kg
300V4160 350V4160 23.6" 86.6" 23.6" 850 lbs
400V4160
*Dimension E is 660 mm (26.0") with optional disconnect.

A E
U
L
CR U
L
R
D B
1-60 HP
A E
R
U
LR
C U
L
B B D
C
A E
200-400HP 60-150 HP
Figure 3.1 – Drive Dimensions

3.1.3 Verifying the Site Provides for Recommended Air Flow Clearances
Be sure there is adequate clearance for air circulation around the drive. For best air
movement, do not mount GV3000/SE drives directly above each other. Note that no
devices are to be mounted behind the drive. This area must be kept clear of all control
and power wiring. Refer to figure 3.2 for recommended air flow clearances.
10cm (4")
25cm (10")*
10cm 10cm
(4") (4")
10 cm (4")
25 cm (10")*
1-60 HP
VIEW FROM TOP
10 cm (4")
OFF
ON
610 mm
C
U
R
LR
U
L
(24.0")
2 cm (0.8") 2 cm (0.8")
4 cm (1.6")* 4 cm (1.6")*
10 cm (4")
200-400 HP 60-150 HP
* If adjacent to other drives
Figure 3.2 – Recommended Air Flow Clearances

3.1.4 Verifying Power Module Input Ratings Match Supplied Power
It is important to verify that plant power will meet the input power requirements of the
drive’s Power Module circuitry. Refer to table 2.1 for input power rating specifications.
Be sure input power to the drive corresponds to the drive nameplate voltage and
frequency.
3.2 Wiring Requirements for the Drive

Certain drive requirements should be checked before continuing with the drive
installation. Wire sizes, branch circuit protection, encoder feedback (for FVC
regulation), and E-stop wiring (see chapter 7) are all areas that need to be evaluated.
3.2.1 Meeting Terminal Strip Input and Output Specifications
The terminal strip on the Regulator board provides terminals for 24 VDC power for the
eight remote control inputs. Refer to tables A.3 and A.4 for control input and output
specifications.
3.2.2 Determining Wire Size Requirements
Wire size should be determined based on the size of conduit openings, and applicable
local, national, and international codes (e.g., NEC/CEC regulations).

! could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
3.2.2.1 Conduit Entry Opening Sizes
It is important to determine the size of the conduit openings so that the wire planned
for a specific entry point will fit through the opening. Conduit opening sizes are shown
in figures 4.1 through 4.7.
3.2.2.2 Recommended Power Wire Sizes
Input power wiring should be sized according to applicable codes to handle the drive’s
continuous-rated input current. Output wiring should be sized according to applicable
codes to handle the drive’s continuous-rated output current. See tables 3.3 through
3.8 for recommended power wire sizes.
Table 3.3 – Recommended Power Wire Sizes for 1-10 HP Drives
Type of Wiring Terminals Size of Wire (Maximum)

AC Input Power R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Output Power U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
DC Input Power +, - 12 AWG, 3 mm2
Ground


DC Input Power +, - 6 AWG, 13 mm2
Ground

AC Input Power R/L1, S/L2, TL3
DC Input Power +, - 4 AWG (2X), 28 mm2
Ground

AC Input Power 1L1, 1L2, 1L3
2L1, 2L2 4/0 AWG, 95 mm2
Output Power U, V, W
AC Ground PE 2 AWG, 35 mm2
DC Input Power 45, 47 4/0 AWG, 95 mm2
DC Ground 6 AWG, 16 mm2

1L1, 1L2, 1L3
AC Input Power
2L1, 2L2 2/0 AWG (2X), 185 mm2
Output Power U, V, W
AC Ground PE 4/0 AWG, 95 mm2
Type of Wiring Terminals Size of Wire (Maximum)*

Output Power U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 350 MCM (2X), 177 mm2
DC Bus Connections DC-, DC+
Ground GND
*
Wires must be lugged. Lugs must be Burndy YA31-2N or equivalent.

3.2.2.3 Recommended Control and Signal Wire Sizes
The recommended wire sizes to connect I/O signals to the terminal strip on the
Regulator board are shown in table 3.9. Recommended terminal tightening torque is
0.5 Newton-meters (4.5 in-lb). Operator controls can be up to 303 meters (1000 feet)
from the drive.
Table 3.9 – Recommended Terminal Strip Wire Sizes
Terminals Wire Size

1 to 31 20 to 14 AWG, 2 to 0.5 mm2
3.2.2.4 Recommended Motor Lead Lengths
To reduce line disturbances and noise, motor lead length should not exceed 76 meters
(250 feet) for any non-Reliance Electric motor or any non-inverter duty motor.
When total lead length exceeds 76 meters (250 feet), nuisance trips can occur caused
by capacitive current flow to ground. Note that these capacitively-coupled currents
should be taken into consideration when working in areas where drives are running. If
the motor lead length must exceed these limits, the addition of output line reactors or
other steps must be taken to correct the problem. Refer to table 3.11 for a list of
compatible reactors.
For Reliance Electric inverter duty motors, use the recommended lead lengths shown
in table 3.10 as a guideline.
Your application may be restricted to a shorter lead length due to:

• the type of wire
• the placement of wire (for example, in conduit or a cable tray)
• the type of line reactor
• the type of motor.
Figure 3.3 illustrates how to calculate motor lead lengths.
GV3000/SE GV3000/SE GV3000/SE GV3000/SE

Drive Drive Drive Drive
15 m (50’)
38 m (125’) 61 m (200’) 76 m (250’)
38 m (125’)
Motor
61 m (200’)
Motor Motor
8 m (25’) 8 m (25’)
Motor Motor
Motor Motor
This example shows how to measure various motor configurations when the maximum motor lead length is 76 m (250 ft). Note that drives using
vector regulation can be connected to only one motor at a time.
Figure 3.3 – How to Calculate Motor Lead Lengths

Table 3.10 – Recommended Motor Lead Lengths for Reliance Inverter Duty Motors
Maximum Lead Length in Feet with

460 VAC Motor
GV3000/SE Carrier Frequency
HP Rating Filter Type 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
1 to 2 500 500 500
3 to 5 500 500 500
7.5 to 10 750 500 500
15 to 20 800 500 500
None
25 to 60 800 500 500
75 to 100 800 500 500
125 to 150 800 500 500
200 to 400 1000 1000 1000
1 to 2 1000 1000 1000
3 to 5 1000 1000 1000
7.5 to 10 1000 1000 1000
15 to 20 A 5% reactor/filter 1000 1000 1000
25 to 60 at the drive. 1000 1000 1000
75 to 100 1000 1000 1000
125 to 150 1000 1000 1000
200 to 400 1000 1000 1000
Table 3.11 – Compatible Reactors
GV3000/SE 480 Volt GV3000/SE 480 Volt

HP Rating 5% Reactor HP Rating 5% Reactor
1 RL-00202 50 RL-08003
2 RL-00403 60 RL-08003
3 RL-00403 75 RL-10003
5 RL-00803 100 RL-13003
7.5 RL-01203 125 RL-16003
10 RL-01803 150 RL-20003
15 RL-02503 200 RL-25003
20 RL-03503 250 RL-32003
25 RL-03503 300 RL-40003
30 RL-04503 350 RL-50003
40 RL-05503 400 RL-50003
Standard reactors can be used on GV3000/SE drives with carrier frequency settings up to 8 kHz.
All reactors listed are UL-recognized (UL-506 File #E53094) and CSA certified (CSA File #LR29753).

3.2.2.5 Recommended Serial Communication Cable Lengths
Connector J8 on the Regulator board is an RS-232 serial communication port. This

connector allows the drive to communicate with external devices such as a personal
computer using RS-232 protocol. See table A.5.
Two RS-232 cables are available from Reliance:

• 3-meter (10-foot) D-shell 9-pin to 9-pin cable (M/N 2CA3000)
• 0.3-meter (1-foot) D-shell 9-pin to 25-pin adaptor cable (M/N 2CA3001).
User-constructed cables can be up to 15 meters (50 feet) in length.
Note that for communication between a GV3000/SE drive and a personal computer,
the Control and Configuration Software (2CS3000) must also be used. Refer to
instruction manual D2-3348 for more information about the CS3000 software.
The Regulator boards have one set of RS-232 transmit/receive lines. These lines can
be accessed by only one device at a time: connector J8, the RS-232 terminals (1-3)
on the terminal strip, or an Operator Interface Module (OIM).
3.2.3 Selecting Input Line Branch Circuit Fuses
ATTENTION: Most codes require that upstream branch circuit protection

be provided to protect input power wiring. Install the fuses recommended
! in table 3.12. Do not exceed the fuse ratings. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
Input line branch circuit protection fuses must be used to protect the input power lines.
See figures 5.1 and 5.2. Recommended fuse values are shown in table 3.12. The
input fuse ratings listed in table 3.12 are applicable for one drive per branch circuit. No
other load may be applied to that fused circuit.
3.2.4 Meeting Encoder Specifications (FVC Regulation Only)
GV3000/SE drives set up for FVC regulation require an encoder for closed-loop
operation. Refer to table A.6 for specifications. Drives set up for V/Hz or SVC
regulation do not require an encoder for feedback.
3.2.4.1 Encoder Wiring Guidelines
Encoder connections are considered signal level wiring and, therefore, must be run
separate from control and power wiring. Reliance Electric recommends 18 AWG
unshielded twisted pair wires with 2-3 twists per inch for applications to a maximum
distance of 303 meters (1000 feet). The recommended Reliance Electric part number
is 417900-207CG, 18 AWG, 6 conductor (3 twisted pairs).
3.2.5 Verifying Power Module Output Current Rating Is Greater Than

Motor Full Load Amps
Verify that the GV3000/SE output current rating is greater than the motor’s full load
current (amps). Table 2.1 lists the output current values.

Table 3.12 – AC Input Line Fuse Selection Values
Selected Regulation
Drive and Input Voltage Fuse
Model Number Horsepower Rating (+/-10%) Rating*
1V4160 1V4460 V/Hz or Vector (1 HP) 380-460 VAC 6A
2V4160 2V4460 V/Hz or Vector (2 HP) 380-460 VAC 8A
3V4160 3V4460 V/Hz or Vector (3 HP) 380-460 VAC 12 A
7V4160 7V4260 V/Hz or Vector (7.5 HP) 380-460 VAC 25 A
25G4160 25G4260 V/Hz (25 HP) 380-460 VAC 70 A
50R4160 50T4160 Vector (50 HP) or 380-460 VAC 125 A
V/Hz (75 HP)
60G4160 60G4260 V/Hz (60 HP) 380-460 VAC 150 A
75R4160 75T4160 Vector (60-75 HP) or 380-460 VAC 125 A
V/Hz (100 HP) 150 A
125R4160 Vector (100-125 HP) or 380-460 VAC 250 A
V/Hz (125-150 HP)
200V4160 Vector (150-200 HP) or 380-460 VAC **
V/Hz (200 HP)
250V4160 V/Hz or Vector (250 HP) 380-460 VAC **
*Recommended fuse type: UL Class J, 600 V, time delay, or equivalent.
**The drive contains internal fusing sized to protect the drive. Install fuses to protect the input wiring in
accordance with local codes.

CHAPTER 4
Mounting the Drive, Grounding, and
Finding Wire Routing Locations
This chapter shows how to mount the drive and properly ground it. Also shown are the
entry areas where wiring is to be routed in and out of the drive.
4.1 Mounting the Drive

Attach the drive (1-150 HP) to the vertical surface selected using the four (4) mounting
holes provided. In order to maintain a flat mounting surface and to ensure that bolt
tightness is maintained, use washers under the bolt heads. Refer to figure 3.1 and
table 3.2 for drive mounting dimensions. Use the following user-supplied mounting
bolts and washers:
• 1-5HP drives: M6 (1/4")
• 7.5-10HP drives: M8 (5/16")
• 15-60HP drives: M8 or M10 (5/16" or 3/8")
• 60-150HP drives: M8 (5/16")
• 200-400 HP drives are to be floor-mounted. Use the cabinet mounting brackets
supplied with the drive.
4.1.1 Verifying the Drive’s Watts Loss Rating

When mounting the drive inside of another enclosure, you should determine the watts
loss rating of the drive from table 2.1. This table lists the typical full load power loss
watts value under all operating carrier frequencies. Ensure that the enclosure is
adequately ventilated with 0° to 40° C ambient air based on the drive’s watts loss
rating.
4.2 Determining Input, Motor Output, Ground, and

Control Wire Routing for the Drive
All wiring should be installed in conformance with the applicable local, national, and
international codes (e.g., NEC/CEC). Signal wiring, control wiring, and power wiring
must be routed in separate conduits to prevent interference with drive operation. Note
that no wires are to be routed behind the drive. Use grommets, when hubs are not
provided, to guard against wire chafing. Figures 4.1 through 4.7 show the wire routing,
grounding terminal, and power terminal strips of the GV3000/SE drives.
ATTENTION: Do not route signal and control wiring with power wiring in
the same conduit. This can cause interference with drive operation.
! Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to, or
destruction of, the equipment.
Mounting the Drive, Grounding, and Finding Wire Routing Locations 4-1
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit. This will
minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise reduction methods. If
more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required, shielded cable
must be used. If possible, each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads.
ATTENTION: Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends

to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages. Also, if a
! drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this
conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from
cross-coupled motor leads. Failure to observe these precautions could
result in bodily injury.
4.2.1 Replacing Conduit Plugs

The plastic plugs installed in the conduit hub of all NEMA 4x/12 and NEMA 12 drives
must be replaced with NPT connectors or hole plugs having a similar enclosure rating.
Seal all threaded connections.
4.3 Grounding the Drive

! could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
Use the following steps to ground the drive:

Step 1. Remove the drive’s cover. On 200-400 HP drives, open the outer cabinet
door.
Step 2. Run a suitable equipment grounding conductor unbroken from the drive’s
ground terminal to the motor’s ground terminal and then to earth ground. See
figures 4.1 to 4.7, 5.1, and 5.2.
Step 3. Connect a suitable grounding conductor to the motor frame, the remote
control station (if used), and the transformer. Run each conductor unbroken
to earth ground.
When adding more than one grounding conductor wire to a single chassis
ground, twist the conductors together.
Step 4. Reattach the drive’s cover. On 200-400 HP drives, close the outer cabinet
door.

AUTO Forward
RPM RUNNING MAN Reverse
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET
START
REGULATOR TERMINAL STRIP
POWER TERMINAL STRIP
GROUND TERMINAL
SIGNAL CONTROL SIGNAL CONTROL INPUT POWER

(TERMINAL STRIP) -OR- AND MOTOR LEADS
SNUBBER RESISTOR
BRAKING
USER WIRE ROUTING
COVER
BASE
(3) 1/2" NPT CONDUIT

HUBS (NEMA 4X/12)
-OR-
(3) .875 [22.2mm] DIA
Bottom View HOLES (NEMA 1)
Figure 4.1 – Wire Routing Locations for 1-5 HP Drives
T3
AUTO Forward
RPM RUNNING Reverse
MAN
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO
JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
POWER TERMINAL STRIP
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 + - +10V 10COM U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
GROUND TERMINALS
SIGNAL CONTROL INPUT POWER MOTOR LEADS

(TERMINAL STRIP) -OR- -OR-
SNUBBER RESISTOR INPUT POWER
BRAKING AND MOTOR LEADS
USER WIRE ROUTING
COVER
BASE

HUBS (NEMA 4X/12)
-OR-
(4) .875 [22.2mm] DIA
Bottom View
HOLES (NEMA 1)
Figure 4.2 – Wire Routing Locations for 7.5-10 HP Drives

AUTO Forward
RPM RUNNING MAN Reverse
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO PROGRAM
JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET
START
POWER STRIP TERMINALS
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
GROUND TERMINALS
SIGNAL CONTROL INPUT POWER MOTOR LEADS

(TERMINAL STRIP) -OR- -OR-
SNUBBER RESISTOR INPUT POWER
AND MOTOR LEADS
BRAKING
USER WIRE ROUTING

HUB (NEMA 12)
-OR-
(1) .875” [22.2 mm] DIA
HOLE (NEMA 1)
COVER
BASE

HUBS (NEMA 12)
-OR-
(3) 1.094“ [27.8 mm] DIA
HOLES (NEMA 1)
Bottom View
SNUBBER RESISTOR
BRAKING INPUT POWER
SIGNALS/CONTROL
(TERMINAL STRIP)
GROUND
TERMINAL INPUT POWER
TERMINALS
GRD
13.0
A
S/L2 T/L3
12.0
RV2 RV3
11.0
RV1
WIRE ROUTING CHANNEL

10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
6.0
AMPS JOG RUN

Hz AUTO PROG JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
5.0
STOP
RESET
START
REGULATOR
TERMINAL STRIP
4.0
16 20
3.0
2.0
1.0
C7 C8
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
A
A
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 9.0 10.0
GRD GRD
OUTPUT POWER
GROUND TERMINALS
SIGNALS/CONTROL INPUT POWER

(TERMINAL STRIP) OR
SNUBBER RESISTOR
MOTOR LEADS BRAKING
USER WIRE ROUTING

NEMA 12: NEMA 12:
COVER 1-1/4" NPT
3/4" NPT
CONDUIT HUBS CONDUIT HUBS
(2 TOP, 3 BOTTOM)
(1 TOP, 2 BOTTOM)
-OR-
-OR- NEMA 1:
NEMA 1: 1.75” [44.5 mm] DIA HOLES
1.125” [28.6 mm] DIA HOLES (2 TOP, 3 BOTTOM)
(1 TOP, 2 BOTTOM)
BASE
BASE MOUNTING BRACKET
BOTTOM VIEW

DC INPUT
1-3/4" DIA TERMINALS
TYPICAL AND GROUND
MOTOR
AC LEADS SIGNALS
45 47
VIEW FROM BOTTOM
GND
(PE1) GND
IL1 IL2 IL3 U V W
AC INPUT
TERMINALS
AND GROUND
AC OUTPUT
TERMINALS
AND GROUND
Figure 4.5 – Wire Routing Locations for 60-100 HP Drive
AC INPUT
IL1 IL2 IL3 VIEW FROM TOP
AC INPUT
TERMINALS
AND GROUND
1-1/2" DIA AC GROUND

TYPICAL INPUTS
VIEW FROM BOTTOM
AC OUTPUT
TERMINALS U V W
1-1/2" DIA OUTPUT GROUND SIGNALS 7/8" DIA
TYPICAL TERMINALS TYPICAL

GROUND, A-C INPUT AND A-C OUTPUT TERMINALS
SIGNALS (VIA WIRING TRAY)
VIEW FROM TOP

(with Cover Removed)
POWER CONNECTIONS
PULL SHIELD TABS IN AND ROTATE SHIELD OUT
CONNECT USING 350MCM TWO HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
TORQUE TO 325IN-LBS
WIRING TRAY
GND DC- DC+ U V W R S T
-DC +DC VOLTMETER TEST POINTS
DANGER
! DANGER USE
E F
FUSE
807300-142A
FUS
WIRING HARNESS 807300-138R
D-C BUS CAPACITORS RETAIN HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES

AFTER INPUT POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED.
1FU
CLASS CC
LITTLEFUSE
GND DC- DC+ U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
WAIT FIVE (5) MINUTES FOR THE D-C BUS
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND THEN CHECK THE TYPE MR E
US
E F
OR EQUIV.
FUSE
VOLTAGE WITH A VOLTMETER THROUGH THE ACCESS

SLOTS SHOWN ABOVE. VOLTAGE MUST BE 50 VOLTS 2A FUS
OR LESS PRIOR TO SERVICING. 2FU
BM
SIGNALS (VIA WIRING TRAY)
ALLOW 6 INCH RADIUS SERVICE LOOP

WITH INTERCONNECTION WIRING FROM
CONTROL BOARD WIRING TRAY TO
J1 CONNECTOR ON REGULATOR BOARD.
CHAPTER 5
Installing Input Power Wiring
This chapter describes incoming line components and how to install them.
5.1 Installing Transformers and Reactors (Optional)

Input isolation transformers might be needed to help eliminate the following:
• Damaging line voltage transients from reaching the drive.
• Line noise from the drive back to the incoming power source.
• Damaging currents that could develop if a point inside the drive becomes grounded.
Observe the following guidelines when installing an isolation transformer:
• A power disconnecting device must be installed between the power line and the
primary of the transformer.
• If the power disconnecting device is a circuit breaker, the circuit breaker trip rating
must be coordinated with the in-rush current (10 to 12 times full load current) of the
transformer.
• An input isolation transformer rated more than 1000 KVA for 460 VAC with less than
5% impedance should NOT be used directly ahead of the drive without additional
impedance between the drive and the transformer.
ATTENTION: Distribution system capacity above the maximum

recommended system KVA (1000 KVA for 460 VAC) requires the use of
! an isolation transformer, a line reactor, or other means of adding similar
impedance to the drive power input. Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment
ATTENTION: When the AC line is shared directly with other
SCR-rectified drives, an optional snubber resistor braking kit might be
required to alleviate excess DC bus voltage. Failure to observe these
precautions could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment
The GV3000/SE AC line distribution system capacity is 1000 KVA, three-phase with
30,000 amps symmetrical fault current capacity with a line impedance of less than 5%.
The symmetrical fault current may be increased to 85,000 amps if the appropriate
three-phase AC line reactor is used as shown in table 5.1.
Installing Input Power Wiring 5-1

Table 5.1 – AC Line Reactors
Drive Line Reactor Inductance (+/-10%)

1 HP 12.0 mh
2 to 3 HP 6.5 mh
5 HP 3.0 mh
7.5 HP 2.5 mh
10 HP 1.5 mh
15 HP 1.2 mh
20 to 25 HP 0.8 mh
30 HP 0.7 mh
40 HP 0.5 mh
50 to 60 HP 0.4 mh
200 to 400 HP 30 µh
5.2 Installing Fuses for Branch Circuit Protection

Install the required, user-supplied branch circuit protection fuses according to the
applicable local, national, and international codes (e.g., NEC/CEC). The fuses must
be installed in the line before the drive input terminals. See figures 5.1 and 5.2. Fuse
value selections are provided in table 3.12.
ATTENTION: Most codes require that upstream branch protection be

provided to protect input power wiring. Failure to observe this precaution
! could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
5.3 Installing a Required External/Separate Input

Disconnect
An input disconnect must be installed in the line before the drive input terminals in
accordance with local, national, and international codes (e.g., NEC/CEC). The
disconnect should be sized according to the in-rush current as well as any additional
loads the disconnect might supply. The trip rating for the inrush current (10-12 times
full load current) should be coordinated with that of the input isolation transformer, if
used. Refer to section 5.1 for additional information. Note that 200-400 HP drives may
be supplied with an optional AC disconnect.

3-Phase AC 3-Phase AC
Input Voltage 460 V Input Voltage 460 V
181 182 183 GND 181 182 183 GND
Manual
Disconnect User-
Supplied
Fuse Fuse
User-
Supplied
R S T
1L1 1L2 1L3
GND (PE)
Manual
Disconnect
(Optional)
Fuse
R S T
1L1 1L2 1L3
GND
(PE)
~ - ~ -
GV 3000/SE GV 3000/SE
Power Power
Module Module
- -
~ ~
U V W U V W
GND T1 T2 T3 GND
Motor Overload Motor Overload

User- Relay (Optional if User- Relay (Optional if
Supplied Electronic Supplied Electronic
Overload is Used) Overload is Used)
M M
(1-150 HP) (200-400 HP)
Figure 5.1 – Typical AC Input Electrical Connections

DC Input Voltage
620V Nominal
Manual
Disconnect
DC
Fuse
User-Supplied
R S T
1L1 1L2 1L3
GND
(PE)
~ -
47 GV 3000/SE
Power Module
45
-
~
U V W
T1 T2 T3 GND
Motor Overload Relay

User-Supplied (Optional if Electronic
Overload is Used)
Note that the following GV3000/SE drives are not to be used on a common DC bus: M/N 125R4160, 200V4160, 250V4160,
300V4160, and 400V4160.
Figure 5.2 – Typical DC Bus Electrical Connections

5.4 Installing Power Wiring from the AC Input Line to the
Drive’s Power Terminals
Use the following steps to connect AC input power to the drive:
Step 1. Wire the AC input power leads by routing them according to drive type. Refer
to figures 4.1 through 4.7. Tables 3.3 through 3.8 contain the recommended
power wiring sizes.
Note that on 200-400 HP drives, knockouts for conduit installation are not
provided. If incoming power is 380 or 415 VAC, the fan transformer taps must
be changed before the power leads are connected. See section 5.6.
Step 2. Connect the three-phase AC input power leads (three-wire 380-460 VAC) to
the appropriate terminals.
On 1-60 HP drives, connect the AC input power leads to terminals R/L1,

S/L2, T/L3 on the power terminal strip.
On 60-150 HP drives, connect the AC input power leads to terminals 1L1,

1L2, and 1L3.
On 200-400 HP drives, connect the AC input power leads to terminals R, S,

and T.
Step 3. Tighten the AC input power terminals to the proper torque as shown in table
5.2.
Table 5.2 – Terminal Tightening Torques
Drive Terminals Maximum Tightening Torque

1-25HP All 1.08 Newton-meters (9.5 in-lb)
25-60HP All 13.5 Newton-meters (10 ft-lb)
1L1, 1L2, 1L3
U, V, W 10 Newton-meters (7.4 ft-lb)
60-100HP 45,47
2.5 Newton-meters (1.8 ft-lb)
PE,
1L1, 1L2, 1L3, PE 34 Newton-meters (25 ft-lb)
100-150HP U, V, W
34 Newton-meters (25 ft-lb)
, 45, 47
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
200-400HP 34 Newton-meters (25 ft-lb)
DC-, DC+
GND

5.5 Installing Power Wiring from an External DC Bus to
the Drive’s Internal DC Bus Terminals
Use the following steps to connect DC input power to the drive:
Step 1. Wire the DC input power leads by routing them according to drive type. Refer
to figures 4.1 through 4.7. Tables 3.3 through 3.8 contain the recommended
power wiring sizes.
Note that the following GV3000/SE drives are not to be used on a common
DC bus: M/N 125R4160, 200V4160, 250V4160, 300V4160, 350V4160, and
400V4160.
ATTENTION: Do not route signal and control wiring in the same conduit
with power wiring. This can cause interference with drive operation.
ATTENTION: If the GV3000/SE drive is connected to an external DC
bus, the user is responsible for DC bus short-circuit protection. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of,
the equipment.
Step 2. Connect the DC input power leads (two-wire 620 VDC nominal) to the proper
terminals.
On 1-60 HP drives, connect the DC input power leads to terminals + and - on

the power terminal strip.
On 60-100 HP drives, connect the DC input power leads to terminals 45 and 47.
Note that the maximum discharge rate of the DC bus supply should be
200 V/second.
Step 3. Tighten the DC input power terminals to the proper torque as shown in table 5.2.
Step 4. On 60-100 HP drives using volts/hertz regulation, set parameter H.017 to a
value greater than one to enable DC bus operation. Refer to the GV3000/SE
Software Start-Up and Reference manual for additional information.
5.6 Changing Blower Transformer Taps

On 200-400 HP drives, the blower transformer is factory-wired for 460 VAC operation.
If incoming power is 380 or 415 VAC, the blower transformer taps must be changed
before the AC input power leads are connected as described in section 5.4. Use the
following procedure to change the transformer taps:
Step 1. Locate the blower transformer as shown in figure 2.8. The transformer has
three taps: 380V, 415V, and 460V. The transformer is factory-wired for 460V
input power.
Step 2. Unplug the wire connected to the 460V tap and move it to the appropriate
tap, either 380V or 415V.
Step 3. Continue with the AC input power wiring installation described in section 5.4.

CHAPTER 6
Installing Output Power Wiring
This chapter provides instructions on wiring output contactors, motor overload

protection, and output wiring to the motor.
6.1 Installing Output Contactors (Optional)

Output contactors provide a positive means of disconnecting the motor from the drive.
If the application requires the use of output contactors, contact Reliance Electric for
assistance.
6.2 Installing Mechanical Motor Overload Protection

(Optional)
To provide the motor with overload protection, local, national, and international codes
(e.g., NEC/CEC) require one of the following:
• A motor thermostat be installed internal to the motor.
• An electronic thermal motor overload relay, sized to protect the motor, be installed
between the motor and the drive’s output terminals.
The Motor Overload Enable parameter (P.040) can be used in place of thermal motor
overload relays in single motor applications. Note, however, that temperature
measuring devices integral to the motor are the best way to thermally protect AC
motors under all conditions. Parameter P.040 must be enabled to provide overload
protection. Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for
more information.
In multiple-motor applications (V/Hz regulation only), each motor must have its own
user-supplied overload protection.
6.3 Installing Output Wiring from the Drive Output

Terminals to the Motor
Use the following steps to connect the AC output power wiring from the drive to the
motor:
Step 1. Wire the three-phase AC output power motor leads by routing them
according to drive type. Refer to figures 4.1 to 4.7. Tables 3.3 to 3.8 contain
the recommended power wiring sizes.
Do not route more than three sets of motor leads through a single conduit.
This will minimize cross-talk that could reduce the effectiveness of noise
reduction methods. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit
are required, shielded cable must be used. If possible, each conduit should
contain only one set of motor leads.
Installing Output Power Wiring 6-1

! Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to, or
destruction of, the equipment
ATTENTION: Unused wires in conduit must be grounded at both ends
to avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages. Also, if a
drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this
conduit should be disabled to eliminate the possible shock hazard from
cross-coupled motor leads. Failure to observe these precautions could
Step 2. Connect the three-phase AC output power motor leads to the appropriate
output terminals.
On 1-60 HP drives, connect the motor leads to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
on the power terminal strip.
On 60-150 HP drives, connect the motor leads to terminals U, V, and W.
On 200-400 HP drives, connect the motor leads to terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3.
Step 3. Tighten the three-phase AC output power terminals to the proper torque
according to drive type as shown in table 5.2.

CHAPTER 7
Wiring the Regulator Board
Terminal Strip
This chapter describes how to wire the Regulator board terminal strip for stop,
encoder feedback, and remote control signals.
The signals available through the terminal strip are shown in tables 7.1 to 7.7 and
figures 7.1 and 7.2. Table 7.8 provides additional information.
Note that when the Control Source parameter (P.000) is set to remote (rE), the drive
will be controlled by the signals connected to the terminal strip. Refer to the
GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for more information on how
parameter P.000 is used to specify where the drive is controlled from.
Table 7.1 – RS-232 Connections (Terminals 1-3)
Terminal # Signal
1 Transmit (Tx)
2 Receive (Rx)
3 Regulator Common
Notes: The RS-232 terminals should only be used when the RS-232 communication
port (J8) or an Operator Interface Module (OIM) is not being used, as all three devices
use the same transmit/receive lines.
Table 7.2 – Encoder Connections (Terminals 4-9)
Terminal # Signal
4 +15 VDC
5 Phase A
6 Phase A Not
7 Phase B
8 Phase B Not
9 Regulator Common
Notes: An encoder feedback device must be installed if FVC regulation is used.
Wiring the Regulator Board Terminal Strip 7-1

Table 7.3 – Analog Output Connections (Terminals 10 and 11)
Terminal # Signal
10 Analog Meter Output
11 Regulator Common
Notes: The output of this terminal is either 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA as determined by the
setting of jumper J17 on the Regulator board. The analog output must also be
programmed via parameter P.012 for an indication of speed and direction or percent of
torque.
Table 7.4 – Analog Speed/Torque Reference Connections (Terminals 12-15)
Terminal # Signal
12 Isolated Reference Voltage
13 VDC Speed/Torque Reference
14 mA Speed/Torque Reference
15 Isolated Reference Common
Notes: The analog speed/torque (P.008/U.000) reference is either +/-10 VDC or
+/-20 mA, as determined by the setting of jumper J4 on the Regulator board. The
analog reference can be adjusted using parameters P.009, P.010, and P.011.
Refer to Appendix G in the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for
more information about the analog input.
.
Table 7.5 – Digital Input Connections (Terminals 16-25)
Terminal # Signal
16 +24 VDC (Current Limited) (For remote control digital inputs only)
17 Digital Input 8 (Remote/Local) - Programmable
18 Digital Input 7 (Ramp1/Ramp2) - Programmable
19 Digital Input 6 (Forward/Reverse) - Programmable
20 Function Loss
21 Run/Jog
22 Reset
23 Stop
24 Start
25 +24 VDC Common
Notes: When a user-installed function loss input, a coast-to-stop pushbutton, or another
external interlock is installed, the factory-installed jumper connecting terminals 16 and
20 (or 16A and 20A) must be removed so that a contact, when open, will stop the drive.
Terminals 17, 18, and 19 (remote control inputs 8, 7, and 6) are programmed using
parameters P.007, P.008, and P.031 through P.038. Factory default settings are shown
here in parentheses. Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference
manual for more information.

Table 7.6 – Snubber Resistor Braking Connections (Terminals 26 and 27)
Terminal # Signal
26 Snubber Resistor Braking Signal (1-10 HP Drives only)
27 +24 VDC Common
Notes: These terminals are used with older Snubber Resistor Braking kits that require
a gate turn-on signal from the drive (for example, the M/N 2DB4010 series).
Table 7.7 – Status Relay Connections (Terminals 28-31)
Terminal # Signal
28 N.C Relay Contact
29 N.C. Relay Common
30 N.O. Relay Contact
31 N.O. Relay Common
Notes: Relay contact closure is programmable through parameter P.013. Refer to the
GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for more information.

DIGITAL INPUT 7 (RAMP1/RAMP 2)
PHASE B NOT
PHASE B
Remote 4-20 mA
Speed/Torque
Reference
Important: A maintained function loss

switch should be used if P.054 (Level
Sense Start Enable) = ON and
P.026 (Function Loss Response) = 1.
*FOR 15-60 HP DRIVES, USE 16A INSTEAD OF 16 AND 20A INSTEAD OF 20. ALSO SEE FIGURE 2.14.
Figure 7.1 – Two-Wire Start/Stop Sample Control Wiring

DIGITAL INPUT 7 (RAMP1/RAMP 2)

PHASE B NOT
Remote 4-20 mA
Speed/Torque
Reference
Important: A maintained function loss

switch should be used if P.054 (Level
Sense Start Enable) = ON and
P.026 (Function Loss Response) = 1.
*FOR 15-60 HP DRIVES, USE 16A INSTEAD OF 16 AND 20A INSTEAD OF 20. ALSO SEE FIGURE 2.14.
Figure 7.2 – Three-Wire Start/Stop Sample Control Wiring

7.1 Stopping the Drive
ATTENTION: When P.055 is set to ON, the STOP/RESET key is

functional only from the selected control source. As a safety precaution,
! Reliance Electric recommends that an emergency stop push button be
located near the drive in an easily accessible location. As a further safety
precaution, the user should post a warning on the drive to alert personnel
that the STOP/RESET key is not functional. Failure to observe this
ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired emergency
stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry. This circuit must disable the
system in case of improper operation. Uncontrolled machine operation
may result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in bodily injury.
Depending upon the requirements of the application, the GV3000/SE drive can be
programmed to provide either a coast-to-rest or a ramp-to-rest operational stop
without physical separation of the power source from the motor.
A coast-to-rest stop turns off the transistor power device drivers. A ramp-to-rest stop
fires the transistor power device drivers until the motor comes to a stop, and then turns
off the power devices.
The user can also program zero speed with power maintained to the motor, but in this
condition, the drive is not actually stopped.
See the description of terminals 23 and 24 or Stop Type (P.025) for more information
on how to program the operational stop.
In addition to the operational stop, the user must provide a hardwired emergency stop
external to the drive. The emergency stop circuit must contain only hardwired
electromechanical components. Operation of the emergency stop must not depend on
electronic logic (hardware or software) or on the communication of commands over an
electronic network or link.
Parameter P.055 (STOP/RESET Key Disable), can be used to change the operation of
the STOP/RESET key. See the P.055 parameter description in the software manual for
more information.
Note that the user-installed hardwired emergency stop may be used at any time to
stop the drive.
7.1.1 Compliance with Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1:1992
This section applies to users who must comply with machinery safety standard EN
60204-1:1992, part 9.2.5.4, Emergency Stop.
The GV3000/SE drive coast-to-rest stop is a category 0 operational stop. The

ramp-to-rest stop is a category 1 operational stop. In addition, it is possible to
implement a category 2 stop, with power maintained to the motor at zero speed.
The required external hardwired emergency stop must be either a category 0 or 1

stop, depending on the user’s risk assessment of the associated machinery. In order
to fully comply with machinery safety standard EN60204-1:1992, part 9.2.5.4, at least
one of the two stop methods must be a category 0 stop. Refer to Appendix B for more
information.

7.2 Wiring the Encoder Feedback Device
(FVC Regulation Only)
If the GV3000/SE drive is programmed to provide FVC regulation, an encoder must be
installed. Drives using V/Hz or SVC regulation do not require the use of an encoder
feedback device. The encoder connects to terminals 4 through 9 of the Regulator
board terminal strip as shown in table 7.8.
Table 7.8 – Encoder Connections
Terminal Encoder Connection

4 Encoder Supply +15 VDC (250 mA capacity)
5 Encoder Phase A Differential Input
6 Encoder Phase A Not Differential Input
7 Encoder Phase B Differential Input
8 Encoder Phase B Not Differential Input
9 Encoder/Regulator Common
Use the following procedure to connect an encoder to the Regulator board’s terminal
strip:
Step 1. Connect the encoder’s wires to terminals 4 through 9 of the terminal strip.
See figure 7.3. See table A.6 for additional encoder specifications. Refer to
section 3.2.4.1 for encoder wiring guidelines.
Step 2. Set the following parameters to establish the maximum motor speed:
• P.004: Maximum Speed
• U.001: Encoder PPR
• U.002: Motor Poles
• U.003: Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
• U.005: Motor Nameplate RPM
• U.017: Motor Top Speed
Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for parameter
descriptions.

Tamagawa-Style, 16-Pin MS Connector
View of Encoder Cable MS Connector (Female)
(M/N 2TC4025 and 2TC4075)
Regulator
Terminal Strip Connector/Cable End
Terminal 6 Pin 1 Phase A
Terminal 5 Pin 2 Phase A Not
Terminal 4 Pin 6 0 VDC

Terminal 9 Pin 12 +15 VDC
Terminal 7 Pin 8 Phase B

Terminal 8 Pin 9 Phase B Not
Dynapar-Style, 10-Pin MS Connector

A
View of Encoder Cable MS Connector (Female) H
(M/N 2TC3025 and 2TC3075) B I G
C J F
Regulator F E
Terminal 6 Pin A Phase A
Terminal 5 Pin H Phase A Not
Terminal 4 Pin F 0 VDC

Terminal 9 Pin D +15 VDC
Terminal 7 Pin B Phase B

Terminal 8 Pin I Phase B Not
Lakeshore-Style, 10-Pin MS Connector 1 2 3 4 5

View of Encoder Cable MS Connector (Female)
(Lakeshore M/N SL56 Slim-Tach Encoder)
6 7 8 9 10
Regulator
Terminal 6 Pin 3 Phase A
Terminal 5 Pin 8 Phase A Not
Terminal 4 Pin 1 0 VDC

Terminal 9 Pin 6 +15 VDC
Terminal 7 Pin 2 Phase B

Terminal 8 Pin 7 Phase B Not
Figure 7.3 – Encoder Wiring Connections

7.3 Wiring the Signal and Control I/O
Wire the drive’s signal and control I/O to the terminal strip as shown in table 7.8.
Table 7.9 – Wiring Signal and Control I/O to the Terminal Strip
Terminal
Number Description Parameters/Wiring Connections
Wiring RS-232 Signals
1 RS-232 Transmit Note that RS-232 communication between the drive and a
personal computer requires the use of the Control and
2 RS-232 Receive Configuration software. Refer to instruction manual D2-3348
for more information.
3 RS-232 Signal/Regulator These terminals should only be used when the RS-232 port
Common (J8) or an Operator Interface Module (OIM) are not being
used, as all three devices use the same transmit/receive
lines.
Wiring Encoder Inputs

4-9 Encoder Wiring See section 7.2.

Table 7.8 - Wiring Signal and Control I/O to the Terminal Strip (Continued)
Terminal
Wiring Analog Outputs
10 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA The setting of parameter P.012 selects the terminal strip
Analog Output Reference analog output source (either speed or torque). Jumper J17
must also be set. See figure 2.13.
11 Regulator Common
The 4-20mA current selection requires a power supply for
operation. The power can be sourced from the encoder
supply, terminal 4 (15VDC), or from an external 15V power
supply. Note that the maximum supply current from terminal
4 is 250mA (encoder and current source) at 15V.
On the 1-60 HP and 200-400 HP Regulator boards, terminals
9 and 11 are internally connected.
Terminal
Strip
Load
(Meter or Analog Input)
Connection to the negative side of the

power supply is only required
when an external 15V power supply is used.

Terminal
Wiring Analog Speed Reference Inputs
12 Isolated Reference Related parameters:
Voltage (+10VDC) •P.000: Control Source
13 Analog Speed/Torque
•P.009: Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset
Reference Input Voltage •P.010: Terminal Strip Analog Input Gain
(+/- 10VDC) •P.011: Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure
14 Analog Speed/Torque Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference

Reference Input Current manual for additional parameter information.
(0-20mA)
Jumper J4 must also be set. See figure 2.12.
15 Isolated Speed/Torque
Reference Common
(Voltage/Current)
Refer to Appendix G in the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up

and Reference manual (D2-3359) for more information about
the analog input.

Terminal
Wiring a Remote/Local Input
16 +24 VDC Power Supply Current limited for remote input logic use only.
17 Digital Input 8 Digital input 8 is control function programmable through
(Default - Remote/Local) parameter P.007.
ATTENTION: If a maintained start contact is used when the control source = rE, switching
from local to remote from the terminal strip will cause power to be applied to the motor if
! the remote start contact is closed. Stay clear of rotating machinery in this case. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
The following parameters must be set:
• P.000: Control Source (Only active when P.000 = rE)
• P.006: Second Menu Password
• P.007: Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure (Selects and
assigns a control function to digital inputs 6 to 8)
• P.008: Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
(Analog, Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP), or Preset
Speeds)
Note that based on the settings of parameters P.000, P.007,

P.008, and r.030 if an RMI board is used, the following
parameters can affect digital input 8:
• P.023: MOP Accel/Decel Time
• P.024: MOP Reset Configuration
• P.031 to P.038: Preset Speeds 1-8
Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference
manual for additional information.
Terminal 17 On = Local Control

Diagram shows factory setting.

Terminal
Wiring an Additional Ramp Input
(Default - Ramp1/Ramp2) parameter P.007. The following parameters must be set:
• P.000: Control Source
• P.001: Accel Time 1 (Ramp 1)
• P.002: Decel Time 1 (Ramp 1)
• P.008: Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source (Analog
Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP), or Preset Speeds)
• P.017: Accel Time 2 (Ramp 2)
• P.018: Decel Time 2 (Ramp 2)
Terminal 18 On = Ramp 2
Diagram shows factory setting.

Terminal
Wiring a Forward/Reverse Input
(Default - Forward/Reverse) parameter P.007. The following parameters must be set:
• P.000: Control Source
• P.008: Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
(Analog, Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP), or Preset
Speeds)
• P.027: Forward/Reverse Configuration
If P.027 = 1
Forward Direction Only
Terminal 19 On = Reverse Direction

Diagram shows factory setting. From the encoder end of the
motor, clockwise rotation indicates forward motor movement.

Terminal
Wiring a Function Loss Input
20 Digital Input 5 The following parameter must be set:
(Function Loss) • P.026: Function Loss Response
A signal must be present at terminal 20 for the drive to be
able to start. See figures 7.1 and 7.2.
The drive is shipped from the factory with a jumper between

terminals 16 and 20 which provides the signal. The function
loss input should be in series with the drive’s external
interlocks. In this case, the jumper must be removed before
the connections are made. See figure 2.14.
(or from 16A and 20A on 15-60HP drives)
Terminal 20 On = No Function Loss
Important: A maintained function loss switch should be

used if P.054 (Level Sense Start Enable) = ON
and P.026 = 1.
Wiring a Run/Jog Input
21 Digital Input 4 The following parameters must be set:
(Run/Jog) • P.000: Control Source
• P.020: Jog Speed Reference
• P.021: Jog Ramp Accel Time
• P.022: Jog Ramp Decel Time
Terminal 21 On = Jog Operation

Terminal
Wiring the Reset Input
22 Digital Input 3 The following parameter must be set:
(Reset) • P.000: Control Source
Terminal 22 On = Reset
Wiring the Stop/Start Inputs
23 Digital Input 2 The following parameters must be set:
(Stop) • P.000: Control Source
24 Digital Input 1
• P.025: Stop Type
(Start)
Terminal 23 Off = Stop

Terminal 24 On Transition = Start
25 24 VDC Isolated Common
Wiring the Snubber Resistor
26 Snubber Resistor Braking Used with older Snubber Resistor Braking Kits that require a
Control Signal gate turn-on signal from the drive (for example, the M/N
2DB4010 series).
27 +24 VDC Isolated Common
Note that terminals 26 and 27 are not to be used with
Snubber Resistor Braking Kits M/N 2SR40400, 2SR40600,
2SR41200, and 2SR41800.

Terminal
Wiring the Output Status Relays
28 Normally-Closed Contact Both Form A and Form B contacts are rated for
(Form B) 250 VAC/30 VDC at 5 amps resistive or 2 amps inductive
load.
29 Normally-Closed Contact
Common (Form B) The following parameter must be set:
• P.013: Output Relay Configuration
30 Normally-Open Contact
(Form A) Note that depending on the setting of parameter P.013, the
relay coil will energize (the normally-open contact will close
31 Normally-Open Contact
and the normally-closed contact will open). Refer to the
Common (Form A)
GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for
more information.
N.C. N.O.
Com. Com
28 29 30 31
User-Supplied
Device
Parameter P.013 selects output indication.

CHAPTER 8
Completing the Installation
This chapter provides instructions on how to perform a final check of the installation
before power is applied to the drive.

! should start and adjust it. Read and understand this manual in its entirety
8.1 Checking the Installation

Use the following procedure to verify the condition of the installation:

Step 1. Turn off, lock out, and tag the input power to the drive. Wait five minutes.
Step 2. Verify that the DC bus voltage is zero. Refer to section 9.3.
Step 3. If a function loss coast-stop pushbutton has been installed, verify that it has
been wired correctly. Be sure the factory-installed jumper at terminals 16 and
20 (or 16A and 20A) has been removed so that the coast-stop pushbutton
will work.
ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired emergency

stop circuit outside of the drive circuitry. This circuit must disable the
! system in case of improper operation. Uncontrolled machine operation
may result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to observe this
Step 4. Remove any debris, such as metal shavings, from around the drive.
Step 5. Check that there is adequate clearance around the drive.
Step 6. Verify that there is nothing mounted behind the drive.
Step 7. Verify that the wiring to the terminal strip and the power terminals is correct.
Step 8. Check that the wire size is within terminal specification and that the wires are
tightened properly.
Step 9. Check that user-supplied branch circuit protection is installed and correctly
rated.
Completing the Installation 8-1

Step 10. Check that the incoming power is rated correctly.
Step 11. Check the motor installation and length of motor leads.
Step 12. Disconnect any power correction capacitors connected between the drive
and the motor.
Step 13. Check that the rating of the transformer (if used) matches the drive
requirements and is connected properly.
Step 14. Verify that a properly-sized ground wire is installed and a suitable earth
ground is used. Check for and eliminate any grounds between the motor
frame and the motor power leads. Verify that all ground leads are unbroken.
Step 15. Uncouple the motor from any driven machinery to initially start the drive.
8.2 Installing the Cover for NEMA 4X/12 Drives

In order to maintain the integrity of the NEMA 4X/12 enclosures, care must be taken
when re-installing the covers. Use the following steps to re-install the covers:
Step 1. Before installing the cover, check that the gaskets on the cover are flat and
within the gasket channels.
Step 2. Position the cover and sequentially tighten the captive screws to ensure even
compression of the gaskets. Do not exceed 2.2 Nm (20 in-lb) of torque on
these screws.
8.3 Powering Up After Installation Is Complete

Use the following procedure to verify that the drive is installed correctly and is
receiving the proper line voltage:
Step 1. Turn the drive’s input power disconnect to the On position.
Step 2. Apply power to the drive.
Step 3. Follow the start-up procedure in the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and
Reference manual.

CHAPTER 9
Troubleshooting the Drive
This chapter describes how to troubleshoot the drive and the equipment that is
needed to do so. Also provided are replacement part lists and information on clearing
faults.
9.1 Test Equipment Needed To Troubleshoot

An isolated multimeter will be needed to measure DC bus voltage and to make
resistance checks. Note that dedicated troubleshooting test points are not provided.
9.2 Drive Alarms and Faults

The drive will display alarm and fault codes to assist in troubleshooting when a
problem develops during self-tuning or drive operation.
If an alarm condition occurs, the drive will continue to run and a 2- or 3-digit alarm
code will flash on the display.
If a fault occurs, the drive will coast-to-rest stop and a 2- or 3-digit fault code will flash
on the display.
Refer to the GV3000/SE Software Start-Up and Reference manual for more
information on drive alarms and faults.
9.3 Verifying That DC Bus Capacitors Are Discharged

The GV3000/SE drive’s DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltages after input
power has been disconnected. Perform the following steps before touching any
internal components:
Step 1. Turn off and lock out input power. Wait five minutes.
door.
Troubleshooting the Drive 9-1

Step 3. Verify that there is no voltage at the drive’s input power terminals.
Step 4. Measure the DC bus potential with a voltmeter while standing on a
non-conductive surface and wearing insulated gloves (600V).
For 1-60 HP drives, measure the DC bus potential at the DC bus power
terminals. See figures 9.1 and 9.2.
For 60-100 HP drives, remove the top two screws of the Regulator panel and
tilt the panel forward. See figure 9.3. Measure the DC bus potential at the
diode bridge as shown. Reattach the Regulator panel.
For 100-150 HP drives, remove the top two screws of the Regulator panel
and tilt the panel forward. See figure 9.4. Measure the DC bus potential at the
bottom of the fuse holders on the Power Module Interface board on the back
of the Regulator panel. Take care not to touch any conductive traces.
Reattach the Regulator panel.
For 200-400 HP drives, measure the DC bus potential at the test points on
the Power Module Interface board. See figure 9.5. If it is necessary to open
the inner cabinet door, wait until the bus voltage is 50 VDC or less and then
measure the voltage on the DC bus bars as shown in figure 9.5. For
additional wiring information, refer to Appendix D.
Step 5. Once the drive has been serviced, reattach the drive’s cover. On 200-400 HP
drives, close the inner and outer cabinet doors.

1-10 HP
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 10V 10 COM U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
AC Power DC Bus Motor Leads

Input Leads Volts
15-25 HP
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Motor Leads DC Bus AC Power

Volts Input Leads
Figure 9.1 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1-25 HP Drives)

DC Bus AC Power
Volts Input Leads
+ - R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
D1
RV2 RV3

(-)
DC Bus
Measuring Points
(+)
45 47
IL1 IL2 IL3 U V W

AC INPUT
IL1 IL2 IL3
Regulator Panel
(DC Bus Measuring Points Behind

Regulator Panel on the Power Module Interface Board)
.
Power Module Inteface Board
Fuses
(-) (+)
U V W DC Bus Measuring Points

POWER CONNECTIONS
PULL SHIELD TABS IN AND ROTATE SHIELD OUT
CONNECT USING 350MCM TWO HOLE TERMINAL LUGS
Initial DC Bus Measuring Points (Inner Door Closed)
TORQUE TO 325IN-LBS
(When the bus voltage is 50 VDC or less, the inner
CONTROL BOARD WIRING TRAY

door may be opened and the voltage measured on
GND DB DC- DC+ U V W R S T
the DC bus bars as shown below.)
DANGER

CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND THEN CHECK THE
SLOTS SHOWN ABOVE. VOLTAGE MUST BE 50 VOLTS
OR LESS PRIOR TO SERVICING.
BM
- +
616300-147A
ALLOW 6 INCH RADIUS SERVICE LOOP

WITH INTERCONNECTION WIRING FROM
CONTROL BOARD WIRING TRAY TO DANGER
J1 CONNECTOR ON REGULATOR BOARD.
DANGER
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AND THEN CHECK THE
SLOTS SHOWN ABOVE. VOLTAGE MUST BE 50 VOLTS
OR LESS PRIOR TO SERVICING.
Power Module Interface Board
+
DC Bus Bar Measuring Points (Inner Door Open)
-

9.4 Checking Out the Drive with Input Power Off
Use the following procedure to check the drive circuitry with power off:

Step 1. Turn off and lock out input power. Wait five minutes.
door.
Step 3. Verify that there is no voltage at the drive’s input power terminals.
Step 4. Check the DC bus potential with a voltmeter as described in section 9.3 to
ensure that the DC bus capacitors are discharged.
Step 5. Disconnect the motor from the drive.
Step 6. Check all AC line and DC bus fuses.
Step 7. If a fuse is open, use a multimeter to check the input diodes and output
IGBTs. See table 9.1
Note that 1–10 HP drives do not have replaceable transistor modules: the
entire drive must be replaced if a transistor malfunctions. Intelligent Power
Modules (IPM) may be replaced in 60–150 HP drives.
Step 8. Reconnect the motor to the drive.
Step 9. Reattach the drive’s cover. On 200–400 HP drives, close the inner and outer
cabinet doors.

Table 9.1 – Resistance Checks
1–60 HP Drives
Input Meter
Diode Connection Component is OK if
No. (+) (-) resistance (R) is: Component is defective if:
1 * R/L1 50K < R < 10 Megohms Continuity (short circuit) or
open when the meter is
2 * S/L2
connected with reversed
3 * T/L3 polarity
4 R/L1 **
5 S/L2 **
6 T/L3 **
* (+) DC Bus Volts power terminal
** (-) DC Bus Volts power terminal
60–100 HP Drives
Input Meter
1 47 1L1 0.3 kohm < R < 8 kohm Continuity (short circuit) or
2 47 1L2 open when the meter is
3 47 1L3 polarity
4 1L1 45
5 1L2 45
6 1L3 45
100–150 HP Drives
Input Meter
1 47 1L1 R > 100 kohm Continuity (short circuit)
2 47 1L2
3 47 1L3
4 1L1 45
5 1L2 45
6 1L3 45

Table 9.1 - Resistance Checks (Continued)
200–400 HP Drives
Input Meter
1 * R/L1 R > 100 kohm Continuity (short circuit)
2 * S/L2
3 * T/L3
4 R/L1 **
5 S/L2 **
6 T/L3 **
* (+) DC Bus power terminal
** (-) DC Bus power terminal
1–60 HP Drives
Meter
IGBT Connection Component is OK if
1 * W/T3 50K < R < 10 Megohm Continuity (short circuit) or
2 * V/T2
3 * U/T1 polarity
4 W/T3 **
5 V/T2 **
6 U/T1 **
* (+) DC Bus Volts power terminal
** (-) DC Bus Volts power terminal
60–150 HP Drives
Meter
1 47 W 0.3 kohm < R < 8 kohm Continuity (short circuit) or
2 47 V
3 47 U polarity
4 W 45
5 V 45
6 U 45

Table 9.1 - Resistance Checks (Continued)
200–400 HP Drives (with the motor connected)

Meter
All U/T3 * 10 < R < 1 Megohm Continuity (short circuit) or
IGBTs open when the meter is
* U/T3
tested in connected with reversed
parallel U/T3 ** polarity
* U/T3
200–400 HP Drives (with the motor disconnected)

Meter
1 * W/T1 10 < R < 1 Megohm Continuity (short circuit) or
2 * V/T2
3 * U/T3 polarity
4 W/T1 **
5 V/T2 **
6 U/T3 **

9.5 Replacement Parts
Tables 9.2 to 9.8 list the replacement parts that are available from Reliance Electric.
See figures 2.2 to 2.8 for the location of the parts.
Table 9.2 – 1-5 HP Drive Replacement Parts
Quantity per Horsepower

Description* Part Number 1 2 3 5
NEMA 1 Fan Assembly 615161–V 1 1
NEMA 4X/12 Fan Assembly 615161–S 1 1
NEMA 1 Cover 805531–1S 1 1 1 1
NEMA 4X/12 Cover/Gasket 805532–1S 1 1 1 1
Membrane Switch 709576–1R 1 1 1 1
Keypad/Bracket
Regulator PCB 0–56921–6xx 1 1 1 1
Capacitor PCB 0–56928–30 1 1 1
0–56928–50 1
Current Feedback PCB 0–56926–20 1 1
0–56926–50 1 1
Internal Fan Assembly 615159–1R 1 1 1 1
* Components are identified in figure 2.2.
Table 9.3 – 7.5-10 HP Drive Replacement Parts

Description* Part Number 7.5 10
NEMA 1 Fan Assembly 615161–V 2 2
NEMA 4X/12 Fan Assembly 615161–S 2 2
NEMA 1 Cover 805538–1S 1 1
NEMA 12 Cover/Gasket 805539–1S 1 1
Membrane Switch 805548–1R 1 1
Keypad/Bracket
Regulator PCB 0–56921–6xx 1 1
Capacitor PCB 0–56934–100 1 1
Current Feedback PCB 0–56935–100 1 1
Internal Fan Assembly 615159–1R 1 1

Quantity per
Horsepower
Description* Part Number 15 20 25**
NEMA 1 Fan Assembly 615161–V 2 2 2
NEMA 4X/12 Fan Assembly 615161–S 2 2 2
NEMA 1 Cover 805547–1S 1 1 1
NEMA 12 Cover/Gasket 805547–2S 1 1 1
Membrane Switch Keypad/Top 805548–1R 1 1 1
Bracket
Regulator PCB 0–56921–6xx 1 1 1
IGBT Module 602909–813AW 3 3 3
Capacitor PCB 0–56961 1
0–56962 1 1
Power Board 0–56963 1 1 1
Power Supply Board 0–56950–15 1
0–56950–20 1 1
Gate Driver Board*** 0–56960 1 1 1
Internal Fan Assembly 615159–1S 1 1 1
** M/N 25G4160 and 25G4260
*** Replace the Gate Driver Board when the IGBT modules are replaced.


Description* Part Number 25** 30 40 50 60***
Fan 69739–48A 2 2 2 2 2
Fan Wire Harness 615195–2R 1 1 1 1 1
NEMA 1 Cover 805534–11S 1 1 1 1 1
NEMA 12 805534–12S 1 1 1 1 1
Cover/Gasket
Membrane Switch 805548–1R 1 1 1 1 1
Keypad/Top Bracket
Regulator PCB 0–56921–6xx 1 1 1 1 1
Input Capacitor 600442–32SS 2 4 4
600442–33SW 2 2
Power PCB 0–56949–40 1 1 1
0–56949–50 1 1
Power Supply PCB 0–56950–25 1
0–56950–30 1
0–56950–40 1
0–56950–50 1 1
Gate Driver PCB**** 0–56947–25 1
0–56947–40 1 1
0–56947–50 1 1
IGBT Module 602909–810AW 3
602909–811AW 3 3
602909–812AW 3 3
Diode Bridge 701819–113BA 1 1 1
701819–114BA 1 1
Internal Fan 615196–2R 1 1 1 1 1
Assembly
** M/N 25V4160 and 25V4260.
*** M/N 60G4160 and 60G4260.
**** Replace the Gate Driver Board when the IGBT modules are replaced.

Description* Part Number Quantity

Regulator PCB 413338–6BU 1
Power Module Interface PCB 413338–5AW 1
Power Module Interface PCB Fuses 413338–5AB 2
Keypad 413338–5AX 1
Gate Driver PCB 413338–5D 1
Bus Clamp PCB (right) 413338–5E 2
Bus Clamp PCB (left) 413338–5F 2
Intelligent Power Module (IPM) PCB 413338–5J 3
Diode Bridge 413338–5K 3
MOV on Diode Bridge 413338–5L 3
DC Bus Fuse 413338–5M 2
Precharge Contactor 413338–5N 4
Current Transformer 413338–5R 2
Ground Fault Transformer 413338–5Q 1
Output Reactor 252.84.21 (Left) 1
252.84.22 (Center) 1
252.84.23 (Right) 1
Precharge Resistor (18 ohms) 413338–5T 4
Bus Discharge Resistor (1.5K ohms) 413338–5V 2
24V DC Fan 413338–5W 2
* Components of the 60-100 HP drives (M/N 50R4160, 50T4160, 75R4160, 75T4160) are identified in
figure 2.6.


Regulator PCB 413338–6BU 1
Power Module Interface PCB 413338–5AV 1
Power Module Interface PCB Fuses 413338–5AB 2
Keypad 413338–5AX 1
Gate Driver PCB 413338–5AC 6
Bus Clamp PCB (right) 413338–5AE 2
Bus Clamp PCB (left) 413338–5AF 2
Intelligent Power Module (IPM) PCB ** 413338–5AH 6
Thyristor Precharge Module 413338–5AJ 3
DC Bus Fuse 413338–5AK 4
Current Transformer 413338–5R 2
Ground Fault Transformer 413338–5AQ 1
Output Reactor 413338–5AR 3
Bus Discharge Resistor (1.5K ohms) 413338–5V 4
24V DC Fan 413338–5W 4
Thyristor Firing Pulse PCB 413338–5AG 1
Thyristor Firing Pulse PCB Fuses (15A) 413338–1JS 3
* Components of the 100-150 HP drives (M/N 125R4160) are identified in figure 2.7.
**It is recommended that the Gate Driver PCB and the Bus Clamp PCBs be replaced at the same time as
the IPM PCB.


Phase Module Assembly 807300–124R 3***
Phase Module Assembly 807300–158R 3**
SCR Module Assembly 807300–200R 1
Blower Motor 616300–100R 1
Blower Starter Capacitor 69932–24QK 1
Fault Thermostat 66012–16B 4
Gate Driver PCB 0–56956 3
DC Bus Capacitor 600442–34SU 10/18****
SCR Diode 701819–207BA 3
Bus Control PCB 0–56966 1
Bus Control PCB Fuse 64676–65B 6
Disconnect Switch 65242–11A 1
AC Input Fuse 64676–120BDX 3
Blower Fuse 64676–64G 2
Blower Transformer 411027–130A 1
Regulator PCB 0–56940–6xx 1
Power Module Interface PCB***** 0–56942 1
Current Feedback Sensor 600595–18A 3
Blower Filter 69470–10H 1
Ground Fault Current Transformer 64670–43A 1
DC Bus Discharge Resistor 616300–117R 3
Keypad 410483–15A 1
SCR Gate Wiring Harness 807300–141S 1
Gate Driver/Power Supply Wiring Harness 807300–139S 1
Raceway Wiring Harness 807300–156R 1
LPI/LEM Wiring Harness 807300–137R 1
Blower Fuses to Bus Bar Wiring Harness 616300–137R 1
Transformer/Fuses Wiring Harness 616300–136R 1
Transformer/Terminal Block Wiring Harness 616300–135R 1
** Three sets of two IGBTs (P/N 602909–808AW) for a 200 HP drive.
*** Three sets of four IGBTs (P/N 602909–808AW) for 250–400 HP drives, inclusive.
**** Ten DC bus capacitors in a 200 HP drive. Eighteen DC bus capacitors in 250-400 HP drives, inclusive.
***** When replacing PMI boards, you must set rotary switches SW1, SW2, and SW3 based on the drive’s
horsepower rating as shown below. All three switches are set to the same position.
Drive HP Switch
Rating Position
200 0
250 1
300 3
350 7
400 F

APPENDIX A
Technical Specifications
Table A.1 – Service Conditions
AC Line Distribution System Capacity 1000KVA, three-phase with 30,000 amps symmetrical fault
(maximum) for 460 VAC Units current capacity with a line impedance of less than 5%. (85,000
amps fault current capacity with optional AC line reactors. See
table 5.1.)
Control Method All-digital vector, sinusoidal pulse-width-modulated (PWM)
Displacement Power Factor 0.96
Line Frequency 50/60Hz (+2 Hz)
Line Voltage Variation -10% to +10%
Line Dip Ride-Through FVC: Maximum 500 milliseconds
V/Hz, SVC: Adjustable up to 999.9 seconds (See P.042)
Maximum Motor Lead Lengths 76 meters (250 feet) typical (refer to section 3.2.2.4)
Remote Operator Control Wire Length Up to 303 meters (1000 feet) from the drive
Analog Speed Reference Resolution 1/1024 (10 bits) 0.1%
Acceleration Adjustment Range 0.1 to 999.9 seconds (within the ability of current)
Carrier Frequency 2 kHz, 4 kHz, or 8 kHz, software-selectable
Current Limit Adjustment Vector: U.006 to 150% (based on motor nameplate rating)
V/Hz: 50% to 110% (based on drive nameplate rating)
Service Factor 1.0
Speed Adjustable Range From 0 RPM to maximum speed (vector)
Speed Regulation Vector: 0.01% FVC, 0.5% SVC (steady state)
V/Hz: Motor slip dependent
Speed Reference Resolution 1 RPM with local keypad, -4095 to +4095 counts with a network
or serial reference
Torque Control Response 180 to 220 Hz
Torque Linearity +3% with optimal parameter setting (typical) (see parameter
U.005)
Technical Specifications A-1

Table A.2 – Environmental Condition
Condition Specification
Operating Temperature (Ambient) 0° to +40°C (32° to 104°F)
Storage Temperature (Ambient) -40° to +65°C (−40° to +149°F)
Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Table A.3 – Terminal Strip Input Specifications
Signal Type Terminal(s) Specification

Speed Reference Input 12-15 10 V (@ 50K ohm input
impedance or 20 mA)
Digital Inputs (1 - 8) 16 +24 VDC Isolated Supply
17 Remote/Local (Default)
18 Ramp1/Ramp2 (Default)
19 Forward/Reverse (Default)
20 Function Loss
21 Run/Jog
22 Reset
23 Stop
24 Start
Table A.4 – Terminal Strip Output Specifications

Analog Output 10 -11 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA
scaled signal
Snubber Resistor 26 - 27 Used with older Snubber
Resistor Braking Kits,
such as the M/N 2DB4010
series, that require a gate
turn-on signal from the
drive.
Table A.5 – Terminal Strip RS-232 Specifications

RS 232 Communications 1 XMIT
2 RECV
3 COMMON
A-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Table A.6 – Encoder Feedback Device Specifications (FVC Regulation Only)
Specification Rating
Motor Poles 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles
Overcurrent IET 200% load (based on drive nameplate
rating)
Overload Current Rating 150% for 1 minute (based on drive
nameplate rating)
Speed Control Range 1:600 with 1024 PPR
Speed Control Response 15 Hz (typical)
Encoder Feedback 15 V differential quadrature, encoder
incremental (512 PPR, 1024 PPR, 2048
PPR, 4096 PPR)
Service Factor 1.0
)
Table A.7 – Input Signal Response Times (Maximum)
Signal Type and Source Volts/Hertz Regulation* Vector Regulation*

Keypad START 150 milliseconds 130 milliseconds
Terminal Strip:
START 126 milliseconds 105 milliseconds
STOP, RESET, FL 75 milliseconds 75 milliseconds
Preset Speeds 75 milliseconds 75 milliseconds
Analog Speed/Trim 16 milliseconds 5 milliseconds
Reference
Analog Torque N/A 0.5 milliseconds
Reference
Network:
START 46 milliseconds + network 25 milliseconds + network
transport time transport time
STOP, RESET, FL 26 milliseconds + network 25 milliseconds + network
transport time transport time
Analog Speed/Trim 5 milliseconds + 5 milliseconds +
Reference network transport time network transport time
Torque Reference N/A 0.5 milliseconds +network
transport time
*These are the maximum times from transitioning the input to the drive reacting to the input.
Technical Specifications A-3

A-4 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06
APPENDIX B
Compliance with Machinery Safety
Standard EN 60204-1:1992
The GV3000/SE drive complies with the following sections of machinery safety
standard EN 60204-1:1992.
EN60204-1
Section Title
6 Protection against electrical shock
6.2.1 - Protection by enclosure
6.2.3 - Protection against residual voltages
6.3.1 - Protection by automatic disconnect of supply
6.4 - Protection by the use of PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage)
7 Protection of equipment
7.2 - Overcurrent protection
7.2.3 - Control circuits
7.2.6 - Transformers
7.5 - Protection against supply interruption or voltage reduction and subsequent restoration
8 Equipotential bonding
8.2.1 - General (the PE terminal)
8.2.2 - Protective conductors (connection points)
8.2.3 - Continuity of the protective bonding circuit
8.2.7 - Protective conductor connecting points
8.3 - Bonding to the protective bonding circuit for operational purposes
8.4 - Insulation failures
8.5 - Bonding to a common reference potential
8.6 - Electrical interferences
9 Control circuit and control functions
9.1.1 - Control circuit supply
9.1.3 - Protection
9.1.4 - Connection of control devices
9.2 - Control functions
9.2.1 - Start function
9.2.2 - Stop function
9.2.3 - Operating modes
9.2.5 - Operation
9.2.5.3 - Stop
9.2.5.6 - Hold-to-run controls
Compliance with Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1:1992 B-1

EN60204-1
Section Title
9.2.6 - Combined start and stop controls
9.3 - Protective interlocks
9.3.5 - Reverse current braking
9.4 - Control functions in case of failure
9.4.2.1 - Use of proven circuit techniques and components
9.4.3 - Provisions for redundancy
9.4.3.1 - Earth faults
9.4.3.2 - Voltage interruption
10 Operator interface and machine mounted control devices
10.2.1 - Pushbutton colors
10.8 - Displays
11 Control interfaces
11.2 - Digital input/output interfaces
11.2.1 - Inputs
11.2.2 - Outputs
11.3 - Drive interfaces with analog inputs
11.3.1 - Separation between control and electric drives
11.5 - Communications
12 Electronic equipment
12.2.2 - Electronic control equipment
12.2.3 - Equipotential bonding
12.3 - Programmable equipment
12.3.1 - Programmable controllers
12.3.2 - Memory retention and protection
12.3.3 - Programming equipment
12.3.4 - Software verification
12.3.5 - Use in safety-related functions
13 Controlgear: Location, mounting and enclosures
13.2.3 - Heating effects
13.4 - Enclosures, doors and openings
15 Wiring practices
15.1.1 - General requirements
15.1.3 - Conductors of different circuits
15.2.2 - Identification of the protective conductor
18 Warning signs and item identification
18.2 - Warning signs
18.4 - Marking of control equipment
19 Technical documentation
19.1 - General
Copies of this standard can be purchased from the American National Standards
Institute at www.ansi.org.
B-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

APPENDIX C
Compliance with Electromagnetic
Compatibility Standards
C.1 Introduction
This appendix provides information on the GV3000/SE drive’s compliance with
European community electromagnetic compatibility standards and covers the
following:
• requirements for standards compliance
• guidelines on installing the AC Mains Filter
• instructions on how the drive must be wired.
The GV3000/SE drives listed on the Declaration of Conformity (DOC) and in table C.1
have been tested and are in compliance with the following standards when installed
with the appropriate AC Mains Filter:
• EN50081-1 (1992)
Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic emission standard
Part 1: Residential, commercial, and light industrial
• EN50081-2 (1992)
Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic emission standard
Part 2: Industrial
• EN50082-1 (1992)
Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard
Part 1: Residential, commercial, and light industrial
• EN50082-2 (1995)
Electromagnetic compatibility - Generic immunity standard
Part 2: Industrial
Note that the conformity of the GV3000/SE drive to the above standards does not
guarantee that the entire installation will be in conformance.
Copies of the Declaration of Conformity (DOC) may be obtained by contacting the

Rockwell AutoFax service at 440-646-7777.
Compliance with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards C-1

C.2 Compliance Requirements
In order for the GV3000/SE drive to conform to the standards listed in section C.1, the
drive must:
• be specified by model number on the DOC.
• have a CE mark. This mark is found on the drive’s certification label.
• include an AC Mains Filter. See section C.3 for information on installing the filter.
• be installed according to the instructions in this appendix.
Note that when using 25-60HP GV3000/SE drives, a special cover is required. The
model number of the GV3000 cover kit is M/N 2CK4160. Follow the instructions
provided with the kit when replacing the cover. The instructions in this appendix
assume that the drive has the correct cover on it.
Contact Reliance Electric for assistance if your application requires CE-certification

when using 200-400HP GV3000/SE drives.
C.3 Installing the AC Mains Filters

The following sections describe how to identify and install the AC Mains Filters. These
filters have been designed to limit the conducted electromagnetic emissions to the AC
power mains from the GV3000/SE drives.
Table C.1 identifies the GV3000/SE drives that are in conformance with the standards
listed in section C.0 and their corresponding AC Mains Filters. Verify that you have the
correct AC Mains Filter for your application. The information provided in this appendix
applies to all the AC Mains Filters listed in table C.1 unless otherwise noted.
C-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Table C.1 – AC Mains Filters
GV3000/SE AC Mains Filter

HP Model Number Model Number
1 1V41xx 1V44xx 2DF4283
2 2V41xx 2V44xx 2DF4283
3 3V41xx 3V44xx 2DF4283
5 5V41xx 5V44xx 2DF4283
7 7V41xx 7V42xx 2DF4284
10 10V41xx 10V42xx 2DF4284
15 15V41xx 15V42xx 2DF4285
20 20V41xx 20V42xx 2DF4285
25 25G41xx 25G42xx 2DF4285
25 25V41xx 25V42xx 2DF4286
30 30V41xx 30V42xx 2DF4286
40 40V41xx 40V42xx 2DF4286
50 50V41xx 50V42xx 2DF4286
50 50T41xx *
60 60G41xx 60G42xx 2DF4286
75 75T41xx *
125 125R41xx 2DF4125**
200 200V41xx ***
250 250V41xx ***
300 300V41xx ***
350 350V41xx ***
400 400V41xx ***
* Filter is internally mounted in the GV3000/SE drive at the factory.
** Does not comply with standard EN50081-1 (1992)
*** Contact Reliance Electric for assistance.

C.3.1 Installing AC Mains Filters M/N 2DF4283, 2DF4284, 2DF4285, and
2DF4286
Use the following guidelines to mount the GV3000SE drive to the AC Mains Filter and
then mount the drive/filter assembly to a panel:
• Attach the GV3000/SE drive to the AC Mains Filter. See figure C.1. No other type of
mounting is permitted. The required mounting hardware is supplied with the filter.
• Attach the GV3000/SE drive/AC Mains Filter assembly to a panel or wall. See figure
C.1 and table C.2 for mounting dimensions. The panel/wall surface does not have to
be conductive, although it is preferable. The hardware for mounting the drive/filter
assembly to the panel/wall must be supplied by the user.
• For 25-60 HP drives, cover kit M/N 2CK4160 is required.
Continue with section C.4.
Top View
(Filter Only, Cover Removed)
M5 Nuts
J
G
K, Conduit Entry
D
F E G
Note that for 25-60 HP drives,
cover kit M/N 2CK4160 is required.
L1 L2 L3 E(GND)
GV3000/SE
Drive
AC Mains AC Mounts on Top
Filter Mains of Mains Filter
Filter (Screws
Provided)
C B
Flexible
Conduit
(Provided)
E
F D
A
Side View
Front View (Filter and Drive)
(Filter Only)
See table C.2 for dimensions.
Figure C.1 – AC Mains Filter Dimensions

Table C.2 – AC Mains Filter Mounting Dimensions and Weight
AC AC AC AC AC
Mains Mains Mains Mains Mains
Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
Dimension 2DF4283 2DF4284 2DF4285 2DF4286 2DF4125
A 217 mm 272 mm 272 mm 365.5 mm
8.5" 10.7" 10.7" 14.3" *
B 387mm 441 mm 575 mm 958 mm
5.25" 17.4" 22.6" 37.7" *
C 362 mm 415 mm 550 mm 933 mm
14.25" 16.3" 21.7" 36.7" *
D 174 mm 230 mm 232 mm 300 mm
6.9" 9.1" 9.1" 11.8" *
E 9 mm 9 mm 9 mm 11 mm
0.35" 0.35" 0.35" 0.43" *
F 21.5 mm 21 mm 20 mm _
0.85" 0.83" 0.79" *
G 53 mm 53 mm 93 mm 91.5 mm
2.1" 2.1" 3.7" 3.6" *
H 180 mm 231 mm 235 mm 181 mm
7.1" 9.1" 9.25" 7.1" *
J 18 mm 18 mm 43 mm 35 mm
0.71" 0.71" 1.7" 1.4" *
K 22 mm 22 mm 28 mm 43 mm
0.87" 0.87" 1.1" 1.7" *
Filter 3.2 kg 3.2 kg 5 kg 20 kg 48 kg
Weight 7 lbs 7 lbs 11 lbs 44 lbs 105 lbs
* See figure C.2 for mounting dimensions.
C.3.2 Installing AC Mains Filters in GV3000/SE Drives M/N 50T41xx and

75T41xx
In GV3000/SE drives M/N 50T41xx and 75T41xx, the AC Mains Filters are installed
within the GV3000/SE chassis at the factory. No additional filter installation is required.
C.3.3 Installing AC Mains Filter M/N 2DF4125
GV3000/SE drive M/N 125R41xx and AC Mains Filter M/N 2DF4125 are to be
mounted separately. See figure C.2. They must be mounted on a steel surface with
good conductivity between the two assemblies, for example, the mounting surfaces
should not be painted.
When placing the drive and the AC Mains Filter in a cabinet or IP20 enclosure, a
common ground bus bar is to be located in front of the terminals. This bus bar must be
solidly connected to the back panel to ensure good conductivity. All cable screens
must be connected to this bus bar. To ensure good conductivity, use galvanized cable
brackets to connect the screens to the bus bar.

350mm
13.7"
30mm
1.1" 65mm m16
2.5"
+ E L3 L2 L1 +
AC LINE
110mm
4.3"
+ +
AC Mains
135mm Filter
5.3" AC Mains
Filter
550mm
21.6" + +
135mm
5.3"
+ +
110mm
4.3" 5.1mm
GV3000/SE
0.2"
E' L3' L2' L1'
65mm
30mm 2.5"
1.1"
- -
30mm 320mm
1.1" 12.5"
160mm
6.2"
40mm 80mm 80mm 80mm
1.5" 3.1" 3.1" 3.1"
320mm
12.5"
Figure C.2 – M/N 2DF4125 AC Mains Filter Dimensions

C.4 Wiring Practices
This section describes how the GV3000/SE drive must be wired to conform to the
standards listed in section C.1. Figures C.3 and C.4 show GV3000/SE wiring
configuration examples.
AC
Mains GV3000/SE
Filter
U,V,W
L1
PE L2
L3
1 AC line input
1
2 Screened 4-wire motor cable
3 Screened signal conductor cable

(feedback, reference)
2
4 EMC-tested armored cable gland at drive

3 and terminal box
PE
U,V,W
G
MOTOR
Figure C.3 – Stand-Alone GV3000/SE Wiring Example

Cabinet
L1, L2, L3
Panel
AC
GV3000/SE Mains
Filter
U,V,W PE
PE Terminals for 4-wire AC-input cable

(L1,L2,,L3, PE)
Cabinet-protection ground bus bar

1
1 Cable bracket
3
2 Screen
4
3 Screened 4-wire motor cable
5
4 Screened signal conductor cable
PE (feedback, reference)
U,V,W
G 5 EMC-tested armored cable gland at
MOTOR terminal box
Figure C.4 – Cabinet-Mounted GV3000/SE Wiring Example

C.4.1 Connecting the AC Mains Filter Output to the GV3000/SE Drive
Input
The following sections describe how to wire the AC Mains Filters to the GV3000/SE
drives.
C.4.1.1 Connecting AC Mains Filters M/N 2DF4283, 2DF4284, 2DF4285, and 2DF4286
The power leads that connect the output terminals of the AC Mains Filter to the drive’s
AC input terminals are included with the filter. The flexible conduit to be used with
these power leads is also provided. See figure C.5.
• Place the flexible conduit’s hub in the drive’s wire entry hole that is in-line with the
filter’s output wiring opening. Route the leads through the conduit. Secure both ends
of the flexible conduit.
• Trim the power leads to the proper length and connect them to the drive’s AC input
power terminals (R,S,T). Connect the green/yellow ground lead to the drive’s ground
terminal.
Note that the filter’s output leads are red, yellow, and blue. This color coding is
stenciled on the printed circuit board at the filter’s input power terminals to help
identify the filter’s output wiring relative to the filter’s input wiring.
• When the drive is connected to three-phase AC input power, the three output leads
from the filter should be connected to the drive’s AC input power terminals as shown
in figure C.5.
• Connect the filter ground wire (green/yellow) to the drive ground.
Continue with section C.4.2.
A B C
FILTER'S AC INPUT POWER
L1 L2 L3 E(GND)
AC Mains Filter
GREEN/
RED YELLOW BLUE YELLOW
DRIVE'S AC INPUT POWER
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 GND
GV3000/SE
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 GND
MOTOR
Figure C.5 – Typical Three-Phase Connections for AC Mains Filters

M/N 2DF4283, 2DF4284, 2DF4285, and 2DF4286

C.4.1.2 Connecting Built-in AC Mains Filters in GV3000/SE Drives M/N 50T41xx and
75T41xx
AC input terminals are prewired and installed at the factory. See figure C.6.
When the drive is connected to three-phase AC input power, the three output leads
from the filter should be connected to the drive’s AC input power terminals as shown in
figure C.6.
GV3000/SE
AC Mains Filter
161 162 163 GND U V W GND
FILTER'S AC
INPUT POWER
MOTOR
Figure C.6 – Typical Three-Phase Connections for Built-in AC Mains Filters in GV3000/SE Drives
M/N 50T41xx and 75T41xx
C.4.1.3 Connecting AC Mains Filter M/N 2DF4125
AC input terminals are user-supplied. See figure C.7.
• Cut the power leads to the proper length and connect them to the drive’s AC input
power terminals (1L1, 1L2, 1L3). Connect the green/yellow ground lead to the
drive’s ground terminal. The leads should be kept as short as possible and should
be fastened together in a triangular shape using tie wraps.
ATTENTION:Do not route power wiring near signal and control wiring.
This can cause interference with drive operation. Failure to observe this
! precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment
• When the drive is connected to three-phase AC input power, the three output leads
from the filter should be connected to the drive’s AC input power terminals as shown
in figure C.7.

Filter's AC
Input Power
L1 L2 L3 GND
AC Mains Filter
Drive's AC
Input Power
1L1 1L2 1L3 GND
GV3000/SE
U V W GND
MOTOR
Figure C.7 – Typical Three-Phase Connections for AC Mains Filter M/N 2DF4125
C.4.2 Motor Leads
The motor leads must be run in continuous, rigid, conductive conduit,

continuously-screened armored cable, or equivalent. Note that the use of flexible
metal conduit, open wire, or wire in trays is not acceptable. Many flexible metal conduit
products have not been designed for RF containment and are not adequate to
maintain compliance.
All motor leads should have the same cross-sectional area. The maximum allowable
motor lead length from the drive to the motor is 250’ (76m).
A ground (earth) lead, equivalent in size to the motor leads, must be run with the
motor leads from the motor to the drive. Terminate this lead in the drive at the ground
terminal.
Proper glands must be used to terminate the motor conduit/cable. The gland must
secure the cable screen to the conductive surfaces of the drive and motor. A full 360°
screen termination is preferred.
Follow all instructions supplied with the motor.
C.4.3 Connecting AC Input Power to the AC Mains Filter
Connect AC input power to the filter by first removing the filter’s cover and then
connecting the AC input power leads to the terminals at the top of the filter. See figure
C.1. The AC input power leads should have lugs attached. The filter-GV3000/SE
cabinet has a conduit opening to secure the AC input power conduit.

C.4.4 Grounding the Drive/Filter Assembly
Connect the drive/filter assembly to earth ground at the terminal provided next to the
filter’s AC input power terminals. The ground wire should be sized per EN-60204-1,
Part 5.21, for copper conductors and EN-60204-1, Part 8.2.2.22 , for non-copper
conductors. European Union standards require that the ground wire must be
green/yellow according to EN-60204-1, Part 15.2.2.3
1EN-60204-1, Part 5.2: Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of the External Protective

Copper Conductor
Cross-Sectional Area of Phase

Conductors Supplying the Equipment Minimum Cross-sectional Area of the
(S) (mm2) External Protective Conductor (mm2)
S ≥ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S ≥ 35 S/2
2 EN-60204-1, Part 8.2.2.2: Protective Conductors
Copper conductor should be used. If a material other than copper is used, its electrical
resistance per unit length should not exceed that of copper. Non-copper conductors
should not be less than 16 mm2 in cross-sectional area.
3 EN-60204-1, Part 15.2.2: Identification of the Protective Conductor
For insulated conductors, the two-color combination of Green and Yellow should meet
the following criteria for any given 15 mm length: one of the colors should cover at
least 30% and no more than 70% of the surface, with the other color covering the
remainder of the surface.

C.4.5 I/O Signals
Control (I/O) and signal wiring must be run in continuous, rigid, conductive conduit or
continuously-screened cable as shown in figure C.8. Note that the use of flexible metal
conduit, open wire, or wire in trays is not acceptable. Many flexible metal conduit
products have not been designed for RF containment and are not adequate to
maintain compliance.
Stranded copper wire
Plastic insulation
Inner plastic sheath
Compact screen of galvanized (tinned) copper or steel braid
Outer plastic jacket
Figure C.8 – I/O Signal Cable
C.4.6 Operator Control Stations

The enclosure of an operator’s control station must be constructed of a conductive
metal. The cover of the enclosure should be bonded to the case and not rely on the
hinge for bonding. Standard industrial operator devices, e.g., pushbuttons, switches,
and meters, may be used.
The wiring connecting the operator’s devices to the drive must be run in continuous,
rigid, conductive conduit, continuously-screened armored cable, or equivalent. Note
that the use of flexible metal conduit, open wire, or wire in trays is not acceptable.
Many flexible metal conduit products have not been designed for RF containment and
are not adequate to maintain compliance.
Proper glands must be used to terminate the operator’s control station conduit/cable
at the station and the drive. The gland must secure the cable screen to the conductive
surfaces of the drive and station enclosure. A full 360° screen termination is
preferred. Screen pigtails are not permitted.
C.4.7 Connecting to the AutoMax Network

GV3000/SE drive connections to an AutoMax network require the use of coaxial cable
as described in instruction manuals J2-3001 and D2-3308. The coaxial cable must be
run in continuous, rigid, conductive conduit.
Proper glands must be used to terminate the conduit at the AutoMax enclosure and
the GV3000/SE drive. The gland must secure the cable screen to the conductive
surfaces of the drive and AutoMax enclosure. A full 360° screen termination is
preferred. Screen pigtails are not permitted.

C.4.8 Encoder Cabling
Use only the Reliance Electric encoder cables listed in table C.3.
Table C.3 – Encoder Cabling
Cable Type Cable Length Cable Model Number

MS connector on encoder end 25’ 2TC4025/2TC3025
MS connector on encoder end 75’ 2TC4075/2TC3075
Bare wire on both ends 100’ 2TC4100
Bare wire on both ends 300’ 2TC4300

INDEX
Numerics C
115 VAC Interface Option Board, 2-21 Capacitor board
location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6
part number, 9-12, 9-13
A Capacitors, DC bus, 9-1 to 9-7
AC disconnect (optional), location of, 2-10 Carrier frequency, 2-11, A-1
AC input Closed-loop control, see Vector Regulation
diodes, checking, 9-9 to 9-10 Conduit plugs, replacing, 4-2
disconnect, installing, 5-2 Connector
fuse, 2-10 Operator Interface Module, 2-19
isolation transformer, 5-1 option board, 2-19
line branch circuit fuses, 3-9 to 3-10, 5-2 to 5-4 RS-232, 2-18
line transients, avoiding, 5-1 Contactors, installing output, 6-1
ratings, 2-2 Contacts, Form A and Form B, 2-11
wire sizes, 3-5 to 3-6 Control and Configuration Software, 2-18, 2-21, 3-9
wiring, 3-5 to 3-6, 4-1 to 4-9, 5-1 to 5-6 Control source, 7-1
AC line reactors, 5-2 ControlNet Network Option board, 2-20
AC output CS3000 RS-232 Computer Cable, 2-21
wiring, 3-5 to 3-6, 4-1 to 4-9, 6-1 to 6-2 CS3000, see Control and Configuration Software
Air flow, 3-4 Current Feedback board
Alarms, 9-1 location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-10
Altitude requirements, 3-2 part number, 9-12
Ambient conditions, 3-2, A-2 Current transformer
Analog input location, 2-8, 2-9
jumper J4 settings, 2-16 part number, 9-15, 9-16
wiring, 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-11
Analog output D
description, 2-11
jumper J17 settings, 2-17 DC bus
wiring, 7-2, 7-10 fuse, 2-8, 2-9, 5-2 to 5-4, 9-15, 9-16
Assistance, technical, 1-1 input wiring, 3-5 to 3-6, 4-1 to 4-9, 5-1 to 5-4,
AutoMax Network Option board, 2-20 5-6
AutoMax RS-232 Adapter Cable, 2-20 terminals, 9-3 to 9-7
verifying capacitor voltage, 9-1 to 9-7
Declaration of Conformity, C-1
B DeviceNet Network Option Board, 2-21
Blower transformer taps, changing, 5-6 DeviceNet Network Option board, 2-19
Braking, snubber resistor, 2-11, 5-1, A-2 Digital input wiring, 2-18, 7-2, 7-4 to 7-5, 7-12 to
wiring, 2-18, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-16 7-16
Branch circuit protection, 5-2 Digital output wiring, see Status Relays
Bus Clamp board Dimensions, drive, 3-2 to 3-3
location, 2-8, 2-9 Disconnect, installing AC input, 5-2
part number, 9-15, 9-16 Display, see Keypad/display
Distribution system capacity, AC line, 5-1, A-1
Index Index-1
Drive H
component locations, 2-4 to 2-10
description, 2-1 Humidity, 3-2, A-2
dimensions, 3-2 to 3-3
faults and alarms, 9-1
identifying, 2-1
I
kits, 2-20 IGBT module, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
model numbers, 2-1 part number, 9-13, 9-14
software, 1-1 IGBT power devices, 2-11
troubleshooting, 9-1 to 9-11 testing, resistance checks, 9-8 to 9-11
weights, 3-2 Inductor, output, see Output Reactor, 2-8
Input
E AC, see AC Input
digital, see Digital Input Wiring
Electromagnetic compatibility standards, drive power wiring, 3-5 to 3-6
compliance with, C-1 to C-14 signal response times, A-3
Emergency stop, 7-6 wiring, DC bus, 5-1 to 5-4, 5-6
EN 60204-1, drive compliance with, 7-6, B-1 to B-2 Installation
Enclosures, NEMA, 2-2 to 2-3, 9-12 to 9-14 checking, 8-1 to 8-2
Encoder NEMA 4X/12 drive covers, 8-2
specifications, A-3 planning, 3-1 to 3-10
wiring, 2-18, 3-9, 7-7 to 7-8 troubleshooting, 9-1 to 9-11
Environmental conditions, 3-2, A-2 wire routing, 4-1 to 4-9
wire size, 3-5 to 3-7
Intelligent Power Module
F location, 2-8, 2-9
Fan part number, 9-15, 9-16
location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 Interbus-S Network Option Board, 2-20
part number, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16
Fan Kit for Line Regeneration Modules, 2-20 J
Faults, 9-1
Flux vector control, 2-1 Jog (digital input 4), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-15
Forward (digital input 6), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-14 Jumpers, location and setting of, 2-15 to 2-17
Function loss (digital input 5), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5,
7-15
Fuse
K
AC input, 2-10, 3-9 to 3-10, 5-2 Keypad/display
blower, 2-10 description, 2-19
DC bus, 2-9, 5-2 to 5-4, 9-15, 9-16 location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10
FVC, see Flux Vector Control part number, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17
Kits
G 115 VAC Interface Option Board, 2-21
AutoMax Network Option board, 2-20
Gate Driver board AutoMax RS-232 Adapter Cable, 2-20
location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9 CE-Compliant AC Mains Filters, 2-20
part number, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17 ControlNet Network Option board, 2-20
Ground fault transformer CS3000 Control and Configuration
location, 2-9 Software, 2-21
part number, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17 CS3000 RS-232 Computer Cable, 2-21
Grounding, 3-5 to 3-6, 4-2, 5-3, 5-4 DeviceNet Network Option Board, 2-21
Fan Kit for Line Regeneration Modules, 2-20
Interbus-S Network Option Board, 2-20
Index-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Line Regeneration Modules, 2-20 O
Motor Encoder Cable, 2-20
Operator Interface Module, 2-21 OIM, see Operator Interface Module
Profibus Interface board, 2-21 Open-loop control, see Volts/hertz regulation
Remote Meter Interface board, 2-20 Operator Interface Module (OIM), 2-21
Snubber Resistor Braking, 2-20 Operator Interface Module connector, 2-19
Snubber Transistor Braking, 2-20 Option board connector, 2-19
Optional equipment, see Kits
Output
L analog, see Analog Output
LEDs, 2-19 contactors, 6-1
Line branch circuit fuses, AC input, 3-9 to 3-10, 5-2 digital, see Status Relays
to 5-3 inductor, see Output Reactor
Line frequency, A-1 power wiring, 3-5 to 3-8, 5-1 to 5-6, 6-1 to 6-2
Line Regeneration Modules, 2-20 reactor, 2-8, 2-9, 9-15, 9-16
Local (digital input 8), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-12 specifications, terminal strip, A-2
Output current values, 2-2, 3-9
M
P
Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1, drive
compliance with, 7-6, B-1 to B-2 Parts, replacement, 9-12 to 9-17
Mains filters, CE-compliant, 2-20 PC control, see Control Source
installing, C-2 to C-12 Power board
Mechanical motor overload protection, 6-1 location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
Meter output, 2-18, 7-2, 7-10 part number, 9-13, 9-14
Model numbers, 2-1 Power Module Inteface board
MOP (motor-operated potentiometer), 7-12 to 7-14 part number, 9-17
Motor Power Module Interface board
compatible reactors, 3-8 location, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10
Encoder Cable Kit, 2-20 part number, 9-15, 9-16
lead lengths, 3-7 Power Supply board
overload protection, mechanical, 6-1 location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
setting maximum speed, 7-7 part number, 9-13, 9-14
wiring, 6-1 to 6-2 Power terminals
Mounting dimensions, 3-2 to 3-3 tightening torque specifications, 5-5
Mounting hardware, 4-1 wiring, 3-5 to 3-6, 4-1 to 4-9, 5-1 to 5-6, 6-1 to
6-2
Precharge contactor
N location, 2-8
part number, 9-15
NEMA 4X/12 drives, installing covers on, 8-2
Precharge resistor
NEMA enclosures
location, 2-8
definitions, 2-3
part number, 9-15
part numbers, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14
Profibus Interface board, 2-21
ratings, 2-2
Publications, related, 1-1
Network
AutoMax Network Option board, 2-20
ControlNet Network Option board, 2-20 R
DeviceNet Network Option board, 2-19
Profibus Interface board, 2-21 Ramp 1/Ramp 2 (digital input 7), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5,
7-13
Ratings
AC input, 2-2
Index Index-3
fuse, 3-10 Status relays, Form A/B, 2-18, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-17
matching Power Module input to supplied Stop (digital input 2), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-16
power, 3-5 Stopping the drive, 7-6
NEMA enclosures, 2-2 Super Remote Meter Interface board (RMI), 2-19,
output current, 2-2 2-20
power, 2-2 SVC, see Sensorless Vector Control
watts loss, 2-2
Reactors, 3-8
Regulator board
T
component locations, 2-12 to 2-14 Tachometer, pulse, see Encoder
description, 2-11 Terminal strip
location, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10 input specifications, A-2
part number, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17 output specifications, A-2
Relays, output status, see Status Relays terminal identification, 2-17 to 2-18
Reliance, getting assistance from, 1-1 tightening torque, 3-7
Remote (digital input 8), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-12 wiring, 2-18, 3-5 to 3-7, 7-1 to ??, 7-1 to 7-17
Remote Meter Interface board (RMI), 2-19, 2-20 Thyristor precharge module, 2-9, 9-16
Replacement parts, 9-12 to 9-17 Transformer
Reset (digital input 3), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-16 current, 2-8, 2-9, 9-15, 9-16
Reverse (digital input 6), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-14 ground fault, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17
RMI, see Remote Meter Interface Board isolation input, installing, 5-1
RS-232 Troubleshooting, 9-1 to 9-11
cable length, 3-9
communication port, 2-12 to 2-14, 2-18
terminal strip specifications, A-2 V
wiring, 2-18, 3-9, 7-1, 7-9
Vector regulation, 2-1
Run (digital input 4), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-15
Ventilation, see Air Flow
Volts/hertz regulation, 2-1
S
Sensorless vector control, 2-1 W
Serial communication, see RS-232
Watts loss rating, 2-2, 4-1
Service conditions, A-1
Weights, 3-2
Site requirements for drive installation, 3-1
Wire routing, 4-1 to 4-9
Snubber resistor braking, 5-1
Wire size, 3-5 to 3-7
signal, 2-11
Wiring diagrams, 200-400 HP system, D-1
specifications, A-2
wiring, 2-17 to 2-18, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-16
Snubber Resistor Braking Kit, 2-20
Software, 1-1
Specifications
conduit opening sizes, 4-3 to 4-9
drive dimensions and weights, 3-2 to 3-3
encoder feedback device, A-3
environmental, 3-2
mounting hardware, 4-1
terminal strip inputs, A-2
terminal strip output, A-2
wire sizes, 3-5 to 3-7
Specifications, technical, A-1 to A-3
Speed, setting maximum, 7-7
Start (digital input 1), 2-18, 7-2, 7-4, 7-5, 7-16
Start enable see Function Loss
Index-4 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

DIF
Documentation
Improvement Form
Use this form to give us your comments concerning this publication or to report an
error that you have found. For convenience, you may attach copies of the pages with
your comments. After you have completed this form, please return it to:
Reliance Electric
Technical Documentation
24800 Tungsten Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44117
Fax: 216.266.7785
Publication Name: GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06
Publication Number: D2-3360-5 Publication Date: December 2000
Comments:
Your Name: Date:

Company Name: Phone: ( )
Address:
Thank you for your comments.
Technical Writing Internal Use
Date: DIF Number:
Follow-Up Action:
Publication D2-3360-5 - December 2000  2000 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
GV3000/SE 460 VAC
General Purpose (Volts/Hertz)
and Vector Duty Drive M/Ns: 75V4060-200V4060
Software Start-Up and Reference Manual
Version 6.06

!
ATTENTION: Only qualified electrical personnel familiar with the construction and operation of
this equipment and the hazards involved should install, adjust, operate, or service this equipment.
! Read and understand this manual and other applicable manuals in their entirety before
proceeding. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
disconnected. After disconnecting input power, wait five (5) minutes for the DC bus capacitors
to discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are
ATTENTION: The drive can operate at and maintain zero speed. The user is responsible for
assuring safe conditions for operating personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual
alarms, or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating or may operate at or near zero
speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: Do not install modification kits with power applied to the drive. Disconnect and
lock out incoming power before attempting such installation or removal. Failure to observe this
ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired emergency stop circuit outside of
the drive circuitry. This circuit must disable the system in case of improper operation.
Uncontrolled machine operation may result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in bodily injury.
ATTENTION: The drive contains ESD- (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and
assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or
repairing the drive. Erratic machine operation and damage to, or destruction of, equipment can
result if this procedure is not followed. Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily
injury.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for conforming with all applicable local, national, and
international codes. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction
of, the equipment.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.

ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
PROFIBUS is a trademark of PROFIBUS International.
GV3000/SE, AutoMax, RPM, and Reliance are trademarks of Rockwell International.
© 2001 Rockwell International Corporation.

CONTENTS
Preface .............................................................................................................................. VII
Chapter 1 Starting Up the Drive for Volts/Hertz Regulation

1.1 Preparing for Start Up (Volts/Hertz) .......................................................... 1-2
1.2 Start-Up Procedure (Volts/Hertz) .............................................................. 1-3
Chapter 2 Starting Up the Drive for Vector Regulation

2.1 Preparing for Start Up (Vector) ................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Start-Up Procedure (Vector) ..................................................................... 2-3
Chapter 3 Using the Keypad/Display to Program, Monitor, and Control the Drive
3.1 Monitor Mode ............................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Displaying the Selected Reference ............................................. 3-2
3.1.2 Entering the Manual Speed Reference ....................................... 3-3
3.2 Program Mode .......................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Drive Control ............................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 The Display ............................................................................................... 3-4
3.4.1 Display Range ............................................................................... 3-4
3.4.2 Scaling the Manual Reference, Speed Display, and
Reference Display Using P.028 ................................................... 3-5
3.5 The Keypad ............................................................................................... 3-6
3.6 Drive Status LEDs ..................................................................................... 3-8
3.7 Monitor Mode LEDs .................................................................................. 3-9
Chapter 4 Programming Reference

4.1 Parameter Menus ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Parameter Types ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Displaying or Changing Parameter Values............................................... 4-3
4.4 Ensuring Program Security ....................................................................... 4-5
4.5 First Menu Parameters ............................................................................. 4-6
4.5.1 First Menu General Parameter Descriptions (P.000 to P.006) .. 4-6
4.6 Second Menu Parameters ........................................................................ 4-11
4.6.1 Entering the Second Menu Password ......................................... 4-11
4.6.2 Second Menu General Parameter Descriptions (P.007
to P.099) ........................................................................................ 4-14
4.6.3 Second Menu V/Hz Parameter Descriptions (H.000 to
H.022) ............................................................................................ 4-55
4.6.4 Second Menu Vector Parameter Descriptions (U.000 to
U.048) ............................................................................................ 4-68
Table of Contents I
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting the Drive Using Error Codes
5.1 Identifying Alarm Codes and Recovering ................................................. 5-2
5.2 Identifying Fault Codes and Recovering ................................................... 5-3
5.3 Accessing, Reading, and Clearing the Faults in the Error Log ................ 5-6
5.4 Identifying Fatal Fault Codes and Recovering ......................................... 5-9
Appendix A Alphabetical Listing of Parameters ................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Record of User Parameter Settings .................................................................. B-1
Appendix C Power Module-Dependent Parameter Default Values

(230 V Series) ....................................................................................................... C-1
Appendix D Default Parameter Settings ................................................................................ D-1
Appendix E Configuring the Digital Inputs When the RMI Board is

Installed in the Drive ........................................................................................... E-1
Appendix F Using the Terminal Strip Analog Input ............................................................. F-1
Appendix G Drive Regulation Overview ................................................................................ G-1
II GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

List of Figures
Figure 3.1 – Keypad/Display ............................................................................. 3-1

Figure 3.2 – Example of a Monitor Mode Display ............................................. 3-2
Figure 3.3 – Example of a Program Mode Display ........................................... 3-4
Figure 4.1 – Parameter Menu Structure ........................................................... 4-2

Figure 4.2 – Analog Output Selection and Setting ........................................... 4-21
Figure 4.3 – Trim Reference Source Selection ................................................ 4-23
Figure 4.4 – Draw and Trim Gain ..................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4.5 – S-Curves ....................................................................................... 4-26
Figure 4.6 – Typical Preset Operation .............................................................. 4-35
Figure 4.7 – Drive Start, Stop, and Running Status When Configured for
Edge Control vs. Level Control ..................................................... 4-45
Figure 4.8 – Sample Alarm Circuit for 75-200 HP Drives Using the Level
Sense Enable Feature .................................................................. 4-46
Figure 4.9 – Signal Selection for Network Output Registers ............................ 4-52
Figure 4.10 – Volts/Hertz Ratio .......................................................................... 4-55
Figure 4.11 – Torque Boost Voltage .................................................................. 4-57
Figure 4.12 – Avoidance Frequency Band ........................................................ 4-61
Figure 4.13 – Volts/Hertz Curve Selection ........................................................ 4-65
Figure 4.14 – Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram for Calculating Rotor Time
Constant ....................................................................................... 4-80
Figure 4.15 – Outer Control Loop Proportional Trim ......................................... 4-90
Figure F.1 – Terminal Strip Analog Input .......................................................... F-1

Figure F.2 – Analog Input Conversion Scaling (Speed and Trim Reference) .. F-3
Figure G.1 – Volts/Hertz Regulator Block Diagram ........................................... G-3

Figure G.2 – Flux Vector Control Block Diagram ............................................. G-4
Figure G.3 – Sensorless Vector Control Block Diagram ................................... G-4
Figure G.4 – Vector Regulator: Reference Detail .............................................. G-5
Figure G.5 – Vector Regulator: Speed Loop Detail ........................................... G-6
Figure G.6 – Vector Speed PI and Iq Reference Limit Selection ...................... G-7
Figure G.7 – Outer Control Loop Block Diagram .............................................. G-8
Table of Contents III

IV GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06
List of Tables
Table 3.1 – Display Range Examples ............................................................. 3-5

Table 3.2 – Drive Status LEDs ........................................................................ 3-8
Table 3.2 – Monitor Mode LEDs ...................................................................... 3-9
Table 4.1 – Speed Reference Source Based on P.000 and AUTO/MAN

Key Status .................................................................................... 4-7
Table 4.2 – Function Selection for Digital Inputs 6, 7, and 8 .......................... 4-14
Table 4.3 – Acceptable P.007 and P.008 Selection Combinations ................. 4-18
Table 4.4 – Preset Speed Digital Inputs .......................................................... 4-34
Table 4.5 – Faults That Can Be Auto Reset .................................................... 4-38
Table 4.6 – AUTO/MAN Key Status Based on P.000 and P.052 .................... 4-42
Table 4.7 – STOP/RESET Key Status Based on P.000 and P.055 ................ 4-47
Table 5.1 – List of Alarm Codes ...................................................................... 5-2

Table 5.2 – List of Fault Codes ........................................................................ 5-3
Table 5.3 – Fatal Fault Codes That Can Be Reset ......................................... 5-9
Table F.1 – Analog Input Conversion Scaling for Speed or Trim Reference .. F-2
Table F.2 - Analog Input Conversion Scaling for Torque Reference .............. F-4
Table of Contents V
VI GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06
PREFACE
This manual is a start-up and programming reference guide for the version 6.06
GV3000/SE (Sensorless Enhanced) drive. The drive can be set up for either volts
per hertz (V/Hz) or vector regulation. This manual provides a start-up procedure for
both.
The start-up procedures are followed by reference information. This information

includes a complete list of all parameters and a description of the keypad/display.
• You will need to know to use the keypad to perform the start-up procedures
described in chapters 1 and 2. If you do not, refer to chapter 3 first.
• For drives that will be set up for V/Hz regulation, go to chapter 1 for the start-up
procedure.
• For drives that will be set up for vector regulation, go to chapter 2 for the start-
up procedure.
• For a description of all the parameters, go to chapter 4.
• For troubleshooting guidelines, go to chapter 5.
• For a description of the drive hardware, refer to the GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive
Hardware Reference, Installation, and Troubleshooting instruction manual
(D2-3392).
Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric
manual, contact your local Reliance sales office. For technical assistance, call
1-800-726-8112.
Preface VII
VIII GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06
CHAPTER 1
Starting Up the Drive
for Volts/Hertz Regulation
This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure for drives which utilize open-loop
V/Hz regulation. V/Hz regulation is the default method of regulation. You do not
need to select it.
If you are starting up a drive which will perform vector regulation, refer to the vector
start-up procedure in chapter 2.0 instead. Do not perform the start-up procedure in
this chapter.
The start-up procedure below provides step-by-step instructions for:
• powering up
• checking monitor mode displays
• accessing program mode
• configuring General parameters (designated with a "P")
• configuring specific V/Hz parameters (designated with an "H")
• checking motor rotation direction
• running the drive
This start-up procedure describes how to program the minimum set of parameters
that usually need to be programmed for applications using V/Hz regulation. Once
you program these parameters, their values are retained even if power is lost. You
only need to reprogram them if you want to change how the drive operates.
Your application may require programming other parameters in addition to the ones
described in this start-up procedure. Refer to chapter 4 for a description of all the
parameters to verify whether you need to program any additional parameters as
well. Appendix A provides a list of parameters listed alphabetically.
Throughout this manual, you will see references to parameter names and the
numbers that identify them for the drive. This manual uses the same format that will
be shown on the keypad/display to refer to parameters:
P.nnn
U.nnn
H.nnn
r.nnn
where: nnn is a number
P designates General parameters
U designates Vector parameters
H designates Volts/Hertz parameters
r designates optional RMI parameters
Starting Up the Drive for Volts/Hertz Regulation 1-1

1.1 Preparing for Start Up (Volts/Hertz)
Read through the following sections to prepare for the start-up procedure.
What You Need To Know:
• You must be qualified to perform the procedure and be familiar with V/Hz
regulation.
• You should be familiar with the keypad/display. If you are not familiar with the
keypad/display, refer to chapter 3, which describes it.
What You Need To Do:
• Complete all hardware installation as described in the hardware reference

manual. This includes connecting input power, input transformers (if required),
disconnects, fuses, and the terminal strip on the drive.
• Record the following motor data from each motor nameplate for use during the
procedure. Space is provided for recording information from three motors:
Motor rated amps:

Motor rated volts:
Motor base frequency:
Motor rated amps:

Motor rated volts:
Motor rated amps:

Motor rated volts:
• Connect the drive to the motor.

• Check that you have not been prevented from programming the drive. If the
PASSWORD LED on the keypad is on, programming has been prevented in
parameter P.051, Programming Disable. Refer to section 4.4 in this manual for
the procedure to enable programming.
If You Have a Problem:
To Exit:
During most of the start-up procedure, you will be in program mode, which is used
to program parameters. If you want to stop programming parameters, you can exit
program mode. You can do this by pressing the PROGRAM key until the
PROGRAM LED turns off. This will place the keypad/display in monitor mode, the
default. You can read more about these modes in chapter 3.
1-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

To Restore a Default Parameter Value after Writing over It:
If you enter the wrong value while programming parameters, you can restore the
default if you have not yet pressed the ENTER key. To do so:
1. Press the PROGRAM key.

2. Press the ENTER key. The default value of the parameter will be displayed
again. You can select it with ENTER or enter a new one and press ENTER.
To Restore All the Default Values to General (P) Parameters:
If you need to restore all the default values for General (P) parameters after
programming them, you can do so using the Restore Defaults parameter (P.050).
1.2 Start-Up Procedure (Volts/Hertz)

This section describes the start-up procedure for drives set up for V/Hz regulation.
Before using this procedure, you should have read section 1.1 for information you
need to know before working with the drive.
Step 1. Power Up the Drive
Before applying power, verify that D.C. BUS LED is off for proper precharge. See
instruction manual D2-3392-5, page 2-3. This step verifies that the drive powers up
and passes the power-up diagnostics. After the drive passes the diagnostics, the
keypad/display automatically enters monitor mode, with speed displayed.
Turn power on.
The initial display shows SELF, with all

monitor mode and status LEDs on, indicating
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the drive is performing power-up
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG diagnostics.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
After diagnostics are complete (5-6

AUTO Forward
seconds), the SPEED LED is on and the
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
keypad/display is in monitor mode. The
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG displayed value is zero. You can move
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
through the five items accessible in monitor
STOP mode - Speed, Volts, Amps, Hz, and Kw - by
RESET START
pressing the ENTER key.

Step 2. Select Program Mode
In this step, you will select program mode, which will give you access to the First
Menu General (P) parameters.
Press the PROGRAM key.
The PROGRAM LED is on and the First

Menu General (P) parameters can be
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse accessed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3. Program First Menu General Parameters P.000 - P.005

This step describes how to change First Menu General (P) parameters P.000
through P.005. P.000 selects where the drive is controlled from. This procedure
assumes local control from the keypad (P.000 = LOCL), which is the default setting
for the parameter.
Step 3.1 Press the ENTER key to display the first parameter, P.000, Control Source.
The default setting for P.000 is LOCL, or

local control.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.2 Press the key to display P.001, Accel Time 1 (RAMP 1).
This parameter sets the acceleration time in

AUTO Forward
seconds.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 3.3 Press the ENTER key to display the default setting of P.001.
This displays the default setting for

acceleration time (20.0 seconds).
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.4 Press the key to increase acceleration time, or the key to decrease
acceleration time.
The adjustment range is:
1.0 to 999.9 seconds.
VALUE ENTERED:
Step 3.5 Press the ENTER key to save the changed value.
After pressing ENTER, the same parameter

AUTO Forward
number is displayed. You can now go to the
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.6 Press the key to display P.002, Decel Time 1 (RAMP 1).
This parameter sets the deceleration time in

seconds. The default stop method is
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse coast-to-stop, set in P.025.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START


deceleration time (20.0 seconds).
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.8 Press the key to increase deceleration time, or the key to decrease
deceleration time.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.10 Press the key to display P.003, Minimum Speed.
ATTENTION: The drive can operate near zero speed. The user is
responsible for ensuring safe conditions for operating personnel by
! providing suitable guards, audible or visual alarms, or other devices to
indicate that the drive is operating near zero speed. Failure to observe
This parameter sets the minimum speed in

AUTO Forward
Hz.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

This shows that the default setting for

Minimum Speed is 5.0 Hz.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.12 Press the key to increase minimum speed or the key to decrease
minimum speed.
0.5 Hz to the value set for P.004 (Maximum

Speed).
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.14 Press the key to display P.004, Maximum Speed.
This parameter sets the maximum speed in

Hz.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
In addition, the drive has overfrequency
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
protection by means of H.022. Refer to the
ENTER
Password PROGRAM
description of this parameter and be sure to
STOP
RESET START
set it appropriate to your application.

ATTENTION: The user is responsible for ensuring that driven

machinery, all drive-train mechanisms, and application material are
! capable of safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the
drive. In V/Hz regulation, overfrequency protection in the drive is
provided by means of H.022. Failure to observe this precaution could

Maximum Speed is 60.0 Hz.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.16 Press the key to increase maximum speed or the key to decrease
maximum speed.
15.0 Hz to the value set for H.022

(Overfrequency Limit).
The maximum value is 210 Hz.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 3.18 Press the key to display P.005, Current Limit.
This parameter sets Current Limit, which

corresponds to the value in parameter
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse P.095, Power Module Output Amps.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Current Limit is 100.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.20 Press the key to decrease current limit. Decrease current limit only
if the motor nominal current rating is less than the drive nominal current
rating.
Use the following equation to calculate

current limit:
Motor Rated Amps(1)

x 100
Rated Drive Output Amps(2)
(1)
From motor nameplate
(2)
See the hardware reference manual for
ratings.
Adjustment Range: 50 to 110
VALUE ENTERED:

Step 3.21 Press the ENTER key to save the entered value.

number is displayed. You can now move to
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 4. Enter the Second Menu Password
This step is required in order to access the Second Menu General (P) parameters
and the Volts/Hertz (H) parameters.
Step 4.1 Press the key to display parameter P.006, Second Menu Password.
This parameter allows you to enter the

factory preset password that allows access
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse to the Second Menu.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE The Second Menu provides access to all
STOP
parameters and the error log.
RESET START
Step 4.2 Press the ENTER key.
Zero is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 4.3 Press the key until the password number "107" is displayed.
Note that the password, and access to the

AUTO Forward
Second Menu, will be retained if the drive
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse loses and regains power.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 4.4 Press the ENTER key to save the password number.
After pressing ENTER, P.006 is displayed.

You now have access to all parameters and
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the error log.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE After the password is entered, the parameter
STOP
value is reset to 0.
RESET START
Step 5. Program the Second Menu Volts/Hertz (H) Parameters
This step describes how to program the parameters that apply to V/Hz regulation
only.
Step 5.1 Press the PROGRAM key to return to the First Menu.
The display returns to the General (P)

AUTO Forward
parameters in the First Menu.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.2 Press the key twice.
The error log (Err) is bypassed, then ......

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
.... the Volts/Hertz (H)

parameter main menu is
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.3 Press the ENTER key to access the first Volts/Hertz parameter: H.000,
Motor Nameplate Volts.
This parameter sets the Motor Nameplate

Volts and is taken directly from the motor
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse nameplate.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The default setting for H.000 is displayed.

The factory-set default value is 460.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Default value varies.

Step 5.5 If no change was made, press the ENTER key to return to the parameter. If
you changed the value, press ENTER to accept the change and return to
the parameter.

is displayed. You can now move to the next
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.6 Press the key to display H.001, Motor Nameplate Base Frequency.
Note that if Motor Nameplate Base Frequency is not set correctly, the
monitor mode SPEED display will also not be scaled correctly.
This parameter adjusts the volts/hertz ratio.

Base frequency is the set frequency at which
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the output voltage reaches the Motor
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG Nameplate Voltage.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
Password
See figure 4.10 for more information.
STOP
RESET START
The default setting of 60.0 Hz is displayed.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.8 Press the key to decrease base frequency, if necessary.
This value will typically not need to be

changed from 60 Hz.


AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.10 Press the key to display H.002, Motor Nameplate Amps.
ATTENTION: This parameter setting must not exceed the rated amps
found on the nameplate. Excess heating of the motor could result if
! this is not the case. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
This parameter specifies the Motor

AUTO Forward
Nameplate Amps and is taken directly from
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
the motor nameplate.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The default setting depends on the drive

rating. The display shown here is only an
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse example.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.12 Press the key to increase the motor nameplate amps, or the key
to decrease motor nameplate amps.
The adjustment range depends on the drive

rating. See Appendix C.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.14 Press the key to display H.003, Torque Boost Voltage.
This parameter is required to offset the

voltage drop of the motor at low speeds and
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse produce constant torque. For example, high
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
friction loads may require high starting
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE torque.
STOP
START
RESET
Refer to figure 4.11 for more information.
The default setting is 0.5.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.16 Press the key to increase the torque boost voltage, or the key to
decrease torque boost voltage.
Important: If you set H.003 = 0, you must perform the identification test, controlled by
H.020, prior to running. Refer to the H.020 parameter description for
more information.
0.0% to 20.0%
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.18 Press the key until H.017, Input Power/Snubber Configuration, is
displayed.
This parameter selects the input power

AUTO Forward
supply type/snubber resistor kit
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse configuration. See chapter 4 for more
RUN
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG information.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

The default setting is 0.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.20 Press the key to increase the selection value, or leave it at 0.
If you do not have AC input or you are using a snubber resistor, see the
H.017 parameter description for more information.

AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING MAN Reverse 0 = AC input; snubber resistor not used;
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
ride-through enabled.
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
1 = AC input; snubber resistor used;
ENTER
Password PROGRAM
STOP
RESET START
2 = DC input; snubber resistor not used;
ride-through disabled.
3 = DC input; snubber resistor used;
4 = DC input, snubber resistor not used;
5 = DC input; snubber resistor used;
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.22 Press the key until H.018, Volts/Hertz Curve Type, is displayed.
This parameter selects the type of curve for

volt/hertz regulation. See chapter 4 and step
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse 5.24 for more information.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The default setting is 0 for linear curve.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.24 Press the key to increase the selection value to 1 or 2, or leave it at 0.
0 = Linear curve
1 = Optimized curve for Reliance Electric
RPM AC motors
2 = For centrifugal pump and fan motor
applications
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6. Return to Monitor Mode
This step describes how to exit program mode and return to monitor mode.
Step 6.1 The display should now show the last parameter adjusted in Step 5,
H.018.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.2 Press the PROGRAM key twice to exit program mode.
The display returns to monitor mode with

speed displayed. The SPEED LED is on
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse and the PROGRAM LED is off.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

ATTENTION: The subsequent steps require rotating parts and/or
electrical circuits to be exposed. Stay clear if unit must be running, or
! disconnect and lock out or tag power source if contact must be made.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or
loss of life.
Important: The stop input on the terminal strip is not active when the Control
Source parameter (P.000) is set to LOCL, as it is during this start-up
procedure. Use the STOP/RESET key if you need to stop the drive.
Step 7. Check Motor Rotation Direction
This step involves verifying the speed reference is set to minimum speed, starting
the drive, and checking that the motor rotates in the correct direction. It is
performed with the motor disconnected from the load.
Step 7.1 Press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns off.
The keypad/display will enter monitor mode.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7.2 Verify that the AUTO LED is off (press the AUTO/MAN key until the
AUTO LED turns off).
This selects the local keypad as the speed

reference source.
Step 7.3 Press the key or the key once.
The monitor mode LEDs will all turn off and

AUTO Forward
the manual speed reference value will be
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
displayed. The speed reference value is in
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG the units defined in P.028. The display
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
shown here is only an example.
STOP
RESET START
Step 7.4 If the speed reference is at minimum speed, then proceed to Step 7.6.
If the speed reference is not at minimum speed, proceed to Step 7.5.

Step 7.5 Press the key to decrease the speed reference value.
Step 7.6 Press the ENTER key to return to monitor mode.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7.7 Verify that you have selected RUN and FORWARD. Press the START key.
The drive is now running. The keypad/

AUTO Forward
display is in monitor mode and the SPEED,
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
RUNNING, and FORWARD LEDs are on.
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG The drive should be running at minimum
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
speed. The sample display shows 150
STOP
RPM.
RESET START
Step 7.8 Visually check that the motor rotates counter-clockwise (CCW) when
viewed from the driven motor shaft end.
CCW

Step 7.9
• If the rotation direction is NOT correct, press the STOP/RESET key and
continue with Step 7.10.
• If the rotation direction is correct, continue with Step 7.14.
When the STOP/RESET key is pressed, the

AUTO Forward
RUNNING LED turns out.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7.10 Turn off and lock out or tag power to the drive.
Step 7.11 Verify that the DC bus capacitors are discharged. Refer to the
hardware reference manual for this procedure.

power has been disconnected. After disconnecting input power, wait
! five (5) minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check
the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure the DC bus capacitors are
discharged before touching any internal components. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of
life.
Step 7.12 Switch any two of the motor leads (U, V, or W).
Step 7.13 Turn power on, and press the START key. Repeat Step 7.8.
Step 7.14 To make sure that the drive is not inadvertently started, turn off and
lock out or tag power to the drive. Verify that the motor direction is
appropriate for the required machine direction, and then connect the
motor to the load.

Step 8. Run the Drive
This step describes how to adjust the speed reference from the keypad and run the
motor up to maximum speed in Hz. At maximum Hz, you must check values in
monitor mode. This step assumes you have connected motor to the load.

! capable of safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the
drive. In V/Hz regulation, overfrequency protection in the drive is
provided by means of H.022. Failure to observe this precaution could
Step 8.1 Press the ENTER key until the Hz LED turns on. (If the drive is not
running, press the START key.)
This example shows the minimum hertz

AUTO Forward
setting of parameter P.003.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 8.2 Press the or key once. All of the monitor mode LEDs turn off.
Increase the speed reference to the maximum value by using the key.
Wait five seconds or press the ENTER key to return to monitor mode.
This increases the drive speed reference

and the motor will rotate up to maximum
SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse speed.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
The monitor mode LEDs turn off when the
ENTER
Password PROGRAM
reference is changed.
STOP
RESET START
The display now shows the drive speed.

AUTO Forward
Your speed display may be different.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 8.3 Press the ENTER key to move to the VOLTS display.
This example shows the output volts at

Maximum Speed (P.004). Your actual
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse reading may be different.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
VALUE READ:
Step 8.4 Press the ENTER key to move to the AMPS display.
This example shows the output amps at

Maximum Speed (P.004). Your actual
SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse reading may be different.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
VALUE READ:
Step 8.5 Press the ENTER key to move to the Hz display.
This example shows the Hz value

corresponding to the value set in parameter
SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse P.004, Maximum Speed. Your actual
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
reading may be different.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
VALUE READ:
Step 8.6 Press the STOP/RESET key. The driven motor should stop as
programmed in P.025, Stop Type.
End of V/Hz Start-Up Procedure
This is the end of the basic V/Hz start-up procedure. When the start-up values are
final, Appendix B can be used to record final settings.
To configure remaining parameters according to the specific application, refer to

Chapter 4, Programming Reference. If you have purchased the Control and
Configuration Software (CS3000), save your configuration to a personal computer.
Refer to the CS3000 software instruction manual (D2-3348) for this procedure.
Recall that the Control Source parameter (P.000) was set to LOCL in this start-up
procedure. If you need to operate the drive from a different control source, you will
need to change the setting in parameter P.000.

CHAPTER 2
Starting Up the Drive
for Vector Regulation
This chapter describes the basic start-up procedure for drives which utilize flux
vector control (FVC) or sensorless vector control (SVC). Part of this procedure
describes how to select vector regulation.
If you are starting up a drive which will perform V/Hz regulation, refer to the V/Hz
start-up procedure in chapter 1.0 instead. Do not perform the start-up procedure in
this chapter.
The start-up procedure below provides step-by-step instructions for:

• powering up
• checking monitor mode displays
• accessing program mode
• configuring General parameters (designated with a "P")
• configuring specific vector parameters (designated with a "U")
• checking motor rotation direction
• running the drive
This start-up procedure describes how to program the minimum set of parameters
that usually need to be programmed for applications using vector regulation. Once
you program these parameters, their values are retained even if power is lost. You
only need to reprogram them if you want to change how the drive operates.
Your application may require programming other parameters in addition to the ones
described in this start-up procedure. Refer to chapter 4 for a description of all
parameters to verify whether you need to program any additional parameters as
well. Appendix A provides a list of parameters listed alphabetically.
Throughout this manual, you will see references to parameter names and the
numbers that identify them for the drive. This manual uses the same format that will
be shown on the keypad/display to refer to parameters:
P.nnn
U.nnn
H.nnn
r.nnn
where: nnn is a number
P designates General parameters
U designates Vector parameters
H designates Volts/Hertz parameters
r designates optional RMI parameters
Starting Up the Drive for Vector Regulation 2-1

2.1 Preparing for Start Up (Vector)
Read through the following sections to prepare for the start-up procedure.
What You Need To Know:
• You must be qualified to perform the procedure and be familiar with vector
regulation.
• You should be familiar with the keypad/display. If you are not familiar with the
keypad/display, refer to chapter 3, which describes it.
What You Need To Do:
• Complete all hardware installation as described in the hardware reference

manual. This includes connecting input power, input transformers (if required),
disconnects, fuses, the encoder (if used), and the terminal strip on the drive.
• Record the following motor data from motor nameplate for use during the
procedure:
Motor rated horsepower:
Motor rated amps:
Motor rated volts:
Motor rated RPM:
Number of motor poles* :
* RPM AC motors are 4-pole regardless of base RPM. Standard NEMA motors are
as follows:
3600 RPM = 2 poles
1800 RPM = 4 poles
1200 RPM = 6 poles
900 RPM = 8 poles
Consult your motor supplier if you are unsure of the motor design you are using.
• If an encoder is used, record the following encoder data. Make sure the
encoder is mounted to the motor and connected to the drive.
Encoder PPR:
• Connect the drive to the motor and disconnect the motor from the load.
• Check that you have not been prevented from programming the drive. If the
PASSWORD LED on the keypad is on, programming has been prevented in
parameter P.051, Programming Disable. Refer to section 4.4 in this manual for
the procedure to enable programming.
If You Have a Problem:
To Exit:
During most of the start-up procedure, you will be in program mode, which is used
to program parameters. If you want to stop programming parameters, you can exit
program mode. You can do this by pressing the PROGRAM key until the
PROGRAM LED has turned off. This will place the keypad/display in monitor mode,
the default. You can read more about these modes in chapter 3.

To Restore a Default Parameter Value after Writing over It:
If you enter the wrong value while programming parameters, you can restore the
default if you have not yet pressed the ENTER key. To do so:
1. Press the PROGRAM key.
2. Press the ENTER key. The default value of the parameter will be displayed
again. You can select it with ENTER or enter a new one and press ENTER.
To Restore All the Default Values to General (P) Parameters:
If you need to restore all the default values for General (P) parameters after
programming them, you can do so using the Restore Defaults parameter (P.050).
2.2 Start-Up Procedure (Vector)

This section describes the start-up procedure for drives set up for vector regulation.
Before using this procedure, you should have read section 2.1 for information you
need to know before working with the drive.
Step 1. Power Up the Drive
This step verifies that the drive powers up and passes the power-up diagnostics.
After the drive passes the diagnostics, the keypad/display automatically enters
monitor mode with speed displayed.
Turn power on.
The initial display will show SELF, with all

monitor mode and status LEDs on, indicating
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the drive is performing power-up diagnostics.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
After diagnostics are complete (5-6

seconds), the SPEED LED is on and the
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse keypad/display is in monitor mode. The
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
displayed value is zero. You can move
FORWARD
Kw
TORQUE REVERSE through the six items that can be accessed
STOP
in monitor mode – Speed, Volts, Amps, Hz,
START
RESET
Kw, and Torque – by pressing the ENTER
key.

Step 2. Select Program Mode
In this step, you will select program mode, which gives you access to the First Menu
General (P) parameters.
Step 2.1 Press the PROGRAM key.

AUTO Forward
Menu General (P) parameters can be
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
accessed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The first General (P) parameter in the First

Menu, P.000, is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3. Enter the Second Menu Password
This step is required to access the Second Menu General (P) parameters and
Vector (U) parameters.
Step 3.1 Press the key until P.006, Second Menu Password, is displayed.
This parameter allows you to enter the

password that allows access to the Second
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse Menu.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE The Second Menu provides access to all the
STOP
parameters and the error log.
RESET START

Zero is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.3 Press the key until the password 107 is displayed.
Note that the password, and access to the

Second Menu, will be retained if the drive
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse loses and then regains power.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3.4 Press the ENTER key to save the password number.
After pressing ENTER, P.006 is displayed.

You now have access to all parameters and
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the error log.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 4. Program the Drive for Vector Regulation
This step describes how to change parameter P.048 (Volts/Hertz or Vector

Regulation) to vector.
Within vector regulation, you can program the drive for flux vector control (FVC) or
sensorless vector control (SVC). FVC operation requires an encoder. SVC
operation does not require an encoder. Both options require U.048 to be set to
UEC. In a later step, you will select either the FVC option or the SVC option.
When you enter the value for vector regulation (P.048 = UEC), the drive will
performs a diagnostic check. After the diagnostics, the drive enters monitor mode
with speed displayed.
Step 4.1 Press the key until P.048, Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation, is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The default setting for P.048 is V/Hz

AUTO Forward
regulation.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 4.3 Press the key to display UEC, vector regulation.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 4.4 Press the ENTER key to save the setting.

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse next step.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 4.5 Note the display.
After the regulation selection is changed, the

drive will perform diagnostics and displays
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse SELF, with all monitor mode and status
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG LEDs on.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
When the diagnostics are complete, the

keypad/display will enter monitor mode with
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse speed displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5. Program First Menu General Parameter P.000 - P.005
This step describes how to change First Menu General (P) parameters P.000
through P.005. P.000 selects where the drive is controlled from. This procedure
assumes local control from the keypad (P.000 = LOCL), which is the default setting
for the parameter.
Step 5.1 Press the PROGRAM key.
You are now in program mode. The

PROGRAM LED is on and the First Menu
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse General (P) parameters can be accessed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.2 Press the ENTER key to display the first parameter, P.000, Control Source.
The default setting for P.000 is LOCL, or

local control.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.3 Press the key to display P.001, Accel Time 1 (RAMP 1).
This parameter sets the acceleration time in

seconds.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START


acceleration time (20.0 seconds).
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.5 Press the key to increase acceleration time, or the key to decrease
acceleration time.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.7 Press the key to display P.002, Decel Time 1 (RAMP1).
This parameter sets the deceleration time in

AUTO Forward
seconds. The default stop method is coast-
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
to-stop, set in P.025.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.8 Press the ENTER key to display the default setting of the P.002.

deceleration time (20.0 seconds).
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.9 Press the key to increase deceleration time, or the key to decrease
deceleration time.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.11 Press the key to display P.003, Minimum Speed.
ATTENTION: The drive can operate at and maintain zero speed. The
user is responsible for ensuring safe conditions for operating
! personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual alarms, or
other devices to indicate that the drive is operating or may operate at
or near zero speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
This parameter sets the minimum speed in

AUTO Forward
RPM.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
This displays the default setting for Minimum

AUTO Forward
Speed, 150 RPM.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.13 Press the key to increase minimum speed or the key to decrease
minimum speed.
0 to the value set for P.004 (Maximum

Speed).
VALUE ENTERED:


AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING
VOLTS REMOTE
MAN Reverse
next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.15 Press the key to display P.004, Maximum Speed.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for ensuring that driven machinery,

all drive-train mechanisms, and application material are capable of
! safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the drive. For
vector regulation, overspeed detection in the drive determines when
the drive shuts down and is factory set to 130% of maximum speed.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
This parameter sets the maximum speed in

RPM.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Maximum Speed.
AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse The default setting is 1722.
VOLTS
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.17 Press the key to increase maximum speed or the key to decrease
maximum speed.
10 to Motor Top Speed (set in parameter

U.017). Refer to Step 7 for parameter
U.017.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5.19 Press the key until P.005, Current Limit, is displayed.
This parameter sets the stator current limit

as a percentage of motor rated amps.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
This display is the default setting for Current

AUTO Forward
Limit, 150% of the value entered in U.004.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 5.21 Press the key to decrease current limit percent.
Note that changing current limit rating affects the maximum attainable
torque the motor can produce.
The adjustment range for current limit is:
U.006 (Magnetizing Current) to 150%.
VALUE ENTERED:
Step 5.22 Press the ENTER key to save the entered value.

number is displayed. You can now move to
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse the next parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6. Program the Second Menu Vector (U) Parameters
This step describes how to program the Vector (U) parameters that apply to vector
regulation only. You will not be adjusting any parameters for V/Hz regulation (H
parameters) in this procedure.
Step 6.1 Press the PROGRAM key to return to the main menu level.
The display will return to the First Menu

AUTO Forward
General (P) parameters.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6.2 Press the key twice.
The error log (Err) is bypassed, then ......

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
.... the Vector (U) parameter main menu is

AUTO Forward
displayed.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.3 Press the ENTER key to access the first Vector parameter, which is
U.000, Torque Reference Source.
This parameter specifies the source for the

torque reference. The source can be the
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse output of the speed loop (the default), the
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG analog input, the option port, or the selected
FORWARD
Kw
TORQUE REVERSE speed reference. This procedure assumes
STOP
that the torque reference is taken from the
START
RESET
speed loop.
Step 6.4 Press the ENTER key to display the default setting of U.000.
This displays the default setting for the

Torque Reference Source, which is 0.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6.5 Press the key to increase the value.
Important: If you are going to change the value for this parameter, see the
description in Chapter 4.
The adjustment options are:
0 = Speed loop output (default setting)

1 = Terminal strip analog input
2 = Option port (network torque reference
register)
3 = Selected speed reference
VALUE ENTERED:
Step 6.6 Press the ENTER key to save the displayed value

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.7 Press the key to display U.001, Encoder PPR.
ATTENTION: The Setting of parameters U.001 (Encoder PPR), U.002

(Motor Poles), U.003 (Motor Nameplate Base Frequency), U.005
! (Motor Nameplate RPM), and U.017 (Motor Top Speed) determines
the motor maximum speed. These parameters must be set by a
qualified person who understands the significance of setting them
accurately. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily
injury.
This parameter selects the number of pulses

per revolution (PPR) of the encoder or
AUTO Forward selects sensorless vector control if an
VOLTS
AMPS
REMOTE
JOG RUN
encoder is not used.
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
For flux vector control (FVC), when the self-
STOP
START
tuning procedure (Step 8) is performed, the
RESET
value of this parameter is automatically set;
however, if the encoder PPR is known, it
should be entered now.

ATTENTION: Do not use a 4096 PPR encoder with 2-pole motor.

Overspeed and motor damage can result. Failure to observe this
! precaution could result in bodily injury.
This displays the default setting for Encoder

PPR, 1024 PPR.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.9 Press the key to increase the PPR, or the key to decrease the PPR.
Select one of the four PPR values if an

encoder is used. Select SE if an encoder is
not used. See the description of U.001 in
Chapter 4 for more information.
VALUE ENTERED:

parameter.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6.11 Press the key to display U.002, Motor Poles.
ATTENTION: The setting of parameters U.001 (Encoder PPR), U.002

injury.
This parameter selects the number of poles

in the motor. If the number of motor poles is
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse not known, refer to Chapter 4.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
ATTENTION: Do not use a 4096 PPR encoder with 2-pole motor.

! precaution could result in bodily injury.
This shows that the default setting for Motor

AUTO Forward
Poles is 4 (4 poles).
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.13 Press the key to increase the selection, or the key to decrease
the selection.
The adjustment options are:
2 = 2 poles
4 = 4 poles (default)
6 = 6 poles
8 = 8 poles
VALUE ENTERED:


SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse parameter.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.15 Press the key to display U.003, Motor Nameplate Base Frequency.

injury.
This parameter is the Motor Nameplate Base

Frequency and is taken from the motor
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse nameplate.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
This shows that the default setting is 60.0

AUTO Forward
Hz.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6.17 Press the key to increase the motor nameplate base frequency or
the key to decrease the motor nameplate base frequency.
15.0 Hz to 120.0 Hz
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.19 Press the key to display U.004, Motor Nameplate Amps.
ATTENTION: This parameter setting must not exceed the rated amps
found on the motor nameplate. Overcurrent or excess heating of the
! motor could result if this is not the case. Failure to observe this
This parameter is the Motor Nameplate

AUTO Forward Rated Amps and is taken from the motor
VOLTS
AMPS
REMOTE
JOG RUN
nameplate.
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

This displays the Motor Nameplate Amps

setting. The default depends on the HP
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse rating of the Power Module. The display
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.21 Press the key to increase the motor nameplate amps or the key
to decrease the motor nameplate amps.
The minimum and maximum allowed

adjustment range for this value depends on
the Power Module HP rating.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6.23 Press the key to display U.005, Motor Nameplate RPM.

injury.
This parameter is the Motor Nameplate RPM

AUTO Forward
and is taken from the motor nameplate.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
This displays the Motor Nameplate RPM

setting. The default depends on the HP
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse rating of the Power Module. The display
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG shown here is only an example.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.25 Press the key to increase the motor nameplate RPM or the key to
decrease the motor nameplate RPM.
The adjustment range for this value depends

on the settings of U.002 (Motor Poles) and
U.003 (Motor Nameplate Base Frequency).
VALUE ENTERED:


AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.27 Press the key to display U.006, Motor Magnetizing Current.
ATTENTION: If this parameter is set incorrectly, overcurrent or

excess heating of the motor could result. Failure to observe this
! precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of, the
equipment.
This parameter is the percent of magnetizing

current with respect to motor rated amps.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
Note that when the vector regulation self-
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE tuning procedure is performed (Step 8), the
STOP
value of this parameter is automatically
START
RESET
calculated. You do not need to enter a value
now.
Step 6.28 Press the key to display U.007, Motor Nameplate Volts.
This parameter is the Motor Nameplate Volts

AUTO Forward
and is taken from the motor nameplate.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

This displays the default setting for the Motor

AUTO Forward
Nameplate Volts. The default setting is 460.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.30 Press the key or the key to increase or decrease the motor
nameplate volts.
180 to 690 Volts
VALUE ENTERED:
Step 6.31 Press the ENTER key to save the displayed value.

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.32 Press the key to display U.022, Motor Nameplate Horsepower.
This parameter specifies the motor

AUTO Forward
horsepower as it appears on the motor
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
nameplate.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

This display the default setting for Motor

Nameplate Horsepower. The default setting
AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse depends on the Power Module rating and is
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG factory-set. This display here is only an
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE example.
STOP
RESET START
Step 6.34 Press the key or the key to increase or decrease the value if it is
different from the motor nameplate.
The adjustment range is 0.3 to 600.0 HP.
VALUE ENTERED:

AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
parameter.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 7. Set the Motor Top Speed
This step sets the Motor Top Speed (U.017) in RPM. For applications that do not
support field weakening, Motor Top Speed must be equal to U.005 (Motor
Nameplate RPM). For applications that do support field weakening, Motor Top
Speed is the maximum field-weakened speed.
Step 7.1 Press the key until U.017 is displayed.
This parameter is the Motor Top Speed in

AUTO Forward
RPM.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
This displays the default setting for the Motor

AUTO Forward
Top Speed. The actual setting depends on
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
the Power Module HP type. The display
JOG RUN
AMPS
Hz AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG shown here is only an example.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7.3 Check the value entered for Step 6.25 (U.005, Motor Nameplate RPM).
If the application does not support field weakening, U.005 and U.017
must be the same. If the application does support field weakening, the
value can be set higher. Press the or key until the value is set
appropriately.
The value set for U.005 to (Maximum value

depends on settings of U.002 and U.003)
VALUE ENTERED:


AUTO Forward
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 8. Perform Vector Regulator Self-Tuning
Before performing the self-tuning procedure, you should have performed steps 1
through 7 above and adjusted all the parameters as described. Note that U.016
may also need to be set if your application requires field weakening.
ATTENTION: The motor will rotate during the self-tuning procedure.

Stay clear of rotating machinery. Failure to observe this precaution
ATTENTION: The motor must be uncoupled from the driven load
during the self-tuning operation or incorrect parameter values will
result. This includes any shaft-coupled devices, such as reducers,
belts, and brakes. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
This step describes how to start the vector regulator self-tuning procedure. This
procedure is enabled by setting parameter U.008, Torque Self-Tune Enable, to ON.
Self-tuning is performed by the drive and determines the proper no load current
value for parameter U.006 and, for flux vector control (U.001 = SE), the encoder
PPR value for parameter U.001. These values must be accurate to ensure that
rated motor torque, speed, and horsepower can be developed for drives set up for
vector regulation. During the procedure, the drive will accelerate up to the value
specified in U.017 (Motor Top Speed).
Verify the following before starting the self-tuning procedure:
• The motor is unloaded.

• The drive is not running. If the RUNNING LED is on, press the STOP/RESET key.
• There are no faults in the error log. If a fault is flashing on the display, refer to
Chapter 5 for instructions on clearing the errors.
How to Interrupt the Self-Tuning Procedure:
If the procedure is enabled only but not active (S-En is displayed), set U.008 to OFF.
If the procedure is active (S-Ac is displayed), press the STOP/RESET key.

What Happens if a Fault Occurs During Self-Tuning?
1. If the drive stops due to a fault, the motor will coast to stop. A self-tuning code
(SF) will be displayed and must be cleared. Refer to Chapter 5 for more
information.
2. Once the drive is stopped, parameter U.008 will be reset to OFF and the
self-tuning procedure will be completed. The results are stored in U.009,
Torque Self-Tune Result.
Step 8.1 Press the key to display U.008, Torque Self-Tune Enable.
Parameter U.008 is displayed.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
The default setting of OFF is displayed.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 8.3 Press the key to enable the self-tuning procedure.
On is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START


AUTO Forward
is displayed. You can now go to the next
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
step.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 8.5 Press the PROGRAM key twice to exit program mode.
This display flashes S-En. This reminds you

AUTO Forward
that the self-tuning procedure is enabled.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 8.6 Press the START key to begin the self-tuning procedure.
ATTENTION: The motor will rotate during the self-tuning procedure.

Stay clear of rotating machinery. Failure to observe this precaution
result. This includes any shaft-coupled devices, such as reducers,
belts, and brakes. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
The display flashes S-Ac, indicating that the

self-tuning procedure is active.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE This procedure takes a few minutes. S-Ac
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz
Kw
AUTO
FORWARD
PROGRAM
JOG flashes on the display until the procedure is
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER complete.
STOP
RESET START
The motor should be rotating in the

CCW counter-clockwise (CCW) direction when

Step 8.7 Self-tuning is now completed. If a zero is displayed, the self-tuning
procedure was completed successfully. Go to step 10.
If SF is displayed, the procedure was not successfully completed. Go to

step 9 to view parameter U.009 for a specific fault code.
When self-tuning is complete, the motor will

ramp to a stop.
SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse
The following parameters will be updated
VOLTS
AMPS
REMOTE
JOG
PROGRAM
RUN based on the self-tuning results:
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
• U.001 - Encoder PPR (if U.001 = SE)
STOP
RESET START • U.006 - Magnetizing Current
• U.008 - Torque Self-Tune Enable (reset
to OFF)
• U.009 - Torque Self-Tune Result
Step 9. Check Self-Tuning Results
The results of the self-tuning procedure is displayed in U.009. This step describes
how to view the results if SF is displayed after the test is started.
Step 9.1 Press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns on to enter
program mode.
The display returns to the Vector (U)

AUTO Forward
parameters.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 9.2 Press the ENTER key to access the Vector parameters.
The display shows U.008, the last parameter

AUTO Forward
accessed.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 9.3 Press the key until U.009 is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 9.4 Press the ENTER key to view the test result.
Step 9.5 Refer to the U.009 parameter description in chapter 4 for the
corresponding cause and corrective action.
Step 9.6 Once the cause of the fault has been corrected, repeat the self-tuning
procedure (Step 8).
ATTENTION: The subsequent steps require rotating parts and/or

electrical circuits to be exposed. Stay clear if the drive must be running, or
! disconnect and lock out or tag power source if contact must be made.
loss of life.
Important: The stop input on the terminal strip is not active when the Control
Source parameter (P.000) is set to LOCL, as it is during this start-up
procedure. Use the STOP/RESET key if you need to stop the drive.
Step 10. Check Motor Rotation Direction
This step involves verifying the speed reference is set to minimum speed, starting
the drive, and checking that the motor rotates in the correct direction. It is
performed with the motor disconnected from the load.
Step 10.1 Press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns off.
The keypad/display will enter monitor mode.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 10.2 Verify that the AUTO LED is off (press the AUTO/MAN key until the
AUTO LED turns off).
This selects the local keypad as the speed

reference source.
Step 10.3 Press the key or the key once.
The monitor mode LEDs will all turn off and

AUTO Forward
the manual speed reference value will be
RUNNING
SPEED
VOLTS REMOTE
MAN Reverse
displayed. The speed reference value is in
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO
FORWARD
PROGRAM
JOG the units defined in P.028. The display
Kw
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
STOP
RESET START
Step 10.4 If the speed reference is at minimum speed, then proceed to Step 10.6.
If the speed reference is not at minimum speed, proceed to Step 10.5.
Step 10.5 Press the key to decrease the speed reference value.
Step 10.6 Press the ENTER key to return to monitor mode.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 10.7 Verify you have selected RUN and FORWARD. Press the START key.

AUTO Forward
display is in monitor mode, and the SPEED,
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
RUNNING, and FORWARD LEDs are on.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE The drive should be running at minimum
STOP
speed. The sample display shows 150
START
RESET
RPM.

Step 10.8 Visually check that the motor rotates counter-clockwise (CCW) when
CCW
Step 10.9
• If the rotation direction is NOT correct, press the STOP/RESET key and
continue with Step 10.10.
• If the rotation direction is correct, continue with Step 10.14.
When the STOP/RESET key is pressed, the

AUTO Forward
RUNNING LED turns off.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 10.10 Turn off and lock out or tag power to the drive.
Step 10.11 Verify that the DC bus capacitors are discharged. Refer to hardware
reference manual for this procedure.
ATTENTION: DC bus capacitors retain hazardous voltage after input

discharged before touching any internal components. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of
life.
Step 10.12 Switch any two of the motor leads (U, V, or W) and A and A NOT on
the encoder.
Step 10.13 Turn power on, and press the START key. Repeat Step 10.8.
Step 10.14 To make sure the drive is not inadvertently started, turn off and lock
out or tag power to the drive. Verify that the motor direction is
appropriate for the required machine direction, and then connect the
motor to the load.

Step 11. Run the Drive
This step describes how to increase the speed reference across the speed range
and check for proper motor operation. This step assumes that P.000 is set to LOCL
(control is local) and the motor is connected to the load.
Step 11.1 Press the START key.
The drive is now running and the keypad/

AUTO Forward
display is in monitor mode.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 11.2 Press the or key once. All monitor mode LEDs will turn off.
Increase the speed reference to the maximum value by using the key.
Wait five seconds or press the ENTER key to return to monitor mode.
This increases the drive speed reference

AUTO Forward
and the motor will rotate up to maximum
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse speed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
ENTER
The monitor mode LEDs turn off when the
Password PROGRAM
STOP
reference is changed.
RESET START
The display now shows the actual drive

AUTO Forward
speed. Your speed display may be different.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 11.3 Press the ENTER key to move to the VOLTS display.
The sample display shows the output volts at

AUTO Forward
maximum speed. Your actual reading may
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
be different.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP VALUE READ:
RESET START
Step 11.4 Press the ENTER key to move to the AMPS display.
This sample display shows the output amps

AUTO Forward
at maximum speed. Your actual reading
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
may be different.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP VALUE READ:
RESET START
Step 11.5 Press the ENTER key to move to the Hz display.
This sample display shows the hertz value

AUTO Forward
corresponding to the value set into P.004,
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
Maximum Speed. Your actual reading may
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG be different.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
VALUE READ:
Step 11.6 Press the STOP/RESET key.
The driven motor should stop as

AUTO Forward
programmed in P.025, Stop Type.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 12. Tune the Speed Regulator
Tuning the speed regulator consists of adjusting the speed regulator proportional
and integral gain values according to the application. The speed regulator uses
these values to calculate the drive's response to a change in speed reference and to
changes in load or other factors in the driven system. This procedure may or may
not be required. This step assumes you have connected the motor to the load.
Step 12.1 Press the START key.

AUTO Forward
display is in monitor mode, and the
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse RUNNING and FORWARD LEDs are on.
RUN
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
JOG Speed is displayed.
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Sep 12.2 Press the PROGRAM key to enter program mode.

AUTO Forward
Menu General (P) parameter main menu is
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 12.3 Press the key until U.– – – is displayed.
The error log (Err) is bypassed, then the

AUTO Forward
Vector (U) parameter main menu is
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 12.4 Press the key until U.012 is displayed. This parameter sets the
speed regulator proportional gain.
The speed loop gain is set for typical speed

loop response and should be adjusted only
when faster speed loop response is
AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING MAN Reverse required.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
Larger proportional gain values result in
ENTER
Password PROGRAM
faster response, but may result in less
STOP
RESET START
stability. If the drive overshoots the speed
reference when changes to the reference
are made, or if the drive is unstable, reduce
the value.
Step 12.5 Press the ENTER key when the value is acceptable.
Step 12.6 Press the key until U.013, Speed Regulator Integral Gain, is displayed.
This parameter should not normally need

adjusting. High inertia loads may require
adjusting this parameter.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS
AMPS
REMOTE
JOG
PROGRAM
RUN Larger integral gain values may result in
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
REVERSE
faster response, but may result in less
TORQUE
Password PROGRAM ENTER stability. If the drive overshoots the speed
STOP
RESET START reference when changes to the reference
are made, or if the drive is unstable, reduce
the value.
Step 12.7 Press the ENTER key when the value is acceptable.
Step 12.8 Continue adjusting until the proper operation is achieved.
End of Vector Start-Up Procedure
This is the end of the basic vector start-up procedure. When the start-up values are
final, Appendix B can be used to record final settings.
To configure the remaining parameters according to the specific application, refer to

Chapter 4. If you have purchased the Control and Configuration Software
(CS3000), save your configuration to a personal computer. Refer to the CS3000
software instruction manual (D2-3348) for this procedure.
Recall that the Control Source parameter (P.000) was set to LOCL in this start-up
procedure. If you need to operate the drive from a different control source, you will
need to change the setting in parameter P.000.

CHAPTER 3
Using the Keypad/Display To Program,
Monitor, and Control the Drive
The front-panel keypad/display is used to program, monitor, and control the drive. It
operates in two modes, monitor mode and program mode. The functions available
at the keypad depend on what mode the keypad/display is in and what is selected
as the drive control source.
In monitor mode (the default mode), you can monitor specific drive outputs as well
as enter the speed or frequency reference for the drive.
In program mode, you can view and adjust drive parameter values, and examine the
error log.
In addition to the functions listed above, if the control source is local (the REMOTE
LED is off), the keypad is also used to select run or jog, select motor direction, and
start the drive.
Regardless of the control source selection, the keypad/display can be used to stop
the drive, reset drive faults, and switch between a manual speed reference or the
selected control source auto reference.
Important: The STOP/RESET key can be disabled by parameter P.055. Refer to

the P.055 parameter description for more information.
The following sections describe monitor mode and program mode in more detail.
The keypad, display, and LEDs are described later in this chapter.
Drive Status LEDs

Display Keypad
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
Monitor Mode Hz AUTO PROGRAM
JOG
LEDs Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
Password LED Password PROGRAM ENTER
STOP
RESET
START
Stop/Reset Start Key

Key
Figure 3.1 – Keypad/Display
Using the Keypad/Display To Program, Monitor, and Control the Drive 3-1
3.1 Monitor Mode
Monitor mode is the keypad/display's default mode during drive operation or it is
entered by pressing the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns off. The
following output data can be displayed in monitor mode:
• Speed
• Volts
• Amps
• Hz
• Kw
• Torque (vector regulation only)
• Selected reference (speed or torque)
To select a value to monitor, press the ENTER key until the LED turns on next to
the desired display item. Pressing the ENTER key advances you through each of
the displays. (Note that all of the LEDs will turn on to indicate the selected
reference display. Refer to section 3.1.1.)
Displays value (SPEED, VOLTS, etc.)

based on selected monitor mode LED.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE To enter monitor mode, press
One of 6 AMPS JOG RUN the PROGRAM key until the
Hz AUTO PROGRAM
LEDs is on. JOG
Kw FORWARD PROGRAM KED turns off.
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET
START
Figure 3.2 – Example of a Monitor Mode Display
3.1.1 Displaying the Selected Reference

In monitor mode, you can display the speed reference (speed or frequency) or the
torque reference the drive is using while it is running (RUNNING LED is on, JOG
LED is off). Follow these steps to display the selected reference:
Step 1. If you are not already in monitor mode, access it by pressing the
PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns off.
Step 2. Press the ENTER key repeatedly to advance through each of the monitor
mode LEDs. All of the monitor mode LEDs will then turn on at once and
the reference will be displayed. Note that the displayed speed reference
value is scaled based on P.028. The torque reference value is displayed in
percent.

If the selected reference is negative and its value is greater than 999, the
SPEED LED will flash (refer to section 3.4.1, Display Range).
Pressing the ENTER key again will advance you to the SPEED monitor display.
3.1.2 Entering the Manual Speed Reference

You can change the manual speed reference at any time while in monitor mode
regardless of the control source. Follow these steps to enter the manual speed
reference:
Step 1. From monitor mode, press the key or the key once. The monitor
mode LEDs all turn off, and the current manual speed reference value will
be displayed.
Step 2. Press the key or the key to change the displayed value to the desired
manual speed reference. Note that the speed reference is in the units
defined in P.028.
Important: The drive accepts the value as it is changed. You do not have to press
the ENTER key to save the value as you do with parameter entry.
Step 3. Press the ENTER key or wait approximately 5 seconds without pressing
the or key to return to monitor mode. (If the drive is not running, you
must press the ENTER key to return to monitor mode.)
3.2 Program Mode

Program mode allows you to display and modify drive parameter values. To enter
program mode, press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns on. The
following can be displayed in program mode:
• Parameter numbers
• Parameter values
• Error log information
If the Programming Disable parameter (P.051) has been set to prevent parameter
modification from the keypad, the PASSWORD LED will also be on. In this case,
before any parameter values can be modified, the operator will have to access
parameter P.051 and enter the password (a factory-set value) to re-enable
programming. When programming has been enabled, the PASSWORD LED will
turn off.
Note that some of the parameters can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
Refer to chapter 4 for programming instructions and parameter descriptions.
Display shows
menu selections:
P.--- AUTO Forward

H.--- (if P.048 = U-H) SPEED RUNNING MAN Reverse
U.--- (if P.048 = UEC) VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
r.--- (if optional RMI Hz AUTO PROGRAM
JOG
board is installed) Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
or STOP
RESET
START
Err (Error Log)
PROGRAM LED is on
Figure 3.3 – Example of a Program Mode Display
3.3 Drive Control

When the control source is the local keypad/display (REMOTE LED is off), the
keypad is used to control the drive. This means that the drive will respond to
START, RUN/JOG, and FORWARD/REVERSE commands only from the keypad.
The functions of the keypad keys are described in section 3.5. Refer to the Control
Source parameter description (P.000) in chapter 4 for more information on selecting
a drive control source.
3.4 The Display

The display portion of the keypad/display is a four-character, seven-segment LED.
At drive power-up, SELF is displayed as the drive performs power-up diagnostics.
During drive operation, the display indicates parameter numbers, parameter values,
fault or alarm codes, and the drive output values. Figures 3.2 and 3.3 show sample
displays.
3.4.1 Display Range

Normally, a minus (–) sign is used as one of the four characters in the display to
indicate a negative value. If a value (including the minus sign) exceeds four
characters, the display will drop the minus sign and display four digits. In this case,
the SPEED LED will flash to indicate that the displayed value is a negative number.
Refer to the examples in table 3.1.
A decimal point to the right of the last digit in the display indicates there is further
resolution (examples A and E) unless decimal point already appears as part of the
number displayed (example G). In either case, the system uses the full resolution of
the number for drive control, not the displayed value.

Table 3.1 – Display Range Examples
If the actual It will appear on the And the SPEED LED
Example
number is... display as... will...
A 1000.5 1000. Not flash
B -999 -999 Not flash
C -1000 1000 Flash
D -99.9 -99.9 Not flash
E -1000.5 1000. Flash
F -9.99 -9.99 Not flash
G -100.25 100.2 Flash
H -9.999 9.999 Flash
This does not apply for the speed display. For the speed display, the FORWARD or
REVERSE LEDs indicate actual speed reference polarity.
3.4.2 Scaling the Manual Reference, Speed Display, and Reference

Display Using P.028
In versions 5.0 and later, the values displayed for the manual reference, the output
speed, and the selected speed reference represent relative speed as opposed to
always being displayed in RPM. These values are scaled using P.028 (Speed
Display Scaling). Refer to the Speed Display Scaling parameter description in
chapter 4 for more information.
3.5 The Keypad
The drive's keypad has nine membrane keys that are used to monitor, program, and
control the drive.
Use the AUTO/MAN key to switch between the auto speed

AUTO reference and the manual speed reference as shown below.
MAN
AUTO/MAN Speed Reference
Status Control Source (P.000) Source
AUTO selected Local keypad/display Terminal strip
(P.000=LOCL)
Terminal strip remote Terminal strip
inputs (P.000=rE)
Option port (P.000=OP) Network
Serial port (P.000=SErL) Terminal strip
MAN selected Local keypad/display Local keypad/display
(P.000=LOCL) or OIM/CS3000
Terminal strip remote Local keypad/display
inputs (P.000=rE) or OIM/CS3000
Option port (P.000=OP) Local keypad/display
or OIM/CS3000
Serial port (P.000=SErL) Local keypad/display
or OIM/CS3000
ATTENTION: When switching from auto to manual,

or manual to auto, the drive will ramp to the reference
! level provided by the new source at the rate specified
in P.001 (Accel Time 1), P.002 (Decel Time 1), P.017
(Accel Time 2), or P.018 (Decel Time 2). Be aware
that an abrupt speed change may occur depending
upon the new reference level and the rate specified in
these parameters. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in bodily injury.
If the control source is changed, the AUTO/MAN selection may be

changed as well. When the control source is changed to OP or rE,
the AUTO/MAN selection is forced to AUTO. If the control source
is changed to LOCL or SErL, the AUTO/MAN selection is forced to
MANUAL. However, if the control source is changed from LOCL to
SErL or vice versa, the AUTO/MAN selection is not changed.
Note that this key is not active if the control source is SErL. Refer
to the P.000 parameter description for more information on control
source selection.
Refer to the following parameters for more information on the

AUTO/MAN key:
• P.052 AUTO/MAN Key Disable

• P.053 Manual Reference Preset Enable

Use the and arrow keys to:
• Step through the drive parameter menus and error log when
the keypad/display is in program mode.
• Increase (or decrease) a numeric value (such as the reference
or a parameter value).
Holding down these keys will increase the scroll speed.
Use the ENTER key to:

ENTER • Display a parameter (or a selection) value in program mode
• Save a value
• Move through each monitor display item when in monitor mode
Use the FORWARD/REVERSE key to select the direction of motor

Forward rotation when the control source is local (REMOTE LED is off).
Reverse This key is ignored if the control source is not local (REMOTE LED
is on). See the FORWARD and REVERSE LED descriptions for
more information.
Refer to the P.027 (Forward/Reverse Configuration) parameter

description.
Use the PROGRAM key to move between program and monitor

modes. The PROGRAM LED turns on when the keypad/display is
PROGRAM
in program mode and turns off when the keypad/display is in
monitor mode.
Use the RUN/JOG key to toggle between run and jog when in local
RUN control (REMOTE LED is off). When run is selected, pressing the
JOG START key results in continuous drive operation. When jog is
selected, pressing the START key results in drive operation only
until the START key is released.
This key is ignored if the control source is not local (REMOTE LED
is on). See the RUN and JOG LED descriptions for more information.
Use the START key to apply power to the motor in local control
(REMOTE LED is off). See the RUNNING LED description for
START
more information.
If the drive is running (RUNNING LED is on), the STOP/RESET

STOP key stops the drive. If the drive is not running (RUNNING LED is
RESET off), pressing this key resets drive faults. Refer also the STOP/
RESET Disable Parameter (P.055).
Important: The STOP/RESET key can be disabled by P.055. See the P.055
parameter description for more information.
3.6 Drive Status LEDs
The keypad contains eight LEDs that show the present drive status. Table 3.2
describes what each drive status LED means.
Table 3.2 – Drive Status LEDs
LED Status Meaning

RUNNING On Output power is being applied to the motor.
Off Output power is not being applied to the motor.
REMOTE On The drive is being controlled (START, RUN/JOG,
FORWARD/REVERSE, speed reference) from a source other
than the keypad.
Off The drive is being controlled from the keypad.
Flashing The network connection is lost.
JOG On Jog is selected.
Off Run is selected.
AUTO On The drive is receiving its speed reference from the terminal
strip input or network option.
Off The drive is receiving its speed reference from the local
keypad or serial port (OIM or CS3000), i.e., using a manual
reference.
FORWARD1 Flashing The requested motor direction is forward; the actual motor
direction is reverse (REVERSE LED is on).
On The motor is running in the forward direction.
Off The motor direction is not forward.
1
REVERSE Flashing The requested motor direction is reverse; the actual motor
direction is forward (FORWARD LED is on).
On The motor is running in the reverse direction.
Off The motor direction is not reverse.
PROGRAM On The keypad/display is in program mode.
Off The keypad/display is in monitor mode.
On Parameters cannot be modified from the keypad without
entering the correct password into P.051 (Programming
Disable). See section 4.4, Ensuring Program Security, for
more information.
Note that disabling program changes by means of P.051 does
not prevent parameter changes being made from the serial
port or the network.
Off Parameters can be modified from the keypad.
1 If the speed reference is zero (0), pressing the FORWARD/REVERSE key (or toggling the FWD/REV
input) will not alter the state of the FORWARD or REVERSE LEDS.

3.7 Monitor Mode LEDs
Table 3.3 describes the values that will be displayed when the corresponding
monitor mode LED is on.
Table 3.3 - Monitor Mode LEDs
Monitor Mode LED Corresponding Display When LED is ON (Actual Values)
SPEED Motor speed is displayed. This value is scaled in parameter
P.028.
VOLTS Drive output volts are displayed. This value is not DC bus volts.
AMPS Drive output amps are displayed.
HZ Drive output frequency in hertz is displayed.
KW Output power of the drive in kilowatts is displayed. Note that this
is intended for display purposes as a general indication of
kilowatt output and should not be used for control or exact
metering purposes.
TORQUE Motor output torque is displayed in percent. (Valid only for
vector regulation).
ALL LEDs Selected speed reference (in P.028 units) or torque reference (in
%) is displayed.
CHAPTER 4
Programming Reference
To program the drive for a specific application, you display the appropriate parameter
and adjust it as required. The parameters are used to define characteristics of the
drive. This chapter provides an overview of the parameter menus as well as
detailed descriptions of each parameter. This chapter also describes how to
access, display, and modify parameters.
4.1 Parameter Menus

To simplify the configuration process, the GV3000/SE drive software parameter list
is divided into two menus: the First Menu and the Second Menu. These are shown
in figure 4.1 and described below.
The First Menu contains General parameters (P.000 through P.006) which are
commonly used for simple applications.
The Second Menu contains parameters that allow drive adjustment for more
complex applications. These functions can be safety related and should be used
only with a thorough understanding of how they may affect motor operation.
Within the Second Menu are:
• General parameters (P.007 through P.099). These parameters apply to both

vector and V/Hz applications.
• Volts/Hertz parameters (H.000 through H.022). These parameters are used
only for V/Hz applications and are displayed if U-H is selected in parameter
P.048 (Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation).
• Vector parameters (U.000 through U.048). These parameters are used only for
vector applications and are displayed if UEC is selected in parameter P.048.
Unless specified, all vector parameters are used for both flux vector control
(FVC) and sensorless vector control (SVC) operation.
• RMI parameters (r.001 through r.066). These parameters are displayed only if
an optional Remote Meter Interface board (M/N 2SI3000) is installed in the
drive.
• The error log. The error log is shown as Err on the display. For more information
on accessing the error log or clearing errors, refer to chapter 5 of this manual.
Access to the Second Menu parameters is enabled/disabled using the Second

Menu Password parameter (P.006). Refer to section 4.6.1 for more information.
ATTENTION: It is the user's responsibility to determine how to distribute

the Second Menu password. Reliance Electric is not responsible for
! unauthorized access violations within the user's organization. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
Programming Reference 4-1

First Menu
General Parameters
P.000 - P.006
Enter password into P.006
Second Manu
General Parameters
P.007 - P.099
P.048 = U-H (default) P.048 = UEC
Volts/Hertz Vector
Parameters Parameters
H.000 - H.022 U.000 - U.048
If optional RMI board is installed
RMI
Parameters
r.001 - r.066
Error Log
Password must be entered

into P.006 to access these
parameters.
Figure 4.1 – Parameter Menu Structure
4.2 Parameter Types

There are three types of parameters:
Configurable: These parameters can be adjusted or changed only while the drive
is stopped.
Tunable: These parameters can be adjusted or changed while the drive is running
or stopped.
Read only: These parameters cannot be adjusted.
Each parameter is described in detail in this chapter. The following information is

provided for each parameter:
Parameter Number: the unique number assigned to a specific parameter. The

number is preceded by either P, H, U, or r to identify it as a General, Volts/Hertz,
Vector, or optional RMI parameter, respectively. The parameter number is
displayed on the drive's keypad/display.

Parameter Name: the name assigned to a parameter number. The parameter
name is not displayed when programming the drive using the keypad/display.
The parameter name is only visible when using the CS3000 software or Operator
Interface Module (OIM).
Parameter Description: a description of the parameter's function.
Parameter Range: the predefined parameter value limits or selections.
Default Setting: the factory default setting for USA is mentioned. Refer to
APPENDIX D for Europe and Japan.
Parameter Type: identifies whether the parameter is tunable, configurable, or

read only.
Refer also to parameters: a list of associated parameters that may provide

additional or related information.
4.3 Displaying or Changing Parameter Values

Use the following procedure to display or change parameter values:
Step 1. Press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns on to enter
program mode.
AUTO Forward
One of the main parameter menus (P.---,
VOLTS REMOTE H.---, U.---, Err, etc.) will be displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 2. Use the key or the key to move through the menus.
AUTO Forward
Note that if P.--- and Err are the only two
SPEED RUNNING
VOLTS REMOTE
MAN Reverse
menu selections displayed, access to the
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz
Kw
AUTO
FORWARD
PROGRAM
JOG Second Menu parameters has been
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
restricted. A password must be entered into
STOP
START
parameter P.006 in order to access the
RESET
Second Menu parameters. Refer to section
4.6 for this procedure.

Step 3. Once the desired menu is displayed, press the ENTER key to select it.
The first parameter number in the menu or

AUTO Forward
the last parameter number previously
SPEED
VOLTS
RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse
accessed from that menu will be displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 4. Press the key or the key to move through the parameters.
Each parameter number will be displayed as

SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse
you move through the parameters.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 5. Once the desired parameter is displayed, press the ENTER key to access
it.
The parameter value will be displayed.

AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6. Press the key or the key to change the value.
Note that if programming is disabled in

SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse
parameter P.051 (Programming Disable), or
VOLTS
AMPS
REMOTE
JOG
PROGRAM
RUN if the parameter is configurable and the drive
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD is running, the value will not change.
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 7. Press the ENTER key to save the changed value.
- OR -
Press the PROGRAM key to exit the parameter without changing the
value.
The parameter number will be displayed

AUTO Forward
again.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
Hz
Kw
AUTO
FORWARD
PROGRAM
JOG Important: The value will not be written into
TORQUE
Password
REVERSE
PROGRAM ENTER
memory unless the ENTER key
STOP
START
is pressed.
RESET
To display or change additional parameters within this menu, repeat step 4

through 7.
To display or change parameters in a different menu, press the PROGRAM key

to return to the main menu selections. Then repeat step 2 through 7.
To exit program mode, press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns off.
Note that parameter values and the local keypad status are retained through a line
dip or power shutdown.
4.4 Ensuring Program Security

Parameter values can be password-protected using parameter P.051 (Programming
Disable). When programming is disabled, parameter values can be displayed but
cannot be modified from the keypad unless the correct password is entered in
P.051. Note that disabling program changes by means of P.051 will not prevent
parameter changes being made from the serial port on the network.

the password. Reliance Electric is not responsible for unauthorized
! access violations within the user's organization. Failure to observe this
Use the following procedure to disable/enable parameter programming. (See

section 4.3, Displaying or Changing Parameter Values, if you are unfamiliar with
modifying parameters using the keypad/display.)
Step 1. Select parameter P.051 from the Second Menu General parameters.
P.051 will appear on the display.
Step 2. Press the ENTER key to access the parameter. A zero will be displayed.
Step 3. Use the key to increment the value to 26. This is the password number.
Step 4. Press the ENTER key to save the value. P.051 will be displayed.
Parameter programming is disabled when the PASSWORD LED is on and enabled
when the PASSWORD LED is off.

To prevent unauthorized password use, a zero value (not the saved password
value) is displayed whenever this parameter is accessed.
Note that parameter values and the local keypad status are retained through a line
dip or power shutdown.
4.5 First Menu Parameters

The First Menu contains General parameters that are most commonly used for
simple applications. No password is required to access them. These parameters
apply to both vector and V/Hz programming and are described in detail in section
4.5.1.
4.5.1 First Menu General Parameter Descriptions (P.000 to P.006)
P.000 Control Source

This parameter Parameter Range: LOCL = Local keypad/display
selects the drive rE = Terminal strip remote inputs
control source. OP = Option port*
SErL = Serial port (CS3000 or OIM)**
The drive will
respond to the Default Setting: LOCL
reference, forward/ Parameter Type: Configurable
reverse, run/jog, and
start commands Refer also to parameters: P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure
(inputs) only from the P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
source selected in P.063 Option Port: Network Reference Source
this parameter.
* OP selection is not available if a network option board is not installed.
** For more information about the Control and Configuration Software (CS3000), refer to instruction manual
D2-3348. For more information about the GV3000/SE OIM (Operator Interface Module, M/N 2RK3000), refer to
instruction manual D2-3342.
ATTENTION: In V/Hz regulation, if P.000 (Control Source) is set to

OP (Option Port), and P.062 is set to 1 (Hold Last Reference), and the
! drive loses communication with the network, the drive will maintain the
last frequency command sent to it. Ensure that driven machinery, all
drive-train mechanisms, and application material are capable of safe
operation at the maximum operating speed of the drive. Failure to
The selected drive control source is determined primarily by the value in P.000.
However, if P.000 = rE, then the REM/LOC input may toggle the control source
between the local keypad and the terminal strip. See P.007 (Terminal Strip Digital
Inputs Configure).
Depending on the control source selected, the AUTO/MAN key can be used to
switch between speed reference sources as shown in table 4.1.

P.000 Control Source (continued)
Table 4.1 – Speed Reference Source Based on P.000 and AUTO/MAN Key Status
Control Source (P.000) AUTO/MAN Status Speed Reference Source

Local keypad/display AUTO selected Terminal strip
(P.000 = LOCL)
MAN selected Local keypad/display or OIM
Terminal strip remote inputs AUTO selected Terminal strip
(P.000 = rE)
Option port (P.000 = OP) AUTO selected Network
Serial port (P.000 = SErL) AUTO selected Terminal strip
Refer to chapter 3 and the description of parameter P.052 (AUTO/MAN Key

Disable) in chapter 4 for more information on the AUTO/MAN key.
Set P.000 = OP to select the DeviceNetTM Network option board, the AutoMaxTM
Network option board, the PROFIBUSTM, or the ControlNetTM Network option board
as the drive control source.
Note that the REMOTE LED will turn on if any control source other than the local
keypad is selected.
P.001 Accel Time 1 (RAMP 1)

For V/Hz regulation, Parameter Range: 1.0 to 999.9 seconds (V/Hz)
this parameter 0.1 to 999.9 seconds (vector)
specifies the amount
Default Setting: 20.0
of time in which the
motor ramps from Parameter Type: Tunable
zero speed to
Refer also to parameters: P.004 Maximum Speed
Maximum Speed
P.005 Current Limit
(P.004).
U.017 Motor Top Speed
For vector regulation,
this parameter
motor ramps from
zero speed to Motor
Top Speed (U.017).
The time the motor takes to make any speed increase is directly proportional to the
value in this parameter. This parameter does not apply if JOG is selected. See
P.021 (Jog Ramp Accel Time).
If the motor load inertia is high, or the Current Limit (P.005) setting is too low, actual
motor acceleration time will be longer than the time set in P.001. If Accel Time 1 is
set too short, an overcurrent fault may occur.

P.002 Decel Time 1 (RAMP 1)
motor ramps from Parameter Type: Tunable
Maximum Speed
(P.004) to zero
P.005 Current Limit
speed.
For vector regulation, U.024 High DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable
this parameter
motor ramps from
Motor Top Speed
(U.017) to zero
speed.
The time the motor takes to make any speed decrease (except a coast-to-rest stop)
is directly proportional to the value in this parameter. This parameter does not apply
if JOG is selected. See P.022 (Jog Ramp Decel Time).
Note that motor load inertia and input line conditions can extend the deceleration
time to a value greater than the preset time. With very fast deceleration times,
regenerative motor voltage may charge up the DC bus voltage, causing a high bus
voltage (HU) fault. To avoid a fault condition, extend the deceleration time for a
longer period. If a deceleration time faster than the acceptable range is required,
installing an optional Snubber Resistor Kit or Regenerative Braking Module Kit may
prevent the fault.
For V/Hz regulation with dynamic braking (snubber resistor) disabled (H.017 = 0, 2,
or 4), the deceleration time may be extended to prevent a high bus voltage (HU)
fault from occurring.

P.003 Minimum Speed
This parameter limits Parameter Range: 0.5 to P.004 Maximum Speed (V/Hz)
the speed reference 0 to P.004 Maximum Speed (vector)
to the drive.
Default Setting: 5.0 Hz (V/Hz)
Regardless of what
150 RPM (vector)
speed reference is
supplied, the Parameter Type: Tunable
regulator will not
command a speed
less than the value in
P.003.
ATTENTION: The drive can operate at and maintain zero speed.

The user is responsible for ensuring safe conditions for operating
! personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual alarms, or
other devices to indicate that the drive is operating or may operate at
or near zero speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
Note that in V/Hz regulation, the drive may decrease the output frequency below
P.003 (but not below 0.5 Hz) to avoid an overcurrent fault.
P.004 Maximum Speed

This parameter limits Parameter Range: 15.0 to H.022 Overfrequency Limit (V/Hz)
the speed reference 10 RPM to U.017 Motor Top Speed (vector)
to the drive.
Regardless of what
1722 RPM (vector)
speed reference is
supplied, the Parameter Type: Tunable
regulatot will not
Refer also to parameters: P.028 Speed Display Scaling
command a speed
H.022 Overfrequency Limit
greater than the
value in P.004.
ATTENTION: The user is responsible for ensuring that driven machinery,

all drive-train mechanisms, and application material are capable of
! safe operation at the maximum operating speed of the drive.
Overspeed detection in the drive determines when the drive shuts
down. For vector regulation, this is factory-set to 130% of maximum
speed. For volts/hertz regulation, this is fixed at the frequency level
set in parameter H.022 (Overfrequency Limit). Failure to observe this
For V/Hz regulation, this parameter specifies the maximum allowed speed in hertz.
The drive is equipped with configurable overspeed protection at the frequency level
set in H.022 (Overfrequency Limit).
For vector regulation, this parameter specifies the maximum allowed speed in RPM.
This drive is equipped with fixed overspeed protection at 130% of Maximum Speed.

P.005 Current Limit
This parameter Parameter Range: 50 to 110% (V/Hz)
provides the means U.006 to 150% (vector)
to limit motor stator
Default Setting: 100% (V/Hz)
current while running
150% (vector)
at constant speed or
during acceleration. Parameter Type: Tunable
Refer also to parameters: P.095 Power Module Output Amps
H.002 Motor Nameplate Amps
U.004 Motor Nameplate Amps
U.006 Magnetizing Current Percent
For V/Hz regulation: Current limit is set as a percentage of the Power Module
rated amps with a maximum value of 110%. 110% current limit equals the current
value in parameter P.095 (Power Module Output Amps).
When the output current attempts to exceed the preset current limit, the output
voltage and frequency will be lowered as the GV3000/SE drive reduces output
current.
For vector regulation: Current limit is a percentage of the value entered in U.004.
The output current will be limited to the current limit value, which may result in motor
speed decreasing or the acceleration/deceleration time being extended.
P.006 Second Menu Password

This parameter is Parameter Range: 0 to 9999; 107 = password
used to
Default Setting: N/A
enable/disable
access to Second Parameter Type: Tunable
Menu General (P),
Refer also to parameters: N/A
Vector (U),
Volts/Hertz (H), and
RMI (r) parameters.
Refer to section 4.6.1
of this manual for
more information
about this password.

the second menu password. Reliance Electric is not responsible for
Note that if the password is entered to enable access to the Second Menu
parameters, the password must then be re-entered to disable access.

4.6 Second Menu Parameters
The Second Menu contains parameters used for more complex applications. Within
the Second Menu are General (P.---) parameters that apply to both vector and V/Hz
programming, and Vector (U.---) or Volts/Hertz (H.---) parameters. If an optional
RMI board is installed in the drive, RMI (r.---) parameters are also contained in the
Second Menu.
For a detailed description of: Refer to:

Second Menu General parameters Section 4.6.2
Second Menu Vector parameters Section 4.6.3
Second Menu Volts/Hertz parameters Section 4.6.4
Second Menu RMI parameters RMI instruction manual D2-3341
Access to the Second Menu parameters is enabled/disabled using the Second

Menu Password parameter (P.006). Refer to section 4.6.1 for more information.
4.6.1 Entering the Second Menu Password

the second menu password. Reliance Electric is not responsible for
The Second Menu Password parameter (P.006) is used to enable/disable access to

the Second Menu parameters. When access is disabled, the Second Menu
parameters cannot be displayed or changed (refer to figure 4.1). To enable access,
a factory-set password is entered into P.006. Access to the Second Menu
parameters will then remain enabled until the password is entered into P.006 again.
Step 1. Press the PROGRAM key until the PROGRAM LED turns on to enter
program mode.
If P.--- is not displayed, press the key or

AUTO Forward the key until it is.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 2. Press the ENTER key.
The first parameter number in the First Menu

General parameters (P.000) or the last
AUTO Forward
parameter number accessed will be
VOLTS REMOTE displayed.
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 3. Press the key to increment the parameter numbers until P.006 is
displayed.
Important: If you are able to display

parameter P.007, access to the
AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse Second Menu is enabled.
VOLTS
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
Continue with this procedure
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
only if you wish to disable
PROGRAM ENTER
Password
access to the Second Menu.
STOP
RESET START
Step 4. Press the ENTER key to access the parameter.
Zero will be displayed.
To prevent unauthorized password use, a

AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING
REMOTE
MAN Reverse zero value (not the saved password number)
VOLTS
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
is displayed whenever this parameter is
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
accessed.
STOP
RESET START
Step 5. Press the key to increment the value until 107 is displayed. This is
the password. (Holding down the key will increase the scroll speed.)
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

Step 6. Press the ENTER key to select the password.
P.006 is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7. Press the key to verify the access status.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Access Disabled
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Access Enabled

4.6.2 Second Menu General Parameter Descriptions (P.007 to P.099)
P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure

The GV3000/SE drive Parameter Range: Preset Configurations of Inputs 6, 7, and 8
provides multiple Digital Input 6 Digital Input 7 Digital Input 8
configurations of (Terminal 19) (Terminal 18) (Terminal 17)
digital inputs 6, 7, 0 = FWD/REV RAMP 1/2 REM/LOC
and 8 on the terminal 1 = Not used FWD/REV RAMP 1/2
strip. This parameter 2 = Not used FWD/REV REM/LOC
determines how 3 = Not used RAMP 1/2 REM/LOC
these inputs are 4 = Not used Not used FWD/REV
used. 5 = Not used Not used RAMP 1/2
6 = Not used Not used REM/LOC
The P.008 (Terminal 7 = Not used Not used Not used
Strip Speed 8* = FWD/REV TRQ/SPD REM/LOC
Reference Source) 9* = Not used TRQ/SPD REM/LOC
selection will limit the 10* = Not used TRQ/SPD FWD/REV
selection of P.007 11* = Not used TRQ/SPD RAMP 1/2
because the P.008 12* = Not used Not used TRQ/SPD
selection may use
one or more of digital Default Setting: 0
inputs 6 through 8. Parameter Type: Configurable
Refer also to parameters: P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
*Vector regulation only.
ATTENTION: If a maintained start contact is used when the control

source = rE, switching from local to remote from the terminal strip will
! cause power to be applied to the motor if the remote start contact is
closed. Stay clear of rotating machinery in this case. Failure to
An unasserted (open) or asserted (closed) input will select the input functions as
shown in table 4.2. If a function is not configured, the unasserted (open) state will
be applied.
Table 4.2 – Function Selection for Digital Inputs 6, 7, and 8
Input Open (Unasserted) Closed (Asserted)

FWD/REV Forward Reverse
RAMP 1/2 Ramp 1 Ramp 2
REM/LOC Remote Local
TRQ/SPD Torque Speed

P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure (continued)
FWD/REV
FWD/REV allows you to select between forward or reverse operation. If the input is
closed, this function will invert the selected speed reference. For example, if the
selected speed reference value is negative (<0) and the FWD/REV input is closed,
the resulting speed reference will be positive.
The digital input for FWD/REV is active only if the control source is remote.
RAMP 1/2
RAMP 1/2 allows you to select one of two paired acceleration/deceleration rates.
RAMP 1 uses acceleration or deceleration rates based on P.001/P.002
(Accel Time 1/Decel Time 1). RAMP 2 uses acceleration or deceleration rates
based on P.017/P.018 (Accel Time 2/Decel Time 2).
The digital input for RAMP 1/2 is always active regardless of the control source.
REM/LOC
REM/LOC allows you to switch from terminal strip control to local keypad control.
The drive must be stopped in order to do this. (Note that if an OIM is connected,
REM/LOC will switch control from the terminal strip to the OIM, not to the local
keypad.)
The digital input for REM/LOC is active only if the control source is remote.
The following example shows how this input can be used.
REM/LOC Input Example
Assume the drive is stopped and started using an external two-wire control signal.
The drive's control source is the terminal strip (P.000 = rE), and a START command is
given. The REM/LOC option (P.007 = 2) is selected so that an external REM/LOC
switch switches the drive from REMOTE to LOCAL or from LOCAL to REMOTE.
The external switch is in the REMOTE position.
The following happens:
1. The STOP/RESET key is pressed, and the motor stops.

2. LOCAL is selected using the externally-wired REM/LOC switch.
3. Control of the drive is done locally through the keypad (or through the OIM, if
connected). (This could be for troubleshooting purposes, or for
viewing/adjusting parameter values).
4. The REM/LOC switch is switched back to the REMOTE position. The drive
runs immediately because there is already an asserted remote START signal.
5. The drive is now being controlled by the remote control source.

P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure (continued)
TRQ/SPD
TRQ/SPD allows you to switch between torque regulation and speed regulation
while the drive is running or stopped. This feature only applies when the drive has
been configured as a vector regulator (P.048 = UEC), and U.000 (Torque Reference
Source) > 0.
To provide smooth transitioning when switching from torque to speed, the speed
regulator is preset with the last torque reference. When switching from speed to
torque, the torque regulator will switch to the new torque reference.
The digital input for TRQ/SPD is active if the control source is local, remote, or serial.
Interaction with P.008
The default value of 0 for P.007 will limit P.008 (Terminal Strip Speed Reference
Source) to a selection of 0. You must change P.007 to some value other than 0 in
order to change P.008 to some value other than 0. See table 4.3 and the selection
example in the P.008 parameter description.
Refer to the GV3000/SE hardware reference manual for terminal strip wiring.

P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Analog reference. (Digital inputs 6, 7, and 8 are
selects the source of not used. See P.007.)
the terminal strip 1 = MOP selection. (Uses terminal strip digital input
speed reference. 6 for the MOP increment and digital input 7 for
the MOP decrement function. Digital input 8 is
The terminal strip not used.)
speed reference is 2 = Two (2) preset speeds. (Uses terminal strip
used when: digital input 6. Digital inputs 7 and 8 are not
used.)
• the terminal strip
3 = Four (4) preset speeds. (Uses terminal strip
is the selected
digital inputs 6 and 7. Digital input 8 is not used.)
control source
4 = Eight (8) preset speeds. (Uses all terminal strip
(P.000 = rE)
digital inputs.)
or 5 = Analog reference and one (1) preset speed.
(Uses terminal strip digital input 6. Digital inputs
• the local keypad 7 and 8 are not used.)
or serial port is 6 = Analog reference and three (3) preset speeds.
the selected (Uses terminal strip digital inputs 6 and 7. Digital
control source input 8 is not used.)
(P.000 = LOCL 7 = Analog reference and seven (7) preset speeds.
or SErL) and (Uses terminal strip digital inputs 6, 7 and 8.)
AUTO is
selected (AUTO Default Setting: 0
LED is on). Parameter Type: Configurable
Refer also to parameters: P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure
P.031 Preset Speed 1
r.030 Digital Input Configuration
In selections 5, 6, and 7, a digital input will initiate the selected preset speed which
will override the analog speed reference. Refer to table 4.4 in the P.031 parameter
description.
The selection is dependent upon what is selected for parameter P.007 (Terminal
Strip Digital Inputs Configure). The selection made in P.007 determines what the
remaining free digital inputs are used for. See table 4.3 for acceptable
combinations.

P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source (continued)
Table 4.3 – Acceptable P.007 and P.008 Selection Combinations
P.007 P.008 Selections
Selections 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
= Selection combination is acceptable.
P.007/P.008 Selection Example

If you want to select the MOP as the speed reference source, P.008 must be set to 1.
Next, select the value for P.007 using table 4.3. Following the 1 column down
under P.008 Selections, the acceptable selections for P.007 are 4, 5, 6, 7, or 12.
If an optional RMI board is installed in the drive, refer to Appendix E for more
information regarding digital input configuration.
P.009 Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset

This parameter Parameter Range: -900 to +900*
allows for correcting
Default Setting: 0
any offset in the
terminal strip analog Parameter Type: Tunable
input prior to the
Refer also to parameters: P.000 Control Source
signal reaching the
drive.
This parameter is not

used if the terminal
strip analog input is
used as vector
torque reference
(U.000 = 1).
*For 0 to 10 V (or -10 V to +10 V input), a value of +1 equals an offset of approximately 10 mV.
For 0 to 20 mA input, a value of +1 equals an offset of approximately 20 µA.
For more information about the analog input, refer to Appendix F.

P.010 Terminal Strip Analog Input Gain
This parameter is Parameter Range: 0.100 to 5.000
used to compensate
for component
tolerance errors or Parameter Type: Tunable
insufficient voltage
from the input
reference source at
the terminal strip.
This parameter is not

used if the terminal
strip analog input is
used as vector
torque reference
(U.000 = 1).
For more information about the analog input, refer to Appendix F.
P.011 Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 =
+/- 10 VDC
selects the type of 1 =
+/- 10 VDC inverted
Jumper J4 on pins
analog input signal 2 =
0 to 10 VDC
2 and 3
being used and 3 =
0 to 10 VDC inverted
whether to invert it 4 =
4 to 20 mA. Generate fault on signal loss.
(negate it) after it has 5 =
4 to 20 mA inverted. Generate fault on signal
been converted from loss.
analog to digital by 6 = 0 to 20 mA
the drive. 7 = 0 to 20 mA inverted
Jumper J4 on pins
8 = 4 to 20 mA. Display alarm and use previous
1 and 2
If the terminal strip reference on signal loss.
analog input is used 9 = 4 to 20 mA inverted. Display alarm and use
as vector torque previous reference on signal loss.
reference 10= 4 to 20 mA. Display alarm and use Preset
(U.000 = 1), this Speed 1 (P.031) as reference on signal loss.
parameter is used 11= 4 to 20 mA inverted. Display alarm and use
only to enable the Preset Speed 1 (P.031) as reference on signal
analog input signal loss.
loss detection 12= 0 to 10 VDC. Start and stop the drive based on
feature. Jumper J4 on pins analog input value. (P.000 must be set to rE.)
2 and 3 See section G.4 if you select this option.
Default Setting: 2
Parameter Type: Configurable
Refer also to parameters: P.009 Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset
Important: Verify that the hardware (jumper J4) and software configurations match
each other and the external signal.

P.011 Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure (continued)
ATTENTION: The drive may inadvertently start due to the effects of

temperature or electrical noise on the analog input when the analog
! input is configured to start and stop the drive (P.011 = 12), and the
following conditions are true:
• P.000 = rE
• The function loss, stop, and start inputs on the terminal strip are all
closed.
The user is responsible for:
• providing suitable notification to operating personnel that this feature
is being used and the drive could start at any time.
• ensuring that the inadvertent starting of the driven equipment will
equipment.
• ensuring that the input wiring has been installed according to IEEE
Standard 518 to minimize electrical noise.
loss of life.
ATTENTION: Due to the effect of temperature on the analog input, the
possibility exists that stop threshold cannot be reached. The
application must rely on the terminal strip stop and function loss inputs
as the alternate methods of stopping the drive. Failure to observe this
If P.011 = 2 or 12, the input + offset (P.009) will be low limited at 0 and then
multiplied by P.010.
If P.011 = 3, the input + offset (P.009) will be low limited at 0, multiplied by P.010,
and then negated.
If P.011 = 4, 8, or 10, the input will be offset by -4 mA + offset parameter (P.009),
low limited at 0, and then multiplied by P.010.
If P.011 = 5, 9, or 11, the input will be offset by -4 mA + offset parameter (P.009),
low limited at 0, multiplied by P.010, and then negated.
If P.011 = 6, the input + offset (P.009) will be low limited at 0 and multiplied by P.010.
If P.011 = 7, the input + offset (P.009) will be low limited at 0, multiplied by P.010,
and then negated.
For the 4 to 20 mA input selections, the drive can be configured to generate a fault
(selections 4 and 5) or an alarm (selections 8 through 11) if the input falls below 2
mA. If P.011 = 8 or 9, the drive continues to run using the value of the analog input
4 to 5 seconds prior to the loss detection. If P.011 = 10 or 11, the drive continues to
run using Preset Speed 1 (P.031) as the analog input value. In both cases, once
the input returns (>= 4 mA), the alarm clears, and the drive uses the converted
input.
For more information about the analog input, refer to Appendix F. For more
information about alarms and faults, refer to chapter 5.

P.012 Terminal Strip Analog Output Source
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Speed (bipolar)

selects the source of
1 = Torque (bipolar)
the analog output
signal. 2 = Speed (unipolar)
3 = Current (unipolar) (V/Hz)
Torque (unipolar) (vector)
Default Setting: 0
Parameter Type: Tunable
Selections 2 and 3 select the same signals as selections 0 and 1, but instead of
providing a 5V (1/2 scale) offset to allow for a bipolar signal, no 5V offset is used.
Instead, the signal is presented in a unipolar manner. The absolute value of the
selected signal is used to drive the analog output over its full range of 0 to 10 VDC.
This provides greater resolution of the selected signal at the expense of indicating
polarity. Refer to figure 4.2.
Note that in V/Hz control, signals are updated every 500 ms. In Vector control, all
signals are updated every 5.0 ms.
10V 20 mA
0V 4 mA
0
V/Hz – Max Speed +Max Speed (P.004)
P.012 = 0
Vector – Top Speed +Top Speed (U.017)
P.012 = 1 V/Hz –200% Torque +200% Torque

Vector –300% Torque +300% Torque
10V 20 mA
0V 4 mA
0
V/Hz – Max Speed +Max Speed (P.004)
P.012 = 2
Vector – Top Speed +Top Speed (U.017)
V/Hz –200% Max Current (2 x P.095) +200% Max Currenr (2 x P.095)

P.012 = 3
Vector –300% Torque +300% Torque
Figure 4.2 – Analog Output Selection and Scaling

P.013 Output Relay Configuration
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Output relay is energized when one or more
specifies the type of faults (IET) are active.
status indication 1 = Output relay is energized to show state of drive
provided by the running with 0.5 second delay added between a
output relay contacts start assertion and generation of motor voltage.
(terminal 28, 29, 30, 2 = Output relay is energized to show state of drive
and 31 on the drive's running but without 0.5 second start delay.
terminal strip). 3 = Output relay is energized when network
communication is active.
4 = Output relay is energized when all start
permissive conditions are met.
5 = Output relay is energized when one or more
alarms are active.
6 = Output relay is energed when no faults are
active.
Default Setting: 0
For example, for an application using an output contactor, you can obtain a 0.5
second delay between a start assertion and the generation of motor voltage by
setting P.013 to 1. The delay will provide time for the contactor to close before
motor voltage is generated.

P.014 Trim Reference Source
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 =
No trim reference used
specifies the source 1 =
Terminal strip analog input
for the trim
2 =
Option port trim reference register
reference. Trim
reference is added to 3 =
Maximum speed
the speed reference. 4 =
Torque current feedback (vector only)
5 =
RMI board analog input
Refer to figure 4.3.
6 =
RMI board frequency input
7 =
Switched RMI board analog input or frequency
input
8 = RMI outer loop PI block (Mode 1)
9 = RMI outer loop PI block (Mode 2)
Default Setting: 0
Refer also to parameters: P.015 Trim Gain Percentage
Selections 5 through 9 are available only if an optional RMI board is installed in the
drive. Refer to instruction manual D2-3341 for more information about the RMI
board.
P.000
Selected
Speed
Ref Speed Torque
Control Controller
Loop
P.014 x P.015
100
None 0
Terminal Strip
Analog Input 1
Option Port 2
Max Speed 3 Selected
4 Trim Ref
5
6
RMI 7
8
9
Torque Feedback
Figure 4.3 – Trim Reference Source Selection

P.015 Trim Gain Percentage
This parameter Parameter Range: -100.0 to +100.0% (1.0 = 1%)
specifies a
percentage of the
selected trim Parameter Type: Tunable
reference entering
Refer also to parameters: P.014 Trim Reference Source
the speed regulator.
See figure 4.4.
Draw Gain
Mul Div
P.016 100 +
Draw +
Selected To Speed Ref
Speed Ref Limit Block
+
Selected Trim Gain

Trim Ref
P.014 Mul Div
P.015 100
Trim
Figure 4.4 – Draw and Trim Gain
See Appendix G for the complete block diagram.
P.016 Draw Gain Percentage

This parameter is Parameter Range: -100.0 to +100.0% (1.0 = 1%)
used to increase or
decrease the
selected speed Parameter Type: Tunable
reference to the
speed regulator.
This parameter allows multiple drive sections with a common line reference, but with
different values for draw gain, to run at different speeds depending on the percent
draw.
Note that P.016 affects the accel/decel times. As draw gain increases positive, the
accel/decel time decreases proportionately. As draw gain increases negative, the
accel/decel time increases proportionately. This is based on the following formula:
Modified Accel/Decel = Accel/Decel x [1/(1.00 + (Draw% /100))]

This parameter sets Parameter Range: 1.0 to 999.9 seconds (V/Hz)
the acceleration time 0.1 to 999.9 seconds (vector)
when a second ramp
selection is
configured as a Parameter Type: Tunable
digital input.
Refer also to parameters: P.001 Accel Time 1
When the RAMP 2 P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure
acceleration time
digital input is
asserted, the RAMP
2 deceleration time
also takes effect.
In V/Hz regulation, this parameter specifies the time in which the motor ramps from
zero speed to Maximum Speed (P.004).
In vector regulation, this parameter specifies the time in which the motor ramps from
zero speed to Motor Top Speed (U.017).
The time it takes the motor to make any speed increase is directly proportional to
the value in this parameter. This parameter does not apply if JOG is selected.

This parameter Parameter Range: 1.0 to 999.9 seconds (V/Hz)
specifies the 0.1 to 999.9 seconds (vector)
deceleration time
when a second ramp
selection is Parameter Type: Tunable
configured as a
Refer also to parameters: P.002 Decel Time 1
digital input.
When the RAMP 2
deceleration time
digital input is
asserted, the RAMP
2 acceleration time
also takes effect.
In V/Hz regulation, this parameter specifies the time in which motor speed ramps
from Maximum Speed (P.004) to zero speed.
In vector regulation, this parameter specifies the time in which motor speed ramps
from Motor Top Speed (U.017) to zero speed.
The time it takes the motor to make any speed decrease (except a coast-to-rest
stop) is directly proportional to the value in this parameter.
This parameter does not apply if JOG is selected.

P.019 S-Curve Enable
When S-Curve Parameter Range: OFF = Use linear accel/decel function
accel/decel is ON = Use S-Curve accel/decel function
selected, the accel or
decel ramp time Default Setting: ON (V/Hz)
begins and ends OFF (vector)
slowly, creating an Parameter Type: Configurable
S-Curve function.
Refer to figure 4.5. Refer also to parameters: P.001 Accel Time 1
P.002 Decel Time 1
For V/Hz regulation, P.017 Accel Time 2
this parameter is P.018 Decel Time 2
always set = ON.
Important: This parameter does not apply to the Jog Ramp Accel Time (P.021) or
Jog Ramp Decel Time (P.022) parameters.
The acceleration and deceleration times must be set the same for the S-Curve ramp
to function the same for acceleration as for deceleration. If the deceleration time is
set lower than the acceleration time, the deceleration time specified may not be met.
P.004 (V/Hz)
U.017 (Vector)
20% 20% t t
accel time decel time
S-Curve Acceleration S-Curve Deceleration
Figure 4.5 – S-Curves

P.020 Jog Speed Reference
This parameter is the Parameter Range: Minimum Speed (P.003) to Maximum Speed (P.004)
speed reference for
the drive when JOG
150 RPM (vector)
is selected.
Refer also to parameters: P.003 Minimum Speed
P.004 Maximum Speed
Jog reference is independent of any other speed reference. Unlike the run speed
reference, the jog speed reference cannot be adjusted using the or keys.
P.021 Jog Ramp Accel Time

of time it takes the
motor to ramp from Parameter Type: Tunable
zero speed to
Maximum Speed
(P.004) when JOG is
selected.

this parameter
motor to ramp from
zero speed to Motor
Top Speed (U.017)
when JOG is
selected.
The time the motor takes to make any speed increase is directly proportional to the
value in this parameter.

P.022 Jog Ramp Decel Time
motor to ramp from Parameter Type: Tunable
Maximum Speed
(P.004) to zero
P.025 Stop Type
speed when JOG is
selected.

this parameter
motor to ramp from
Motor Top Speed
(U.017) to zero
speed when JOG is
selected.
The time the motor takes to make any speed decrease (except a coast-to-rest stop)
is directly proportional to the value in this parameter.
P.023 MOP Accel/Decel Time

For V/Hz regulation, Parameter Range: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds
this parameter
of time it takes the Parameter Type: Tunable
MOP to ramp from
Maximum Speed
(P.004) to zero
speed and from zero
speed to Maximum
Speed (P.004).

this parameter
MOP to ramp from
Motor Top Speed
(U.017) to zero
speed and from zero
speed to Motor Top
Speed (U.017).
The MOP (Motor Operated Potentiometer) is a digital reference controlled by the
increment/decrement inputs.

P.024 MOP Reset Configuration
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Reset MOP reference after IET
determines when 1 = Reset MOP reference during each stop
and if the MOP 2 = Do not reset MOP reference
(Motor Operated
Default Setting: 0
Potentiometer)
reference is reset to Parameter Type: Tunable
Minimum Speed
(P.003).
Important: If the drive is powered down and powered back up, the MOP function
reference will always be reset to equal Minimum Speed (P.003).
The MOP provides a digital speed reference that can be increased and decreased
using terminal strip digital inputs.
When the MOP function is set and then disabled by using parameter P.008
(Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source), the last value in effect prior to the MOP
being disabled will be retained.
P.025 Stop Type

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Coast-to-rest stop
selects how the 1 = Ramp stop
motor will stop when
a stop command is Default Setting: 0
given. Parameter Type: Tunable
Refer also to parameters: P.002 Decel Time 1
P.018 Decel Time 2
U.000 Torque Reference Source
ATTENTION: The user must provide an external, hardwired

emergency stop circuit outside the drive circuitry. This circuit must
! disable the system in case of improper operation. Uncontrolled
machine operation may result in if this procedure is not followed.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
A function loss or a fault will always cause a coast-to-rest stop.
If the drive is configured as a torque regulator (U.000 > 0 and TRQ/SPD digital input
= TRQ), then the stop type will always be coast-to-rest regardless of the value in
parameter P.025.

P.025 Stop Type (continued)
If RUN is selected:
If P.025 = 0, pressing the STOP/RESET key or giving an external stop command

will cause the motor to coast to rest.
If P.025 = 1, pressing the STOP/RESET key or giving an external stop command

will cause the motor to ramp to rest within a time equal to or greater than the preset
deceleration time (P.002/P.018).
If JOG is selected:
When the START input from the selected control source is released (unasserted),
the motor will ramp down in speed regardless of the value in P.025.
Pressing the STOP/RESET key or giving an external stop command when JOG is
selected will stop the motor differently depending on whether the drive is configured
for V/Hz or vector regulation:
For V/Hz regulation, the motor will always perform a ramp stop regardless of the
value in P.025.
For vector regulation, the motor will stop based on the value of P.025:
• If P.025 = 0, pressing the STOP/RESET key or giving an external stop command

will cause the motor to coast to rest.
• If P.025 = 1, pressing the STOP/RESET key or giving an external stop command

will cause the motor to ramp to rest within a time equal to or greater than the
preset deceleration time (P.022).
P.026 Function Loss Response

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Generate a fault (IET), and coast to rest
specifies how the 1 = Coast to rest without a fault
drive will respond to
Default Setting: 0
an open circuit
between terminal Parameter Type: Tunable
strip inputs 16 and
Refer also to parameters: P.013 Output Relay Configuration
20.
If a function loss occurs, the motor will coast to rest. If P.026 = 0, a function loss
fault will be generated, and FL will be displayed.

P.027 Forward/Reverse Configuration
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Forward or reverse enabled from the selected
specifies how the control source.
motor responds to 1 = Reverse disabled from the selected control
forward or reverse source.
inputs from any
2 = The state of the forward/reverse input is latched
control source.
when the motor is started.
Default Setting: 0
When P.027 is set to 0, the forward/reverse input allows forward or reverse rotation
of the motor.
When P.027 is set to 1, reverse rotation of the motor is prohibited and the
forward/reverse selection from the front panel or serial port is set to forward. Note
that reverse rotation is prohibited regardless of the polarity of the speed reference
input.
When P.027 is set to 2, the state of the forward/reverse input is latched when the
motor is started (RUNNING LED is on). Direction changes requested from any
control source after the motor is started are ignored. Note, however, that this
selection will not inhibit a motor direction change due to a change in the polarity of
the speed reference input.
In V/Hz or SVC regulation, setting H.016 (Sync Mode Direction) or U.031 (SVC
Sync Direction) to any value but F or OFF may cause the motor to operate in the
reverse direction briefly regardless of the setting in P.027.
P.028 Speed Display Scaling

This parameter Parameter Range: 10 to 9999
defines the scaling
Default Setting: Synchronous speed based on H.001 (assuming a
value applied to the
4-pole motor) (V/Hz)
manual reference,
U.017 (Vector)
the selected speed
reference, and the Parameter Type: Tunable
output speed
Refer also to parameters: U.017 Motor Top Speed
displays.
H.001 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
For vector regulation, P.028 will correspond to U.017:
Actual Speed in RPM x P.028 = value displayed when SPEED monitor mode or
U.017 selected reference is selected.

P.028 Speed Display Scaling (continued)
For V/Hz regulation, P.028 will correspond to H.001:
Actual Speed in Hz x P.028

= value displayed when SPEED monitor mode or
H.001
selected reference is selected.
Note that the values entered for P.003 and P.004 are automatically converted to
P.028 units by the system. Therefore, the adjustment range for the manual
reference is limited as follows:
For vector regulation:

P.003 x P.028 P.004 x P.028
Minimum reference = Maximum reference =
U.017 U.017
For V/Hz regulation:
Minimum reference = P.003 x P.028 Maximum reference = P.004 x P.028

H.001 H.001
V/Hz Speed Display Scaling Example
Your application requires the display to be scaled to show the speed reference or
the output speed as 800 gallons/minute when operating at maximum speed.
H.001 (Motor Nameplate Base Frequency) = 60
Step 1. Set parameter P.028 = 800

Step 2. Enter SPEED monitor mode by pressing the PROGRAM key until the
PROGRAM LED turns off and the SPEED LED turns on.
Step 3. Start the drive (press the START key).
Step 4. When the drive is running at half of rated speed, the display shows that
speed is 400 (gallons/minute).
Using the equation for V/Hz regulation: 30 x 800

= 400
60
Important: This parameter does not change the speed. It changes only the scaling
value applied to the display.

P.029 Elapsed Time Meter
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 to 9999 days
displays the number
of days (24-hour
periods) that the Parameter Type: Read only
drive has been under
Refer also to parameters: P.030 Elapsed Time Meter Reset
power or the time
elapsed since the
Elapsed Time Meter
Reset (P.030)
parameter was last
reset.
P.030 Elapsed Time Meter Reset

This parameter sets Parameter Range: OFF = No action
parameter P.029
ON = Reset the Elapsed Time Meter (P.029) and
(Elapsed Time
the error log clock to zero (0).
Meter) and the error
log clock to zero. Default Setting: OFF
This parameter is set
to OFF after the
reset operation is Refer also to parameters: P.029 Elapsed Time Meter
carried out.
P.031 to P.038 Preset Speed 1 Through Preset Speed 8

This parameter Parameter Range: Minimum Speed (P.003) to Maximum Speed (P.004)
allows the setting of
up to eight different
150 RPM (vector)
preset speeds.
The presets are configured using parameters P.007 and P.008. P.008 must be set
to values of 2 through 7 for preset speeds. See table 4.4 and figure 4.6.

P.031 to P.038 Preset Speed 1 Through Preset Speed 8 (continued)
Each speed is selected using external switches connected to terminals 17, 18, and
19 on the Regulator board.
The presets may also be selected using the Remote Meter Interface (RMI) board. If
you have installed an optional RMI board in your drive, refer to Appendix E and the
RMI board instruction manual (D2-3341) for more information.
Table 4.4 – Preset Speed Digital Inputs
Digital Inputs (Terminals) Selected

8 (17) 7 (18) 6 (19) Speed Reference
0 (open) 0 (open) 0 (open) P.031 or analog input (see P.008,

selections 5, 6, and 7)
0 (open) 0 (open) 1 (closed) P.032
0 (open) 1 (closed) 0 (open) P.033
0 (open) 1 (closed) 1 (closed) P.034
1 (closed) 0 (open) 0 (open) P.035
1 (closed) 0 (open) 1 (closed) P.036
1 (closed) 1 (closed) 0 (open) P.037
1 (closed) 1 (closed) 1 (closed) P.038
The presets can also be selected as the OCL reference using P.064 (Option Port:
Network Trim Reference Source). See Appendix G for more information about the
OCL.

P.031 to P.038 Preset Speed 1 Through Preset Speed 8 (continued)
P.038
P.037
P.036
P.035
P.034
P.033
P.032
P.031
Preset 1
(or TS
Analog in)
Closed
Run and Start
Closed Closed Closed Closed
Digital In 6
(Term. 19) Closed Closed
Digital In 7
(Term. 18) Closed
Digital In 8
(Term. 17)
Figure 4.6 – Typical Preset Operation
P.039 Encoder Loss Enable

This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Disable encoder loss diagnostic
enables the encoder ON = Enable encoder loss diagnostic
loss detection
diagnostic. Default Setting: OFF
This diagnostic is
available for flux Refer also to parameters: N/A
vector control (FVC)
only.
The encoder loss detection diagnostic is functional only when the drive is operating
as a speed regulator (not as a torque regulator).
When the diagnostic is enabled and feedback from the encoder is not detected, a
drive fault will be logged (EL will be displayed).
If the encoder fails, loss will be detected down to 1 RPM. If only one of the
quadrature feedback wires is disconnected, loss may not be detected below 15
RPM.

P.040 Motor Overload Enable
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Disable electronic motor thermal overload
enables the function
electronic motor ON = Enable motor thermal overload function
thermal overload
function. This Default Setting: ON
function operates Parameter Type: Configurable
similarly to a motor
overload relay to Refer also to parameters: P.041 Motor Overload Type
protect the motor H.002 Motor Nameplate Amps
from overheating. U.004 Motor Nameplate Amps
P.040 applies to
single-motor
applications only.
ATTENTION: For single-motor applications with no external thermal

overload relay, this parameter should always be set to ON. Failure to
! observe this precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of,
the equipment.
For V/Hz regulation, the drive trips after 60 seconds at 150% of Motor Nameplate
Amps (H.002) and will display fault code OL. Lower currents above 100% will take
longer to trip (for example, 25 minutes at 110%). The motor overload protection
fault level depends on the settings of the Motor Overload Type selection (P.041)
and Motor Nameplate Amps (H.002).
For vector regulation, the drive trips after 60 seconds at 150% of Motor Nameplate
Amps (U.004) and will display fault code OL. The overload current amount is
automatically calculated by the GV3000/SE software based on the Motor Nameplate
Amps (U.004).
Important: While the electronic thermal overload relay is similar to a motor

overload relay, neither measures actual motor temperature.
Temperature-measuring devices integral to the motor are the best way
to thermally protect AC motors under all conditions.
P.041 Motor Overload Type

This parameter Parameter Range: nC = Standard motor without forced cooling
specifies the type of FC = Force-cooled motor
motor being used to
determine the Default Setting: FC
electronic motor Parameter Type: Configurable
thermal overload
function Refer also to parameters: P.040 Motor Overload Enable
characteristics.

P.042 Line Dip Ride-Through Time
this parameter sets 500 ms (vector)
the maximum time
allowed for the drive Default Setting: 5.0
to stay active during Parameter Type: Configurable
low line voltage or
line voltage loss. Refer also to parameters: H.017 Input Power/Snubber Configuration
H.021 AC Line Voltage
For vector regulation, U.018 AC Line Voltage
this value is fixed at
500 ms.
If DC bus voltage drops below the low DC bus voltage threshold for more than the
time set in P.042, fault code LU is logged. After line voltage has been restored, the
fault must be reset, and then the drive may be restarted.
If line voltage is restored before the specified time is exceeded, the drive will
accelerate to operating speed at the rate specified in P.001 (Accel Time 1).
For V/Hz regulation, alarm code LIL will flash on the display during a line dip
ride-through. The levels for LIL and LU depend on the parameter setting for AC
Line Voltage (H.021).
P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts

selects the number
Default Setting: 0
of times the drive will
attempt to reset drive Parameter Type: Configurable
faults.
Refer also to parameters: P.044 Fault Auto Reset Time
Important: The drive will restart after a reset if the start input is still asserted.
If the auto reset feature is enabled (P.043 = 0), faults detected while the drive is
running are logged and reset. The drive will then wait the amount of time specified
in P.044 (Fault Auto Reset Time) and, if the start input is asserted from the selected
control source, start the drive automatically. Note that the drive must run for at least
five minutes in order to reset the number of fault reset attempts to the value in
P.043.
If the fault occurs again, the drive will wait and try to restart up to the programmed
number of attempts. If the drive faults on all of these attempts, it will remain in the
faulted state and will display the fault code on the keypad/display.

P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts (continued)
Table 4.5 lists the faults that can be auto reset:
Table 4.5 – Faults That Can Be Auto Reset

Fault Code Description
AIn 4 to 20 mA analog input signal loss
bYc DC bus charging bypass contactor
EC Earth current failure (ground fault)
HIL High line voltage
HU High DC bus voltage
LU Low DC bus voltage
nCL Network communications loss
OC Overcurrent steady state
OCA Overcurrent while accelerating
OCb Overcurrent during DC braking
OH Drive overtemperature
OL Electronic motor overload
UbS Asymmetrical bus charge
All other faults cannot be auto reset.
Note that the auto reset feature will be disabled during the vector self-tuning
operation and the V/Hz identification procedure.
P.044 Fault Auto Reset Time

This parameter Parameter Range: 1 to 60 seconds
Default Setting: 8
of time the drive will
wait to attempt to Parameter Type: Configurable
reset drive faults.
Refer also to parameters: P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts
After the drive has detected the fault and is counting down the auto-reset time
period, the display will flash the countdown period in seconds in the following
format:
"Ar30...Ar29...Ar28...........Ar01...Ar00"
If during this countdown, the user presses the keypad STOP/RESET key, or asserts
the fault reset from the selected control source, the auto-reset countdown will stop,
and all faults will be reset.

P.045 Output Phase Loss Enable
This parameter is Parameter Range: OFF = Disable output phase loss diagnostic
used to enable the ON = Enable output phase loss diagnostic
output phase loss
detection diagnostic. Default Setting: ON
This diagnostic detects phase loss between the drive and the motor. When the
diagnostic is enabled and output phase loss is detected, a drive fault is logged (OPL
is displayed).
The output phase loss diagnostic can be disabled to avoid nuisance faults which
may occur, for example, when a small motor is used with a large Power Module.
P.047 Carrier Frequency (kHz)

This parameter Parameter Range: 2 = 2 kHz Carrier frequency
selects the drive's 4 = 4 kHz Carrier frequency
carrier frequency.
8 = 8 kHz Carrier frequency
Default Setting: 4
This parameter can compensate for acoustic noise by allowing adjustment of the
switching frequency of the transistors in the inverter bridge.
Keeping the carrier frequency at 8 kHz will ordinarily provide the quietest motor
operation.

P.048 Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation
This parameter Parameter Range: U-H = V/Hz control
selects the drive UEC = vector control
regulator type:
volts/hertz (V/Hz) or Default Setting: U-H
vector. Parameter Type: Configurable
Refer also to parameters: U.001 Encoder PPR
For V/Hz control, the drive provides open-loop volts per hertz regulation which is
appropriate for general purpose applications.
For vector control, you may select either flux vector control (FVC) or sensorless
vector control (SVC).
Flux vector control uses the actual encoder value for speed feedback and,
therefore, requires an encoder mounted to the motor and connected to the drive.
You program the drive for FVC by first selecting UEC in parameter P.048, and the
selecting the PPR value of the encoder in parameter U.001.
Sensorless vector control (SVC) is an extension of the FVC regulator. It provides

performance close to FVC without using an encoder. Control is based on estimated
speed feedback. You program the drive for SVC by first selecting UEC in parameter
P.048 and then selecting SE in parameter U.001 (Encoder PPR).
Switching from one regulator type to the other (V/Hz to vector or vice versa) takes
approximately 5 seconds. The drive reinitiates power-up diagnostics (SELF
appears on the display and all LEDs turn on for approximately 4 seconds).
Changing this parameter will also restore default values for all First and Second
Menu General parameters (P.---) as if a Restore Defaults command (P.050 = ON)
was given. However, this will NOT change the value of P.048 or P.049 (Country
Defaults).
Important: All other parameter values must be verified if this parameter is changed
after initial programming, regardless of whether they are restored to
their default values.
P.049 Country Defaults

This parameter Parameter Range: USA = USA default settings
selects the factory EUr = European default settings
default settings for
JPn = Japanese default settings
the First and Second
Menu General Default Setting: USA
parameters. USA
default settings are
listed throughout this Refer also to parameters: N/A
chapter. Refer to
Appendix D for the
European and
Japanese default
settings.

P.050 Restore Defaults
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = No action
resets all First and ON = Reset parameters to default settings
Second Menu
General parameters Default Setting: OFF
(P.---) to factory Parameter Type: Configurable
default settings.
Refer also to parameters: P.049 Country Defaults
Note that P.048 (Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation) is not restored to its factory
default setting when P.050 is set to ON.
P.051 Programming Disable

When the password Parameter Range: 0 to 9999
is entered into this
Default Setting: 0 (Programming enabled)
parameter,
parameter values Parameter Type: Tunable
cannot be modified
from the keypad
unless the correct
password (26) is
entered again.
Refer to section 4.4,
Ensuring Program
Security, for more
information.
ATTENTION: It is user's responsibility to determine how to distribute

the password. Reliance Electric is not responsible for unauthorized
! access violations within the user's organization. Failure to observe this
The PASSWORD LED will be on to indicate parameters cannot be modified from

the keypad.
Note that disabling program changes by means of P.051 will not prevent parameter
changes being made from the serial port on the network.

P.052 AUTO/MAN Key Disable
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Enable the AUTO/MAN key regardless of
disables the control source
AUTO/MAN key ON = Disable the AUTO/MAN key except from the
except from the selected control source
selected control
source. Default Setting: OFF
P.053 Manual Reference Preset Enable
When this parameter is set to ON, the AUTO/MAN key is functional only from the
selected control source. This parameter can be used to protect against inadvertent
reference change when the drive is controlled from the terminal strip (P.000 = rE) or
the option port (P.000 = OP).
Table 4.6 details whether the AUTO/MAN key is active based on the selected
control source and P.052.
Table 4.6 – AUTO/MAN Key Status Based on P.000 and P.052
Front Panel OIM/CS3000

Control Source (P.000 =) P.052 AUTO/MAN Key AUTO/MAN Key
Front panel (LOCL) OFF Active Inactive
Terminal strip (rE) OFF Active Active
Network/option board (OP) OFF Active Active
OIM/CS3000 (SErL) OFF Inactive Active
Front panel (LOCL) ON Active Inactive
Terminal strip (rE) ON Inactive Inactive
Network/option board (OP) ON Inactive Inactive
OIM/CS3000 (SErL) ON Inactive Active
Note that if P.000 = rE, but the REMOTE/LOCAL switch at terminal 17 is set for
LOCAL (closed), the AUTO/MAN key is active even if P/052 is set to ON.

When ON is selected, Parameter Range: OFF = Do not preset the manual reference
the manual reference ON = Preset the manual reference with the auto
will be preset with reference at the transition from AUTO to
the auto reference MANUAL
value when the
Default Setting: OFF
transition is made
from AUTO to Parameter Type: Tunable
MANUAL.
Refer also to parameters: P.027 Forward/Reverse Configuration
ATTENTION: The absolute value of the auto reference is used to

preset the manual reference. When this feature is enabled (P.053 =
! ON), and the auto reference is a negative value, a direction change will
occur when the transition is made from AUTO to MANUAL. Verify that
the auto reference is a positive value and the FORWARD/REVERSE
command is appropriate to the application before making the transition
from AUTO to MANUAL. Failure to observe this precaution may result
in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
The absolute value of the auto reference is limited between Minimum Speed (P.003)
and Maximum Speed (P.004) before it is used to preset the manual reference.
Therefore, when this feature is enabled (P.053 = ON), and the auto reference is
negative value, a direction change will occur when the transition is made from
AUTO to MANUAL. Verify that the auto reference is a positive value and the
FORWARD/REVERSE command is appropriate to the application before making
the transition from AUTO to MANUAL.
Important: If the manual reference is being modified using the front-panel keypad/
display when the transition from AUTO to MANUAL is made, the
manual reference may not be preset with the auto reference.
Refer to chapter 3 for more information on the AUTO/MAN key and the AUTO LED.

P.054 Level Sense Start Enable
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Start input is edge-sensitive
selects whether the ON = Start input is level-sensitive
start input is
edge-sensitive or Default Setting: OFF
level-sensitive for Parameter Type: Configurable
remote (P.000 = rE)
and option port Refer also to parameters: P.000 Control Source
(P.000 = OP) control
sources.
ATTENTION: Be aware of the following before enabling this function:
! • Setting this parameter to ON immediately applies output power to

the motor when all start conditions are met.
• If the drive is running from the terminal strip, both start and stop
inputs are closed. If P.054 = ON and a fault occurs, the drive coasts
to rest and generates a fault. In this case, resetting and clearing the
fault immediately restarts the drive without any change to the start or
stop input states.
• If P.026 (Function Loss Response) = 1, the control source is the
terminal strip (start and stop inputs are closed), and P.054 = ON,
the drive coasts to rest if the function loss input is opened and does
not generate a fault. In this case, closing the function loss input
immediately starts the drive without any change to the start or stop
input.
When this function is enabled, the user must ensure that automatic
start up of the driven equipment will not cause injury to operating
personnel or damage to the driven equipment. In addition, the user is
responsible for providing suitable audible or visual alarms or other
devices to indicate that this function is enabled and the drive may start
at any moment. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
This parameter applies to remote (P.000 = rE) and option port (P.000 = OP) control
sources only. Local keypad (P.000 = LOCL) and serial port (P.000 = SErL) control
sources always require an off-to-on edge on the start input to start the drive.
Regardless of the status of P.054, the following conditions must be met in order for
the drive to start.
• The terminal strip function loss input must be closed.
• No fault can be active.
• The DC bus must be valid.
• No active stop input can be asserted.
When P.054 is set to OFF, and the above requirements are met, the drive requires
an off-to-on edge at the start input in order to start.
When P.054 is set to ON, and the above requirements are met, the drive applies
output power to the motor when the start input is asserted.
Note that in V6.06, the analog input can be configured to start and stop the drive.
Refer to Appendix F if you are using this feature and have configured the drive to
use the analog input to start and stop the drive.

P.054 Level Sense Start Enable (continued)
Figure 4.7 shows the start, stop, and running status of the drive when configured for
edge control versus level control.
START
STOP
RUNNING
Edge-Sensitive Start
START
STOP
RUNNING
Level-Sensitive Start
Figure 4.7 – Drive Start, Stop, and Running Status when Configured for Edge Control vs. Level Control
Note that when operating from the terminal strip (rE) or a network option, an edge is
required at the start input for the following two conditions, even if P.054 = ON:
• The front panel keypad/display or OIM/CS3000 STOP key is pressed.
• After a vector self-tuning procedure.
These forced edge requirements do not apply if the control source is changed to
any other value and then back again as shown in the following example.
Example
Assume the selected control source is the terminal strip (P.000 = rE), level sense
start is enabled (P.054 = ON), no faults are active, and both the start and stop
inputs are closed. The drive, therefore, is running.
The drive is stopped using the front-panel STOP key. The drive now waits for an
open-to-close edge on the terminal strip start input to restart.
The control source is changed to any value other than rE. This is done by
changing P.000 to any value but rE or toggling the REM/LOC switch.
The control source is then changed back to the terminal strip (rE).
Since the start input is still closed, the drive starts. A start edge is no longer
required because switching from the terminal strip and back again effectively acts
as an edge.

P.054 Level Sense Start Enable (continued)
ATTENTION: As a safety precaution, Reliance Electric recommends

that the user provide an audible or visual alarm to indicate that this
! feature is enabled and the motor may start when power is applied to
the drive. The user should also post warnings on the motor, the drive,
and any other applicable equipment to alert personnel that the
application uses an automatic start-up feature. Failure to observe this
Figure 4.8 shows an example of a typical circuit that can be used on 75 to 200 HP
drives. This circuit will energize an alarm device prior to motor start up.
Note that if P.000 =rE, the terminal strip LOC/REM switch determines the control
source (local or remote) at power up.
120 VAC
GV3000/SE Drive
Set P.013 to 1
30 31
Relay
Relay
Relay
Hom
Figure 4.8 – Sample Alarm Circuit for 75-200 HP Drives Using the Level Sense Enable Feature

P.055 STOP/RESET Key Disable
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Enable the STOP/RESET key regardless of
disables the the control source
STOP/RESET key ON = Disable the STOP/RESET key except from the
except from the selected control source
selected control
source. Default Setting: OFF
ATTENTION: When P.055 is set to ON, the STOP/RESET key is

functional only from the selected control source. As a safety
! precaution, Reliance Electric recommends that an emergency stop
push button be located near the drive in an easily accessible location.
As a further safety precaution, the user should post a warning on the
drive to alert personnel that the STOP/RESET key is not functional.
loss of life.
Table 4.7 details whether the STOP/RESET key is active based on the selected
control source (P.000) and P.055.
Table 4.7 – STOP/RESET Key Status Based on P.000 and P.055
Control Source Front Panel OIM/CS3000

(P.000 =) P.055 STOP/RESET Key STOP/RESET Key
Front panel (LOCL) OFF Active Active
Terminal strip (rE) OFF Active Active
Network/option board (OP) OFF Active Active
OIM/CS3000 (SErL) OFF Active Active
Front panel (LOCL) ON Active Inactive
Terminal strip (rE) ON Inactive Inactive
Network/option board (OP) ON Inactive Inactive
OIM/CS3000 (SErL) ON Inactive Active
Note that if P.000 = rE, but the REMOTE/LOCAL switch at terminal 17 is set for
LOCAL (closed), the STOP key is active even if P.055 is ON.

P.060 Network Drop Number
This parameter Parameter Range: Network-dependent
assigns the base
drop number or node Default Setting: 1
number to the drive. Parameter Type: Configurable
Refer also to parameters: P.061 Network Connection Type
This parameter must be set at the drive via the keypad/display or via a personal
computer serial interface. This parameter cannot be written to the drive by the
network master.
For AutoMax applications, refer to the AutoMax Network Communication Option

Board manual (D2-3308).
For DeviceNet applications, refer to the DeviceNet Network Communication Option

Board manual (MAN0096-03).
For ControlNet applications, refer to the ControlNet Network Communication Option

For PROFIBUS applications, refer to the PROFIBUS Interface Board manual (49'1355).
P.061 Network Connection Type (Run/Program Response)

This parameter is Parameter Range: Network-dependent
network-dependent.
Default Setting: 0
Refer to the
appropriate network Parameter Type: Configurable
manual for the
parameter
description.




P.062 Option Port: Communication Loss Response
specifies how the
drive will respond to Default Setting: 0
a network Parameter Type: Tunable
communication
failure if the option Refer also to parameters: P.000 Control Source
port has been
selected as the drive
control source
(P.000 = OP).



P.063 Option Port: Network Reference Source

specifies where the
Default Setting: 0
drive will get its
speed or torque Parameter Type: Configurable
reference when the
Refer also to parameters: U.000 Torque Reference Source
option port is
selected as the
control source
(P.000 = OP).




P.064 Option Port: Network Trim Reference Source
This parameter Parameter Range: Option board-dependent. See option board
specifies where the instruction manual.
drive gets its trim Default Setting: 0
reference when the
option port is Parameter Type: Configurable
selected as the Refer also to parameters: P.063 Option Port: Network Reference Source
control source U.000 Torque Reference Source
(P.000 = OP).
The option port trim reference is used as the outer control loop reference and/or the
speed trim reference (see the P.014 (Trim Reference Source) parameter
description).
In V/Hz regulation, the trim reference represents speed in hertz scaled 0 to 4095 for
0 to Maximum Speed (P.004).
In vector regulation, the trim reference represents speed scaled 0 to 4095 for 0 to
Top Speed (U.017). When used for the outer control loop, the value should be
scaled based on the scaling of the selected feedback.
Refer to the following option board manuals:
• AutoMax Network Communication Option Board (D2-3308)
• ControlNet Network Communication Option Board (D2-3390)
• DeviceNet Network Communication Option Board (MAN0096-03)
• PROFIBUS Interface Board (49'1355)
• Super Remote Meter Interface Board (D2-3341)
OCL Reference Selection (FVC/SVC Only)
The parameter is also used to select the OCL reference. Refer to Appendix G for
more information.
P.065 Option Port: Type and Version

This parameter Parameter Range: N/A
displays the option
type and the software
version number of Parameter Type: Read only
the option board.
The display format is N.vvv, where N represents the option type (1 = RMI,
2 = AutoMax network or PROFIBUS network, 4 = DeviceNet network, and 5 =
ControlNet network) and vvv represents the software version number.
For example, if 2.103 is displayed, it means the drive is using the AutoMax network
option and is running software version 1.03.

P.066 to P.069 Network Output Register 1 Source through
Network Output Register 4 Source
These parameters Parameter Range: 0 = (P.066) Motor Kw display value
select the signal (P.067) Motor torque display value*
written to the option (P.068) Output power factor
port network output (P.069) Encoder counter (x4)*
registers 1 through 4. 1 = Speed reference rate limit output*
2 = Speed reference at the ref/fdbk summing
See figure 4.9. junction (includes OCL output and current
compounding)*
3 = Speed loop feedback*
4 = Speed loop error*
5 = Speed PI output*
6 = Outer control loop feedback*
7 = Outer control loop error*
8 = Outer control loop output*
9 = Terminal strip analog input normalized to speed
(see Appendix F)
10 = Terminal strip analog input scaled (see
Appendix F)
11 = Torque reference*
12 = Torque feedback*
Default Setting: 0
*These signals are valid only in vector control (P.048 = UEC).
Refer to the AutoMax Network Communication Option Board instruction manual

(D2-3308) for the AutoMax network register map.
Refer to the ControlNet Network Communication Option Board instruction manual

(D2-3390) for the ControlNet network register map.

P.066 to P.069 Network Output Register 1 Source through Network
Output Register 4 Source (continued)
P.066
0 = Motor KW
display value
.
.
.
12
P.067
0 = Motor torque Network Module
display value
.
.
. Network Output Register 1
12
Network Output Register 2
P.068
Network Output Register 3
0 = Output power
factor Network Output Register 4
.
.
.
12
P.069
0 = Encoder
counter (x 4)
.
.
.
12
Figure 4.9 – Signal Selection for Network Output Registers

P.090 Diagnostics Source
This parameter is Parameter Range: 0 = Diagnostic not used
used to select 1 = Terminal strip digital inputs 4, 3, 2, 1
internal information
2 = Terminal strip digital inputs 8, 7, 6, 5
such as I/O data,
network statistics, 3 = Terminal strip analog input normalized to
etc., for display in speed (see Appendix F)
parameter P.091. 4 = RMI digital inputs 4, 3, 2, 1
5 = RMI analog input (see Appendix F)
6 = RMI frequency input (see Appendix F)
7 = Encoder data
8 = DC bus voltage
9 = Terminal strip analog input scaled (see
Appendix F)
10 = Terminal strip analog input with P.009
(Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset) applied
(see Appendix G)
11 = Analog input stop threshold (see Appendix G)
12 = Analog input start thresho;d (see Appendix G)
14 = Network interface: number of messages
received from the network
15 = Network interface: number of message receive
time-out errors
16 = Network interface: number of message CRC
errors
17 = Network interface: number of message overrun
errors
aborted
transmitted to the network
Default Setting: 0
Refer also to parameters: P.091 Diagnostics Display
P.091 Diagnostics Display

displays the data
selected in P.090.
Parameter Type: Read only
Refer also to parameters: P.090 Diagnostics Source
The status of the digital inputs (selected by entering a value of 1, 2, or 4 in P.090) is

P.091 Diagnostics Display (continued)
displayed as a four-digit combination of 1s and 0s (1 = on, 0 = off) in the following
manner:
Four-Character Display
P.090 = 1, terminal strip digital inputs 4 3 2 1

P.090 = 2, terminal strip digital inputs 8 7 6 5
P.090 = 4, RMI digital inputs 4 3 2 1
P.095 Power Module Output Amps

displays the
maximum output
current rating of the Parameter Type: Read only
drive. The maximum
Refer also to parameters: P.005 Current Limit
value of Current Limit
(P.005) corresponds
to P.095.
For example, if P.095 = 11.0 and P.005 = 110% of maximum, then the maximum
output current rating with no overload rating (100% rating) = 10.0 amps.
P.098 Software Version Number

The parameter Parameter Range: N/A
displays the software
version number.
P.099 Power Module Type

displays the type of
Power Module the
drive is configured Parameter Type: Read only
for.
The Power Module type is displayed in the format V.nnn where V represents the
drive's voltage rating (2 = 230V, 4 = 460V, 5 = 575V), and nnn represents
horsepower. For example, the display 2.010 represents 230V, 10 HP.

4.6.3 Second Menu V/Hz Parameter Descriptions (H.000 to H.022)
H.000 Motor Nameplate Base Volts

This parameter Parameter Range: 100 VAC to 690 VAC
identifies the motor
Default Setting: 460 VAC
nominal voltage as it
appears on the motor Parameter Type: Configurable
nameplate.

This parameter Parameter Range: 30.0 Hz to 200.0 Hz
configures the V/Hz
Default Setting: 60.0 Hz
ratio.
Refer also to parameters: H.003 Torque Boost Voltage
H.018 Volts/Hertz Curve Type
Base frequency is the frequency at which the output voltage reaches Motor
Nameplate Voltage (H.000). Below base frequency, the output voltage varies with
output frequency according to the V/Hz adjustment in parameter H.018 (Volts/Hertz
Curve Type). Above base frequency, output voltage is held constant as frequency
increases (constant horsepower range).
The V/Hz ratio is affected by the selection of Volts/Hertz Curve Type in H.018 and
the setting of Torque Boost Voltage in H.003. See figure 4.10.
100
Maximum
V/Hz
Motor
Voltage,
(H.000)
(volts)
Minimum
V/Hz
30 Output Frequency H.001

(Hz)
Figure 4.10 – Volts/Hertz Ratio

This parameter is the Parameter Range: Power Module-dependent
motor amp rating as
Default Setting: Power Module-dependent, see Appendix C
it appears on the
motor nameplate. Parameter Type: Configurable
ATTENTION: This parameter must not exceed the rated amps found
on the motor nameplate. Excess heating of the motor could result if
! this is not done. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
H.003 Torque Boost Voltage

This parameter sets Parameter Range: 0.0% to 20.0% of nominal inverter voltage
the percentage of
Default Setting: 0.5%
output voltage boost
at zero frequency. It Parameter Type: Configurable
is set as a
Refer also to parameters: H.000 Motor Nameplate Volts
percentage of Motor
Nameplate Volts
(H.000).
Important: If you set H.003 = 0, you must perform the identification test (using
H.020) prior to running.
Torque boost is required to offset the voltage drop of the AC motor at low speeds.
For high friction loads and high inertia loads, high starting torque may be needed.
Increasing Torque Boost Voltage will increase motor starting torque. See figure
4.11.
If the torque boost voltage setting (H.003) is too high, the motor may draw
excessive starting current, resulting in an OL or PUo fault, or the drive may go into
current limit and not accelerate. When H.003 = 0, the drive automatically provides
torque boost voltage that is a function of motor load. If the motor does not
accelerate or a fault occurs, set parameter H.003 equal to 0.

H.003 Torque Boost Voltage (continued)
100
Torque Boost
Voltage H.003 = 1%
Output
%
Constant
V/Hz
Ratio
1
0 Base Frequency
Output Frequency
(Hz)
Figure 4.11 – Torque Boost Voltage
H.004 Slip Compensation

This parameter is Parameter Range: 0.00% to 10.00% of base frequency (H.001)
used to improve
Default Setting: 0.00% (no slip compensation)
motor speed
regulation by Parameter Type: Tunable
increasing the output
Refer also to parameters: P.095 Power Module Output Amps
frequency applied to
the motor (the
percentage of
frequency rise at
Power Module Output
Amps (P.095)).
The level of increased output frequency is a function of the value entered in H.004
and the motor current.
Actual motor shaft speed is determined by two factors: inverter output frequency
and the slip of the motor. The speed reference is converted into output frequency.
Motor slip varies with load and is determined by the type of induction motor.
At rated load, slip compensation measures inverter output current and increases the
output frequency by the percentage entered in H.004. Below rated load, slip
compensation will increase inverter output frequency by the percentage in H.004
multiplied by the percent of rated load.
Because of load changes, the long-term speed behavior of the motor is greatly
improved through the use of this parameter.
To calculate the value entered for H.004, use the following equation:
Synchronous RPM - Nameplate RPM Max Power Module Amps

H.004 = 100 x x
Synchronous RPM Motor Nominal Current

H.004 Slip Compensation (continued)
Synchronous RPM = 120 x F

No. of Motor Poles
Example: 1722 RPM

Motor Nominal Current = 78% of Maximum Power Module Amps (P.095)
V/Hz regulation
2 kHz
1800 – 1722 100%

H.004 = 100 x x = 5.56%
1800 78%
If the parameter is set to zero, motor speed will not be proportional to reference, but
will vary depending on load.
H.005 DC Braking Enable

This parameter Parameter Range: ON = Enable DC braking
enables or disables OFF = Disable DC braking
DC braking.
Refer also to parameters: P.025 Stop Type
H.006 DC Braking Start Frequency
H.007 DC Braking Current
H.008 DC Braking Time
H.017 Input Power/Snubber Configuration
Important: This function will not provide holding torque as a mechanical brake. DC
braking is only operative when Stop Type (P.025) is set to 1 (ramp stop).
DC braking is used to provide additional motor braking (by DC current flow through
motor windings) at speeds below DC Braking Start Frequency (H.006). If DC braking is
required, DC braking functions (H.008, H.007) must be greater than zero (0).
When the motor decelerates to the preset DC Braking Start Frequency (H.006), the
DC Braking current (H.007) is applied to the motor after a Power Module-dependent
delay time.

This parameter sets Parameter Range: 0.5 to P.004 (Maximum Speed)
the frequency at
which DC braking
begins. Parameter Type: Tunable
Refer also to parameters: H.005 DC Braking Enable
With DC braking enabled (H.005 = ON), braking will be activated after a stop
command when the motor speed is less than or equal to DC Braking Start
Frequency (H.006).
Note that if H.005 is set to ON, and this value is set too high, faults may occur (OC,
OCb, or PUo will be displayed).

This parameter sets Parameter Range: 0 to 100% of motor nameplate amps
the DC current level
Default Setting: 10
applied to the motor
during DC braking. Parameter Type: Tunable
With DC braking enabled (H.005 = ON), the braking torque provided by the motor is
defined by a percentage of motor rated amps (100% is motor rated amps).
Important: If H.007 is set too high, faults may occur (OC, OCA, OCb, or PUo will
be displayed.)
Note that this parameter was modified in version 6.0. Prior releases scaled voltage
instead of current for braking.

This parameter sets Parameter Range: 0.1 to 20.0 seconds
the time period for
which DC braking
will be applied. Parameter Type: Tunable
With DC braking enabled (H.005 = ON), braking will be activated after a stop
command when the decelerating drive reaches a speed corresponding to DC
Braking Start Frequency (H.006). The braking period ends after the programmed
time regardless of the actual motor speed. The value should be set to a level that
avoids activation at rest.
H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable

This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Disable avoidance frequency processing
enables the ON = Enable avoidance frequency processing
avoidance frequency
bands selected in Default Setting: OFF
H.011, H.013, and Parameter Type: Tunable
H.015.
P.004 Maximum Speed
H.010 to H.015 Avoidance Frequency Midpoint and
Band 1, 2, and 3
Operating a motor continuously at a particular frequency may cause vibrational

resonance within some machines. Three independent parameter pairs can be
configured for avoidance frequency and frequency band to prevent motor vibration
by preventing the drive output frequency from operating within the selected band(s).
The actual avoidance frequency selection is limited by Minimum Speed (P.003) and
Maximum Speed (P.004). Normal acceleration and deceleration is not affected by
this function.

H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable (continued)
Max Hz
AF 3
Avoidance
Output AF 2 Frequency Band
Frequency
AF 1
Base Frequency
Min Hz
Min Max
Speed Reference
Figure 4.12 – Avoidance Frequency Band
H.010, H.012, H.014 Avoidance Frequency Midpoint 1, 2, and 3

This parameter Parameter Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
specifies the midpoint
of each avoidance
frequency band Parameter Type: Tunable
selected in H.011,
Refer also to parameters: H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable
H.013, and H.015.
H.011, H.013, H.015 Avoidance Frequency Band 1,
2, and 3
The adjusted values may be in any order. The frequency will not be affected at
normal acceleration or deceleration but will be avoided at continuous output
frequency.

H.011, H.013, H.015 Avoidance Frequency Band 1, 2, and 3
This parameter Parameter Range: 0.2 to 10 Hz
specifies the
avoidance frequency
band that will be Parameter Type: Tunable
applied to each
Refer also to parameters: H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable
avoidance frequency
H.010, H.012, H.014 Avoidance Frequency
midpoint selected in
Midpoints 1, 2, and 3
H.010, H.012, and
H.014.
The avoided frequency range is:
(Avoidance freq. midpoint 'n' – freq. band 'n'/2) < range < (avoidance freq. midpoint 'n' + freq. band 'n'/2)
where n = 1, 2, or 3.
H.016 Sync Direction

When starting into a Parameter Range: OFF = Disable synchronization
rotating load is F = Search starts in motor forward direction
required, this
r = Search starts in motor reverse direction
parameter selects
the direction in which Fr = Search starts in motor forward then reverse
the drive will search direction
in order to rF = Search starts in motor reverse then forward
synchronize to motor direction
speed.
Note that when Forward/Reverse Configuration (P.027) is set to 1, setting this

parameter to r, Fr, or rF may cause the motor to operate in the reverse direction.
ATTENTION: When starting with search enabled, there will be a

several second delay, and motor may drift in the forward and reverse
! direction, before the motor begins operating in the desired direction
even if reverse has been disabled in P.027. Stay clear of rotating
machinery. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily
injury.

This parameter is Parameter Range: 0 = AC input, snubber resistor not used,
used to identify the ride-through enabled.
input power supply 1 = AC input, snubber resistor is used,
type/snubber ride-through enabled.
resistor/line dip
2 = DC input, snubber resistor not used,
ride-through
configuration being
used. 3 = DC input, snubber resistor used,
4 =DC input, snubber resistor not used,
5 =DC input, snubber resistor used,
Default Setting: 0
Refer also to parameters: P.042 Line Dip Ride-Through Time
ATTENTION: When connected to a non-regenerative common DC

bus, regeneration may cause a rise in DC bus voltage. Be aware that
! other drives on the bus may experience an unexpected speed increase
due to the high bus voltage. Failure to observe this precaution may
For AC input Power Modules (200-230V, 3-phase, 50/60Hz or 380-460V, 3-phase,

50/60Hz), set H.017 = 0 or 1.
For DC input Power Modules, set H.017 = 2 or 3 if multiple motors are connected to
the inverter. Set H.017 = 4 or 5 if a single motor is connected to the inverter.
Snubber Resistor
If a snubber resistor is not used, set H.017 = 0, 2, or 4. If the DC bus voltage rises
above a certain threshold (14% above the rectified nominal AC line), the drive will
increase the commanded frequency in an effort to reduce bus voltage. The drive
will increase the commanded frequency a maximum of 10 Hz but will not exceed the
value specified in P.004 (Maximum Speed). The deceleration time (P.002) may be
automatically extended to prevent a high bus voltage fault from occurring. If the bus
voltage continues to rise, a high bus voltage fault (HU) will be generated.
If a snubber resistor is used, set H.017 = 1, 3, or 5. If the DC bus voltage rises

above a certain threshold (14% above the rectified nominal AC line), the drive will
not attempt to increase the commanded frequency, but will rely on the hardware
snubber resistor to decrease voltage. Note that you may need to extend the
deceleration time specified in P.002 (Decel Time) to prevent a high bus voltage fault
(HU) from occurring.

H.017 Input Power/Snubber Configuration (continued)
Line Dip Ride-Through
Line dip ride-through allows the drive to remain active during low line voltage or line
voltage loss for the time period specified in P.042 (Line Dip Ride-Through Time).
To enable line dip ride-through, set H.017 = 0, 1, 4, or 5. If the DC bus drops below
the low DC bus voltage threshold, or the AC line voltage drops out, the drive will
reduce the commanded frequency and regenerate to hold up the bus. Note that the
drive will decelerate at a rate required to hold up the bus, and may not use the value
specified in P.002 (Decel Time 1).
To disable line dip ride-through, set H.017 = 2 or 3. If the bus voltage drops below
the low DC bus voltage threshold or the AC line drops out, a low bus voltage fault
(LU) will be generated, and the drive will stop.
Refer to P.042 for more information regarding line dip ride-through.

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Linear V/Hz curve
provides an 1 = Optimized V/Hz curve
application-
2 = Squared V/Hz curve
dependent
selection of nominal Default Setting: 0
motor voltage versus
frequency. This
selection is effective Refer also to parameters: H.003 Torque Boost Voltage
from any control
source.
Set H.018 = 0 for constant torque applications (such as extruders and conveyors).
Set H.018 = 1 for use with Reliance Electric RPM and XE AC motors. A special
V/Hz curve (with two different slopes) will provide wider constant torque capability
and best efficiency.
Set H.018 = 2 for centrifugal fan and pump motor applications.

H.018 Volts/Hertz Curve Type (continued)
Motor Motor Motor

Voltage Voltage Voltage
(H.000) (H.000) (H.000)
Volts Volts Volts
Motor
Motor Motor Base Frequency
Hz Hz Hz
Base Frequency Base Frequency (H.001)
(H.001) (H.001)
Linear (0) Optimized (1) Squared (2)
Figure 4.13 – Volts/Hertz Curve Selection
H.019 Identification Result

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Identification procedure successful. No fault.
displays the result of 1 = A logged error aborted the identification
the identification procedure. Refer to section 5.3 for how to
procedure. Normally, determine the cause of the fault. Remove the
the identification cause and repeat the procedure.
procedure will be
2 = A function loss aborted the identification
successful, and the
procedure. Depending on Function Loss
value in H.019 will be
Response (P.026), this is or is not logged.
= 0.
Remove the cause and repeat the procedure.
3 = A stop command aborted the identification
procedure. Repeat the procedure without
stopping.
4 = The identification procedure aborted because the
measured current feedback signal is too low.
Feedback signal elements or wiring is defective.
Check motor connections, inverter wiring, and
feedback devices (current sensors). Repeat
procedure.
6 = Calculation result based on identification
procedure measurements is out of range. Check
causes of incorrect measurements, such as
motor connections. Repeat procedure.
Default Setting: 0
Refer also to parameters: H.020 Identification Request

H.020 Identification Request
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Disable identification procedure
enables the ON = Enable identification procedure
procedure that
identifies Power Default Setting: OFF
Module and motor Parameter Type: Configurable
characteristics.
ATTENTION: The motor shaft can rotate in either direction by up to

one (1) revolution, providing minimum torque immediately after the
! identification procedure has been started. Stay clear of rotating
machinery. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
ATTENTION: Carrier Frequency (P.047) and Current Limit (P.005)
must be set correctly before activating the identification procedure to
avoid motor overloading and/or overheating. Failure to observe this
ATTENTION: The motor can rotate in the reverse direction even if
reverse disable has been selected in P.027. Uncouple the motor from
any driven machinery that could be damaged by reverse rotation.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to, or
Before starting this procedure, verify that the motor is at rest and connected to the
drive. The motor can be connected to the driven machinery. Verify that Motor
Nameplate Volts (H.000), Carrier Frequency (P.047), and Current Limit (P.005) are
set correctly.
The identification procedure should be run only in the following cases:
• after the initial assembly of the inverter (performed at Reliance Electric)

• if H.003 (Torque Boost Voltage) = 0
The ratio of maximum Power Module Output Amps (P.095) to Motor Nameplate
Amps (H.002) should not be greater than 3:1. (Maximum Power Module Output
Amps is dependent on Power Module size and the selected Carrier Frequency
(P.047)). Compare the value of P.095 to H.002 to decide on the adjustment of
Current Limit (P.005) to avoid motor damage.
Do not connect a motor that cannot withstand maximum Power Module Output
Amps reduced by selected Current Limit (P.005).
Note that the identification procedure must not be performed when more than one
motor is being driven by the inverter.

H.020 Identification Request (continued)
To activate the identification procedure after it has been enabled (H.020 = ON), the
program mode must be exited. I-En will flash on the display to indicate the
procedure has been enabled. The keypad START key must be pressed to start the
procedure. I-Ac will flash on the display to indicate the procedure is being performed
(active). The results of this procedure are written to parameter H.019.
If the fault code nId is displayed after a start command is asserted, it indicates that
the identification procedure has not been performed. Reset the fault, and then
perform the procedure.
If a fault or a stop command is detected, the procedure will abort. HId will be
displayed if the procedure is aborted. Refer to Identification Result (H.019).
H.021 AC Line Volts

This parameter is the Parameter Range: 300 VAC to 565 VAC
phase-to-phase line
Default Setting: 460
voltage provided to
the drive input power Parameter Type: Configurable
terminals.
The value entered should be within 10% of actual line voltage. If this parameter is
set too low, it may cause a drive fault on overvoltage.

This parameter Parameter Range: 30.0 to 4 x H.001 + 5% or 210 Hz*
provides overspeed
protection by setting
the fault level for Parameter Type: Configurable
maximum frequency
output.
* Drive will use the lesser value.

! capable of safe operation at the overfrequency limit. Failure to
If actual frequency exceeds the set value, the inverter will fault (OF will be displayed on
the keypad/display) and the drive will stop.
The overfrequency limit should be set approximately 15 Hz above Maximum Speed

(P.004).

4.6.4 Second Menu Vector Parameter Descriptions (U.000 to U.048)
U.000 Torque Reference Source

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Speed loop output
specifies the source 1 = Terminal strip analog input
for the torque
2 = Option port (network torque reference register)*
reference when
torque regulation is 3 = Selected speed reference
selected. Default Setting: 0
* If the AutoMax Network option is used, see P.063.
If U.000 = 0, the drive will always regulate speed.
If U.000 > 0, the drive will regulate torque or speed. Torque or speed regulation is
selected by a terminal strip digital input (see the P.007 configuration) or the network
option board (depending on the control source).
If torque regulation is selected:
• the Current Limit parameter (P.005) is not applied.

• asserting the START input when JOG is selected will enable the torque
regulator, not the speed regulator (i.e., P.020, P.021, and P.022 are not used).
• the stop type will always be coast-to-rest regardless of the value in P.025 (Stop
Type).
If U.000 = 1, the analog input conditioning (P.009 through P.011) does not apply.
The analog input in this case is converted every torque regulator scan (0.5ms) for
external closed-loop control (e.g., positioning applications using the QUIQ module).
If U.000 = 3:
• The FWD/REV input can be used to invert the selected speed reference when it
is used as the torque reference.
• If the speed reference is used as the torque reference, the %torque is computed
as
Speed value x 150
= %torque reference
U.017 (Top Speed)
This assumes that P.028 = U.017.

U.001 Encoder PPR
This parameter Parameter Range: 512 = 512 PPR
selects the number 1024 = 1024 PPR
of pulses per
2048 = 2048 PPR
revolution (PPR) of
the encoder being 4096 = 4096 PPR
used or selects SE = No encoder connected. Operate in
sensorless vector sensorless vector control (SVC).
control (SVC) if no
encoder is used. Default Setting: 1024
If SE is not selected,
the value of this Refer also to parameters: U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable
parameter is
automatically set
when self-tuning
(U.008) is successful.

injury.
ATTENTION: Do not use a 4096 PPR encoder with a 2-pole motor.
If an encoder is used, select the PPR based on a 125 kHz maximum input
frequency limitation. The encoder PPR selection affects the minimum and the
maximum operation speed in RPM and also affects the speed range.
The maximum input frequency can be calculated by the formula:
U.017 x U.001
Fmax =
60
where Fmax is the maximum frequency in pulses per second.
If U.001 = SE, the drive operates using sensorless vector control (SVC). Unless
specified, all vector parameters apply to SVC. Refer also to the following
parameters which specifically support SVC:
• U.022 Motor Nameplate Horsepower

• U.023 Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable
• U.030 SVC Slip Adjust
• U.031 SVC Sync Direction
• U.032 SVC Flux Current Regulator Gain

U.002 Motor Poles
This parameter Parameter Range: 2 = 2 poles
identifies the number 4 = 4 poles
of poles in the motor.
6 = 6 poles
This parameter must 8 = 8 poles
be entered before
Default Setting: 4
parameter U.005
(Motor Nameplate Parameter Type: Configurable
RPM). Parameter
U.005 is limited by Refer also to parameters: U.003 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
the number of motor U.005 Motor Nameplate RPM
poles entered into
parameter U.002.

injury.
ATTENTION: Do not use a 4096 PPR encoder with a 2-pole motor.
Important: Verify that the value in U.017 (Motor Top Speed) is correct if U.002 is
changed.
If the number of poles is unknown, this value can be calculated using data on the
motor nameplate as follows:
Step 1. Calculated the RPM value at 60 Hz as follows:
60
RPM @ 60 Hz = x Nameplate RPM (U.005)
Motor Nameplate Base Freq. (Hz) (U.003)
Step 2. Determine the number of motor poles by looking up the value computed for
RPM @ 60 Hz:
Range of RPM @ 60 Hz* Number of Poles

3240 to 3600 2
1620 to 1800 4
1080 to 1200 6
810 to 900 8
If you change this parameter after performing self-tuning using parameter U.008,
you must repeat the self-tuning procedure.
* RPM AC motors are 4-pole regardless of motor base RPM.

U.003 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
This parameter Parameter Range: 15.0 to 240.0 Hz
base frequency as it
nameplate.
Refer also to parameters: U.002 Motor Poles
This parameter must U.005 Motor Nameplate RPM
be entered before
parameter U.005
(Motor Nameplate
RPM). Parameter
U.005 is limited by
the motor base
frequency.

injury.
Important: Verify that the value in U.017 is correct if U.003 is changed.

This parameter Parameter Range: Power Module-dependent
rated amps as it
nameplate.
ATTENTION: This parameter must not exceed the rated amps found
on the motor nameplate. Overcurrent or excess heating of the motor
! could result if rated amps are exceeded. Failure to observe this
Note that the Power Module's Current Limit value (P.005) scales to the value
entered in U.004 to assure drive and motor coordination.

U.005 Motor Nameplate RPM
This parameter Parameter Range: *
rated RPM as it
nameplate.
This parameter must U.003 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
be set prior to U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable
activating the torque
control self-tuning
operation (U.008).
* The actual adjustment range changes based on the values in U.002 (Motor Poles)
and U.003 (Motor Nameplate Base Frequency):
Motor Poles Base Frequency Base Frequency

(U.002) 60 Hz (U.003) 50 Hz (U.003)
2 3240-3596 2700-2997
4 1620-1798 1350-1498
6 1080-1198 900-999
8 810-899 675-749
In general, the value range for U.005 is:
U.003 x 120 x .900 to U.003 x 120 x .999

U.002 U.002
If the value is too close to the synchronous RPM, the drive may exhibit instability.
This value directly affects torque linearity and the maximum attainable horsepower.

injury.

U.006 Magnetizing Current
This parameter Parameter Range: 10.00 to 80.00%
identifies the
percentage of
magnetizing current Parameter Type: Configurable
(no load amps) with
Refer also to parameters: U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable
respect to motor
rated amps.
A value is
automatically
generated for this
parameter when
self-tuning is
performed (U.008).
ATTENTION: If this parameter is set incorrectly, overcurrent or

excess heating of the motor could result. Failure to observe this
! precaution could result in damage to, or destruction of, the equipment.
If the motor nameplate shows the no load current data, then this parameter value
can be calculated using the following formula. If this data does not appear on the
motor nameplate, perform the self-tuning procedure (U.008) to automatically
calculate the result.
Magnetizing Current = No Load Amps x 100

Motor Rated Amps
U.007 Motor Nameplate Volts

This parameter Parameter Range: 100 to 690 volts
identifies motor rated
voltage as it appears
on the motor Parameter Type: Configurable
nameplate.
Refer also to parameters: U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable
Important: This parameter must be set prior to activating the torque control
self-tuning operation (U.008).

U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable
This parameter Parameter Range: ON = Enable self-tuning
enables the OFF = Disable self-tuning
self-tuning
procedure. Default Setting: OFF

! result. This includes any shaft-coupled devices such as reducers,
belts, or brakes. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
For FVC operation (U.001 = SE), this procedure determines the encoder PPR
selection for parameter U.001 (Encoder PPR). Determining the encoder PPR may
be necessary since the PPR is not always listed on the motor or encoder
nameplate. Determining the magnetizing current ratio is necessary in vector
regulation so that the proper no-load current, or magnetizing current, is set. The
proper magnetizing current is required to develop rated motor torque, speed, and
horsepower in vector regulation.
For FVC and SVC operation, this procedure also determines the value for
parameter U.006 (Magnetizing Current).
This parameter will be set to OFF when self-tuning is completed or aborted. This
parameter only enables self-tuning. It does not start the procedure. Parameters
U.002, U.003, U.004, U.005, and U.007 must be programmed before enabling
self-tuning in U.008. Then the START key can be pressed to start the procedure.
During the test, the motor will accelerate up to 90% of U.005 (Motor Nameplate
RPM) even if this value is greater than the value set in P.004 (Maximum Speed).

U.009 Torque Self-Tune Result
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Self tuning successful
displays the results 1 = User initiated a normal stop. Self-tuning aborted.
of the self-tuning
2 = Emergency stop or fault stop occurred during
operation requested
self-tuning. Self-tuning aborted.
by parameter U.008.
3 = Motor or encoder direction in reverse. Motor
SF will be displayed must rotate in clockwise direction facing the
with a fault entry in motor/encoder end. The encoder leads might
the error log showing also be reversed if the motor direction is correct.
the cause(s) of the 4 = Encoder PPR out of range. The result of the
fault(s) for any values determination of the encoder PPR was not one
of 1 through 7. of the four selections of U.001. The encoder
leads might also be reversed.
5 = Magnetizing current percent out of range. The
measured no load current was not within 10% to
80% of rated current. Check to see that nothing
is connected to the shaft and check the value in
U.004.
6 = Bus voltage error. Bus voltage out of range.
Check that the AC input line is +/–10% of U.018.
7 = Current limit exceeded. Self-tuning should be
run with the motor unloaded, and without being
connected to any inertia load.
U.012 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain

This parameter Parameter Range: 0.01 to 99.99
selects the
proportional gain of
the PI amplifier in the Parameter Type: Tunable
speed loop. This
value affects the
dynamic performance
of the speed
regulation of the
motor.
Larger gain values result in faster response, but may result in less stability. If the
drive overshoots the speed reference when changes to the reference are made, or if
the drive is unstable, reduce the value.
With the default value, the drive should perform satisfactorily. However, with
increased inertia loads, this parameter may need to be adjusted.

U.013 Speed Regulator Integral Gain
This parameter Parameter Range: 0.02 to 327.67 radians/second
selects the lead
frequency of the PI
amplifier in the speed Parameter Type: Tunable
loop. This value
affects the dynamic
performance of the
speed regulation of
the motor.
For most
applications, it is
recommended that
this parameter not be
adjusted.
Larger gain values result in faster response, but may result in less stability. If the
drive overshoots the speed reference when changes to the reference are made, or if
the drive is unstable, reduce the value.
With the default value, the drive should perform satisfactorily. However, with
increased inertia loads, this parameter may need to be adjusted.
U.014 Torque Regulator Proportional Gain

determines the
performance of the
torque response. Parameter Type: Tunable
For most Refer also to parameters: U.015 Torque Regulator Integral Gain
applications, it is
recommended that
this value not be
changed.
The higher the gain is set in this parameter, the higher the performance of the
torque loop. If the gain is set too high, the drive will become more susceptible to
overcurrent trips and/or instability. Decreasing the gain will help to increase
stability.
This parameter is not used when the drive is programmed for SVC operation.

U.015 Torque Regulator Integral Gain
determines the
performance of the
torque regulator. Parameter Type: Tunable
For most Refer also to parameters: U.014 Torque Regulator Proportional Gain
applications, it is
recommended that
this value not be
changed.
The higher the gain, the higher the performance of the torque loop. However, if the
gain is set too high, the drive will become more susceptible to overcurrent trips
and/or instability. Decreasing the gain will help increase stability.
This parameter is not used when the drive is programmed for SVC operation.
U.016 Field Weakening Start RPM

This parameter sets Parameter Range: * to U.005
the speed at which
field weakening
begins. Parameter Type: Configurable
* The low limit is calculated as 80% of synchronous speed where:
Synchro. Speed = 120 x Base Frequency (U.003)

No. of Motor Poles (U.002)
Using a 60 Hz motor as an example:
60 Hz Motor
Number of Motor Poles U.016 Parameter Range
2 2880 to U.005
4 1440 to U.005
6 960 to U.005
8 720 to U.005
Beyond the speed specified in this parameter, torque will be inversely proportional
to speed. Increasing this number will maximize the output voltage and, therefore,
maximize the horsepower. Lowering the number may improve dynamic
performance near base speed.

This parameter Parameter Range: U.005 to 7200 RPM *
selects the top speed
that the motor can
reach. Parameter Type: Configurable
P.005 Current Limit
U.002 Motor Poles
* To determine the upper limit of U.017, the drive compares the results of two
formulas and uses the lower value:
For FVC operation (U.001 = SE):
120 x 240
4 x sync speed or (drive uses lower value)
U.002
For SVC operation (U.001 = SE):
2 x sync speed or 120 x 240 (drive uses lower value)

U.002
120 x U.003
where sync speed =
U.002

injury.
Note that the drive limits the output frequency to the motor to 240 Hz.
Note the following about U.017:
• Increasing this number above Motor Nameplate RPM (U.005) will increase the
field weakening range.
• The range of the tunable parameter P.004 (Maximum Speed) is limited by the
value in U.017.
• For applications not requiring constant horsepower operation, U.017 should be

set equal to U.005 (Motor Nameplate RPM).

U.018 AC Line Volts
The phase-to-phase Parameter Range: 300 to 565 VAC
line voltage provided
to the drive input
power terminals. Parameter Type: Configurable
The value entered Refer also to parameters: N/A

should be within 10%
of actual line voltage.
U.019 Flux Current Regulator Proportional Gain

determines the
performance of the
magnetizing current Parameter Type: Tunable
regulator.
Refer also to parameters: U.020 Flux Current Regulator Integral Gain
For most
applications, it is
recommended that
changed.
U.020 Flux Current Regulator Integral Gain

determines the
performance of the
regulator.
Refer also to parameters: U.019 Flux Current Regulator Proportional Gain
For most
applications, it is
recommended that
changed.

U.021 Rotor Time Constant/ Fast Flux Up
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 to 9999 ms
determines the
performance of the
regulator.
For most
applications, it is
recommended that
changed.
For SVC operation,
this parameter is
used to enable the
fast flux-up feature.
For special motors or for motors with base speeds < 1150 RPM, the rotor time
constant must be calculated by evaluating equivalent motor circuit data as shown in
figure 4.14.
R1 X1 X2
Xm R2
Resistance Inductance
R1 = Stator X1 = Stator
R2 = Stator X2 = Rotor
Xm = Magnetizing
Figure 4.14 – Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram for Calculating Rotor Time Constant
To calculate the rotor time constant, use the following formula:

Rotor time constant = L / R2
Where: L = Lm + L2
Lm = Xm / 2 x 3.14 x 60
L2 = X2 / 2 x 3.14 x 60
Fast Flux-Up Feature (SVC Only)
The fast flux-up feature, available for drives configured for SVC operation only,
significantly reduces the delay between the initiation of a run command and the
actual motor shaft turning.
Setting U.021 to 0 enables the fast flux-up feature. Parameter U.031 (SVC Sync
Direction) must be set to OFF to use this feature.
Note that this parameter is not functional in versions 6.0 through 6.05.

U.022 Motor Nameplate Horsepower
This parameter Parameter Range: 0.3 to 600.0 HP
horsepower as it
nameplate.
U.023 Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable

This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Drive will not regulate the DC bus on a line dip
selects how the drive condition
responds to power ON = Drive will decelerate the motor to attempt to
loss (line dip hold up the DC bus on a line dip condition
condition).
This feature applies Parameter Type: Tunable
to SVC applications
only and is not Refer also to parameters: N/A
available if the drive
is configured as a
torque regulator.
If this feature is enabled and DC bus voltage drops below 80% of normal, the drive
decelerates the motor enough to maintain bus voltage. Alarm code LIL appears on
the display while the drive is regulating the DC bus. Note that the lighter the load,
the longer the power dip ride-through time can be. When input power is restored,
the drive ramps to the reference speed.
If this feature is enabled, and the DC bus voltage drops while the drive is stopped,
LIL will be displayed.
This parameter is not related to P.042 (Line Dip Ride-Through Time).

U.024 High DC Bus Avoidance Enable
This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Drive will not attempt to regulate the DC bus
selects how the drive on a high bus condition
responds to high bus ON = Drive will attempt to regulate the DC bus on a
voltage. high bus condition
This feature is not Default Setting: OFF
available if the drive
is configured as a
torque regulator. Refer also to parameters: P.002 Decel Time 1
P.018 Decel Time 2
If DC bus voltage exceeds a predetermined threshold, the drive generates a high

bus alarm (HIdc). If U.024 = ON, the drive attempts to regulate the bus to avoid a
high bus fault (HU). Note that this may extend the programmed deceleration time
(P.002, P.018). See table 5.1 in chapter 5 for the alarm thresholds.
Set this parameter to OFF if a dynamic braking unit is connected to the drive.
For SVC operation, drive speed may increase as much as 5% above the speed
reference in an attempt to decrease the DC bus voltage level.
U.025 Zero Speed Hold Time

This parameter Parameter Range: 0.0 to 655.0 seconds
selects the amount of
time for which zero
speed is held at the Parameter Type: Tunable
end of ramp stop
sequence.
ATTENTION: The motor is energized when the drive is operating at

zero speed. The user is responsible for ensuring safe conditions for
! operating personnel by providing suitable guards, audible or visual
alarms, or other devices to indicate that the drive is operating at zero
speed. Failure to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily
injury or loss of life.
This feature provides the capability to hold the motor at zero speed at the end of a
ramp stop for a user-specified amount of time (U.025). During the zero speed hold
time period, the running indicator remains on.
For FVC operation, a zero speed reference is applied for the time specified in
U.025, regulating torque based on load. Note that this will override the Minimum
Speed setting (P.003).
For SVC operation, magnetizing current is applied for the time specified in U.025.

U.026 Current Compounding Gain
specifies the gain
Default Setting: 0.0 (Current compounding disabled)
applied to the speed
PI output. This is Parameter Type: Tunable
used to generate the
Refer also to parameters: U.027 Inertia Compensation Gain
current compounding
U.028 Losses Compensation Gain
signal that is
subtracted from the
speed loop
reference.
Refer to the speed loop block diagram in Appendix G.
U.027 Inertia Compensation Gain

specifies the gain
Default Setting: 0.0 (Disable inertia compensation)
applied to the
selected inertia Parameter Type: Tunable
compensation source
Refer also to parameters: U.026 Current Compounding Gain
signal to produce the
inertia compensation
signal. The result is
added to the speed
PI output to produce
the torque reference
signal.
The inertia compensation signal can be either the S/Ramp (ramp) block rate output
(dv/dt), used for standalone applications, or a value provided directly from the
network option. Signal selection is controlled by a network register. No
corresponding parameter local to the drive is provided.
Inertia compensation can be used with or without an option board installed in the
drive. If a network option is not installed, network inertia compensation is not
enabled, the network is not active or is not the control source (P.000 = OP), inertia
compensation is supplied from the S/Ramp block rate output. The signal provided
from the network for inertia compensation is typically used to compensate for inertia
as well as all system losses.
Note that if the selected torque reference is not the speed loop output, then the
inertia compensation circuit does not apply. Refer to the speed loop block diagram
in Appendix G.

specifies the gain
Default Setting: 0.0 (Disable losses compensation)
applied to the speed
loop reference signal Parameter Type: Tunable
to generate the
Refer also to parameters: U.026 Current Compounding Gain
losses compensation
signal. The result is
added to the speed
PI output to produce
the torque reference
signal.
Losses compensation is the scaled output of the speed loop S/Ramp block (speed
reference). It is added to the speed loop output and the inertia compensation signal
to produce the final torque reference.
Refer to the speed loop block diagram in Appendix G.
U.030 SVC Slip Adjust

adjusts the slip
compensation to
match the operating Parameter Type: Tunable
temperature of the
motor.
This feature applies For SVC operation, in the absence of a speed feedback device, operation of the
to SVC operation speed loop is based on an estimated speed feedback. Estimated speed feedback is
only. based on knowing the slip of the motor, which changes with motor temperature.
This parameter is provided to accommodate various operating conditions.
For a cold motor, the typical value should be 0.80. For a hot motor, the value
should be 1.0.

U.031 SVC Sync Direction
When starting into a Parameter Range: OFF = Disable synchronization
rotating load is F = Search starts in motor forward direction
required, this r = Search starts in motor reserve direction
parameter selects
the direction in which Fr = Search starts in motor forward then reverse
the drive will search direction
in order to rF = Search starts in motor reverse then forward
synchronize to motor direction
speed. Default Setting: OFF
ATTENTION: When starting with search enabled, there will be a

several second delay, and the motor may drift in the forward and
! reverse direction, before the motor begins operating in the desired
direction even if reverse has been disabled in P.027. Stay clear of
rotating machinery. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
bodily injury.
Note that when Forward/Reverse Configuration (P.027) is set to 1, setting this

parameter to r, Fr, or rF may still cause the motor to operate in the reverse direction.
U.032 SVC Flux Current Regulator Gain

This parameter Parameter Range: 100 to 1500 radians/sec
specifies the gain of
the flux current
regulator. Parameter Type: Tunable
For most Refer also to parameters: U.012 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain
applications, it is U.013 Speed Regulator Integral Gain
recommended that U.030 SVC Slip Adjust
adjusted.
This parameter
applies to SVC
operation only.
On lower horsepower motors, the value can be increased to allow faster

acceleration and deceleration.

U.040 Outer Control Loop Feedback Source
This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Terminal strip analog input scaled
specifies what is (see Appendix F)
used as the outer 1 = Speed loop PI output (torque reference,
loop feedback signal. 4095 = 150% torque)
Default Setting: 0
Refer also to parameters: U.041 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Select
U.042 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Low Frequency
U.043 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Ratio
U.044 Outer Control Loop Reference Gain
U.045 Outer Control Loop Proportional Gain
U.046 Outer Control Loop Integral Gain
U.047 Outer Control Loop Trim Range Percentage
U.048 Outer Control Loop Proportional Trim Enable
The feedback signal is fed through a lead/lag block which can be configured as a
lead/lag, lag/lead, or null (bypassed) function using parameter U.041 (Outer Control
Loop Lead/Lag Select). See Appendix G for the outer control loop block diagram.
U.041 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Select

This parameter Parameter Range: 0 = Bypass
selects whether the 1 = Lead/lag
outer control loop
2 = Lag/lead
feedback lead/lag
block will operate as Default Setting: 0
a lead/lag, a lag/lead,
or a null function
(bypassed). Refer also to parameters: U.040 Outer Control Loop Feedback Source
See Appendix G for the outer control loop block diagram.

specifies the lead/lag
low break frequency
of the outer control Parameter Type: Tunable
loop feedback.
Refer also to parameters: U.040 Outer Control Loop Feedback Source
This parameter sets the lead break frequency if U.041 (Outer Control Loop
Lead/Lag Select) = 1 (lead/lag) or the lag break frequency if U.041 = 2 (lag/lead).
The upper limit may be restricted by the lead/lag ratio setting (U.043).

specifies the ratio
Default Setting: 10
between the lead/lag
low break frequency Parameter Type: Tunable
and high break
frequency of the
outer control loop
feedback lead/lag
block.
The high break frequency is determined by the value in parameters U.042 (Outer
Control Loop Lead/Lag Low Frequency) and U.043 as shown:
High break frequency = Low frequency x ratio = U.042 x U.043

This parameter Parameter Range: -5.000 to +5.000
specifies the gain to
be applied to the
reference entering Parameter Type: Tunable
the outer control
loop.

selects the
proportional gain of
the outer control loop Parameter Type: Tunable
PI amplifier.

selects the integral
gain of the outer
control loop PI Parameter Type: Tunable
amplifier.

This parameter Parameter Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Default Setting: 0.0 (OCL output signal has no effect on speed loop
of control the outer
reference)
control loop output
signal has on the Parameter Type: Tunable
speed loop
reference. It
represents a
percentage of Top
Speed (U.017).

This parameter Parameter Range: OFF = Disable proportional trim
enables the gain ON = Enable proportional trim
block on the output
of the outer control Default Setting: OFF
loop PI block. Parameter Type: Configurable
If U.048 = ON, a gain block scales the outer control loop output proportional to the
speed reference signal at the output of the S/Ramp block (normalized to top speed).
See figure 4.15. See Appendix G for the complete outer control loop block diagram.
This parameter limits the control the outer control loop has on the speed reference
during line start.
OCL trim range OCL Prop Trim

(U.047) Enable (U.048)
Off
PI G On
OCL output (to
Rst speed loop block
Top_spd
diagram, see
Div
Appendix G)
G
Speed ref S-curve
Mult
x block output
Figure 4.15 – Outer Control Loop Proportional Trim

CHAPTER 5
Troubleshooting the Drive
Using Error Codes
The drive can display two kinds of error codes, alarm and fault codes, to signal a
problem detected during self tuning or drive operation. Fault and alarm codes are
shown in tables 5.1 and 5.2. A special type of fault code, which occurs rarely, is the
fatal fault code. If the code you see is not in tables 5.1 or 5.2, refer to section 5.4.
Alarm Codes
An alarm condition is signified by a two- or three-letter code flashing on the display.

The drive will continue to operate during the alarm condition. The user should
investigate the cause of the alarm to ensure that it does not lead to a fault condition.
The alarm code remains on the display as long as the alarm condition exists. The
drive automatically clears the alarm code when the condition causing it is removed.
Fault Codes
A fault condition is also signified by a two-or three-letter code flashing on the

display. If a fault occurs, the drive coasts to stop and the RUNNING LED turns off.
The first fault detected is maintained flashing on the display, regardless of whether
other faults occur after it. The fault code remains on the display until it is cleared by
the operator using the STOP/RESET key or using the fault reset input from the
selected control source (P.000).
Error Log
The drive automatically stores all fault codes for faults that have occurred in the
system error log. The error log is accessible through the keypad, the OIM, or the
CS3000 software. There is no visual indication that there are faults in the log. You
must access the error log to view the faults.
The error log holds the 10 most recent faults that have occurred. The last fault to
occur is the first one to appear on the display when you access the error log. The
faults in the log are numbered sequentially. The most recent fault is identified with
the highest number (up to 9). Once the log is full, older faults are discarded from
the log as new faults occur.
For each entry in the error log, the system also displays the day and time that the
fault occurred. The day data is based on a relative 248-day counter (rolls over after
248.55). The time is based on a 24-hour clock. The first two digits of the clock data
represent hours. The last two digits represent minutes. The clock can be reset
using P.030 (Elapsed Time Meter Reset).
All entries in the error log and the day and time data are retained, even if power is
lost. Refer to section 5.3 for the procedure for accessing and clearing the error log
using the keypad.
Troubleshooting the Drive Using Error Codes 5-1

5.1. Identifying Alarm Codes and Recovering
GV3000/SE drive alarm codes are shown in table 5.1. Note that the alarm code will
only be displayed for as long as the problem exists. Once the problem has been
corrected, the alarm code will disappear from the display.
Table 5.1 – List of Alarm Codes
Alarm
Code Description Alarm Cause Corrective Action
Aln Analog input signal P.011 = 8, 9, 10, or 11 and the 4 to Verify that P,011 is set correctly.
loss 20 mA input is below 2 mA. Check that the analog input source
supply is >= 4 mA.
HIdc High DC bus voltage The DC bus is charged above the trip Increase the deceleration time in P.002,
threshold. (DC bus is above 371 VDC.) P.018.
Install optional snubber resistor braking
kit.
Verify that the AC input is within
specification. Install an isolation
transformer if required.
Check the actual line voltage against
U.018.
I-Ac V/Hz identification V/Hz identification procedure is Allow identification procedure to finish.
procedure active enabled and in progress. Press keypad STOP/RESET to cancel
identification procedure if desired.
I-En V/Hz identification H.020 = On; V/Hz identification Proceed with V/Hz identification
procedure enabled procedure has been enabled but procedure, start drive and allow
not started. procedure to begin. Display will change
to I-Ac when drive is started.
Change H.020 to OFF to cancel
identification and clear I-En if desired.
LIL Low AC input line AC input line is low. Adjust line voltage parameter (H.021 or
For SVC, indicates DC bus is being U.018) to match actual AC line voltage.
regulated. No corrective action is
required.
S-Ac Vector self-tuning Vector self-tuning is enabled and in Allow vector self-tuning procedure to
active progress. finish.
Press keypad STOP/RESET to cancel
vector self-tuning procedure if desired.
S-En Vector self-tuning U.008 = On; vector self-tuning has been Proceed with vector self-tuning, start
enabled enabled but not started. drive and allow self-tuning procedure to
begin. Display will change to S-Ac
when drive is started.
Change U.008 to OFF to cancel
self-tuning and clear S-En if desired.

5.2 Identifying Fault Codes and Recovering
discharged before touching any internal components. Failure to ob-
serve this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
GV3000/SE drive fault codes are shown in table 5.2. To clear a single fault that has
occurred so that the drive can be started again, correct any problems indicated by
the fault code and press the STOP/RESET key on the keypad, or assert the fault
reset from the selected control source (P.000). Because multiple faults can occur
and only the first will be displayed, you must access the error log in order to view all
of the faults that have occurred. See section 5.3 for instructions on how to view the
error log.
Table 5.2 – List of Fault Codes
Fault
Code Description Fault Cause Corrective Action
AIn Analog input signal P.011 = 4 or 5 and 4 to 20 mA analog Verify that P.011 is set correctly.
loss input is below 2 mA. Check that analog input source supply
>= 4 mA.
bYC Incorrect precharge Precharge initiated and incorrect Check the operation of the precharge.
status precharge status is returned.
CHS Default parameter During drive operation: Contact Reliance or replace Regulator
restore (checksum Regulator board failure. board.
error) After Regulator board replacement: Contact Reliance.
EC Earth current failure Unintentional grounding of the output. Check isolation between ground and
(ground fault) output terminals. Possible leakage,
current sensor defects; replace sensor.
EEr Non-volatile memory Failure on write to non-volatile Connect CS3000 software to upload
write failure memory. parameters or record by hand. Then
replace Regulator board. Parameter
values will be lost when power is cycled.
EL Encoder loss Drive is not detecting feedback from Check the connection between the
the encoder. encoder and the drive. Check the
encoder/motor coupling.
For SVC operation, conditions exist for For SVC operation, check motor data
more than 5 seconds that may result in parameters. Check U.006. Incorrect
an inability to complete a ramp-to-rest magnetizing current may be generated
stop. by performing self-tuning with a load
connected to the motor.
FL Function loss Function loss input on control terminal Check external interlocks at terminals
is opened. 16, 20.
HId High time Identification process for V/Hz has See H.019 for identification result.
identification aborted been aborted.
HIL High line voltage Input voltage more than 15% above Check actual line voltage against U.018
nominal. (Note that this is not tested or H.021.
for in 75-200 HP Power Modules
configured for vector control.)

Table 5.2 – List of Fault Codes (Continued)
Fault
HU High DC bus voltage DC bus voltage too high (capacitor Check inout line voltage; if necessary.
protection). add transformer.
Deceleration time too short. Increase deceleration time P.002/P.018/
P.023 versus Maximum Speed/Hz
(P.004). Install DB option with resistors.
IPL Input phase loss Voltage ripple on DC bus due to missing Verify that proper voltage is being appied
input phase or an imbalance between to the drive. Check all phases.
phases.
LU Low DC bus voltage DC bus voltage too low. Line dip too Check input voltage, line fuses. If
long (P.042). necessary, add transformer. Check value
of Ride-Through Time (P.042), Line
Voltage (H.021, U.018).
Input rectifier diodes defective. Check DC Bus voltage. If incorrect,
replace diode set.
nCL Network comm loss Communications with the AutoMax Check network cabling from network
network have been lost. master to network option board. Check
that network master is operating
properly.
nId Identification Drive started but Identification Reset fault. Perform Identification
Request not yet Result = Zero. Request. Restart drive.
performed (V/Hz
only)
OC Overcurrent (steady Output phase-to-phase short. Check isolation between each output line.
state). Bus voltage line-to-line. Check transistor modules for correct
Trips at 200 % rated output. If incorrect, possible board
current. defect; replace. Possible Hall effect
current sensor defective; replace.
Ground fault. Check isolation between ground and
output terminals. Possible leakage
current sensor defect; replace sensor.
Momentary overload. Check for motor overload; reduce load on
motor.
Bad motor. Check motor for correct operation.
Torque boost/ V/Hz too high (V/Hz). Check parameters H.001, H.002, and/or
H.003. Enable Identification Request
(H.020)
Motor unknown to regulator (V/Hz). Check that regulator was updated with
actual motor characteristics via
Identification Request (H.020).
Parameter settings (Vector). Check Encoder PPR (U.001), Motor
Poles (U.002), Base Frequency (U.003),
Motor Nameplate Amps (U.004),
Magnetizing Current (U.006), Speed
Regulator Prop. Gain (U.012).
Encoder wired incorrectly, wrong PPR. Check encoder wiring. Perform vector
self-tuning.
OCA Overcurrent (at Overcurrent condition occurred while See OC fault corrective actions.
acceleration) accelerating. Acceleration time too Increase acceleration time (P.001, P.017,
short. P.021).

Table 5.2 – List of Fault Codes (Continued)
Fault
OCb Overcurrent DC voltage too high. Check parameters H.006, H.007.
(at DC braking)
OCd Overcurrent (at Overcurrent condition occurred while See OC fault corrective actions. Increase
deceleration) decelerating. Deceleration time too deceleration time (P.002, P.018, P.022).
short.
OF Overfrequency Drive has exceeded maximum Vector: check parameters Encoder
allowable output frequency. PPR (U.001), Motor Poles (U.002), Base
Regenerating energy is too high. Frequency (U.003).
Stability or slip compensation circuit V/Hz: check DC bus voltage; increase
adds frequency reference. deceleration time. Check values
If H.016 ON, searching current is too Maximum Speed (P.004)/Overfreq.
high. Motor is too small. (H.022). Check slip compensation
(H.004).
If H.016 ON, check motor size versus
Power Module size, recheck setting of
P.005 (too high).
OH Drive Cooling fan failure. Check ambient temperature, cooling fan,
overtemperature minimum clearances around drive.
OL Motor overload Excess motor current. Vector: Check actual/Motor Rated
V/Hz: Torque boost too high, therm. Nameplate Amps (U.004)
overload level too low. V/Hz: Check actual current/Torque Boost
(H.003).
Check that Power Module is sized
correctly.
Reduce load on motor (for example, at
low frequency).
Excess load on motor, for example, at Check that Power Module is sized
too low speeds. correctly. Reduce load on motor (e.g., at
low frequency).
Loss of phase connection. Check output lines to the motor.
OPL Motor output phase Phase lost between drive and motor. Check connections and cable of all 3
loss phases and motor windings. Replace
any damaged cable.
OSP Overspeed RPM above 130% Maximum Speed Check Encoder PPR (U.001), Motor
(Vector only) (P.004), speed regulator response not Poles (U.002), Base Frequency (U.003),
optimized. Motor Nameplate RPM Speed (U.005).
Check Reg. Proportional (U.012) ,
Integral Gain (U.013).
PUc Missing Power Bad or disconnected cable between Check cables between Regulator board
Module ID Regulator and Power Module. and Power Module.
connector
PUn Power Module not Drive parameters have been restored to Power Module must be configured by
identified power-up defaults. Regulator has not Reliance service personnel.
been configured to match Power
Module.
PUo Drive power Power Module overload. Check load to Power Module.
electronic overload Too high DC Braking Current (H.007) or Check Power Module sizing versus
Torque Boost (H.003). application. Check DC Braking Current
value (H.007). Check Torque Boost
(H.003).

Table 5.2 List of Fault Codes (Continued)
Fault
SF Self-tuning status See parameter U.009
(Vector only)
SrL Communication Serial port communication cable. PC or Check connection cable and
loss between OIM communication port setup. communication port setup.
Regulator/PC/OIM
UAr Spurious host PC Regulator board failure. Replace Regulator board.
comm interrupt
UbS Asymmetrical bus Bad Power Module. Contact Reliance.
charge
5.3 Accessing, Reading, and Clearing the Faults in the Error

Log
The following procedure shows how to access and clear the error log. Note that you
cannot clear a single entry from the error log. The entire log, including all the fault
codes and the day and time stamp of each fault, will be cleared simultaneously
using this procedure.
Step 1. Press the PROGRAM key.
The First Menu General parameters are

displayed. The PROGRAM LED will turn on.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 2. Press the key until Err is displayed.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START

If no faults have occurred, Err will be

displayed again. If only one fault has
occurred, the fault code will be displayed as
AUTO Forward
SPEED RUNNING MAN Reverse the first entry in the log. If more than one
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS
Hz
JOG
AUTO
PROGRAM
RUN
JOG
fault has occurred, the first entry is the latest
Kw
TORQUE
FORWARD
REVERSE
fault that occurred.
STOP
RESET START
Step 4. Press the key or the key. The display steps through the error log
entries, which are numbered 0 through 9 (maximum).
The display shows the day stamp, which can

range from 0-248 days.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 6. Press the key.
The display shows the time stamp, which is

based on a 24-hour clock. Use the arrow
keys to move between the day and time
SPEED RUNNING
AUTO
MAN
Forward
Reverse data.
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 7. Press the PROGRAM key, which displays the error log entries again. The
display shows the error log entry viewed prior to or associated with the
time stamp.
Step 8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each additional error log entry to view the
time and date for each error log entry.

Step 9. When you have viewed all the entries, you should clear the error log.
Press the key while you are viewing any entry in the log until the
display shows CLr. Press ENTER to clear the error log. All entries will be
cleared.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 10. Err will be displayed again to indicate that the log is empty.
AUTO Forward
VOLTS REMOTE
AMPS JOG RUN
PROGRAM
Hz AUTO JOG
Kw FORWARD
TORQUE REVERSE
STOP
RESET START
Step 11. Press the PROGRAM key to access program mode.

5.4 Identifying Fatal Fault Codes and Recovering
Fatal fault codes are distinguished by the letter F preceding the code. They
normally indicate a malfunction of the microprocessor on the Regulator board. In
some cases, fatal fault codes can be reset and the drive can be restarted. Table 5.3
lists the fatal codes which can be reset. If any other fault code appears on the
display, you will need to replace the Regulator board.
If the fault code FUE appears in error log entry 0, it indicates a fatal fault occurred
before power was lost. Contact Reliance or observe the drive for subsequent fatal
errors before turning off power. Fatal fault codes are lost after power loss.
Table 5.3 – Fatal Fault Codes That Can Be Reset
Code Fault Description Fault Cause Corrective Action

F3 Encoder power-up Encoder voltage is less than Turn off power to the drive. Disconnect the
diagnostic error. 10 V. encoder wiring from the terminal strip. Turn
power to the drive back on.
If the F3 error does not occur again, the
problem is in the wiring between the drive
and the encoder.
If the F3 error does occur again, the problem
is in the Regulator board, which should be
replaced.
F 60 Option port identification The option board could not Check the ribbon cable between the
error. be identified by the Regulator board and the option board.
regulator. Refer to the appropriate option board
instruction manual for more information
about the option board.
F 61 Option board power-up Option board has failed one Check the ribbon cable between the
diagnostic failure. or more power-up Regulator board and the network option
diagnostics. board. Replace the option board if
necessary.
Refer to the appropriate option board
F 62 Option board runtime error. During operation, the option If intermittent, check for causes of noise, for
or board watchdog failed or proper grounding, and that outputs are not
F 26 handshaking with the exceeding rated current capacities.
GV3000/SE drive failed. Replace the option board if necessary.
Refer to the appropriate option board

APPENDIX A
Alphabetical Listing of Parameters
First Menu General Parameters

Accel Time (RAMP 1) ....................................................................................... P.001
Control Source .................................................................................................. P.000
Current Limit ...................................................................................................... P.005
Decel Time 1 (RAMP 1) .................................................................................... P.002
Maximum Speed ............................................................................................... P.004
Minimum Speed ................................................................................................ P.003
Second Menu Password ................................................................................... P.006
Second Menu General Parameters
Accel Time 2 (RAMP 2) .................................................................................... P.017
AUTO/MAN Key Disable ................................................................................... P.052
Carrier Frequency (kHz) ................................................................................... P.047
Country Defaults ............................................................................................... P.049
Decel Time 2 (RAMP 2) .................................................................................... P.018
Diagnostics Display ........................................................................................... P.091
Diagnostics Source ........................................................................................... P.090
Draw Gain Percentage ...................................................................................... P.016
Elapsed Time Meter .......................................................................................... P.029
Elapsed Time Meter Reset ............................................................................... P.030
Encoder Loss Enable ........................................................................................ P.039
Fault Auto Reset Attempts ................................................................................ P.043
Fault Auto Reset Time ...................................................................................... P.044
Forward/Reverse Configuration ........................................................................ P.027
Function Loss Response .................................................................................. P.026
Jog Ramp Accel Time ....................................................................................... P.021
Jog Ramp Decel Time ...................................................................................... P.022
Jog Speed Reference ....................................................................................... P.020
Level Sense Start Enable ................................................................................. P.054
Line Dip Ride-Through Time ............................................................................. P.042
Manual Reference Preset Enable ..................................................................... P.053
MOP Accel/Decel Time ..................................................................................... P.023
MOP Reset Configuration ................................................................................. P.024
Motor Overload Enable ..................................................................................... P.040
Motor Overload Type ........................................................................................ P.041
Network Connection Type ................................................................................. P.061
Network Drop Number ...................................................................................... P.060
Network Output Register 1 Source ................................................................... P.066
Option Port: Communication Loss Response ................................................... P.062
Option Port: Network Reference Source .......................................................... P.063
Option Port: Network Trim Reference Source .................................................. P.064
Option Port: Type and Version ......................................................................... P.065
Output Phase Loss Enable ............................................................................... P.045
Output Relay Configuration ............................................................................... P.013
Alphabetical Listing of Parameters A-1

Second Menu General Parameters
(continued)
Power Module Output Amps ............................................................................. P.095
Power Module Type .......................................................................................... P.099
Preset Speed 1 ................................................................................................. P.031
Preset Speed 2 ................................................................................................. P.032
Preset Speed 3 ................................................................................................. P.033
Preset Speed 4 ................................................................................................. P.034
Preset Speed 5 ................................................................................................. P.035
Preset Speed 6 ................................................................................................. P.036
Preset Speed 7 ................................................................................................. P.037
Preset Speed 8 ................................................................................................. P.038
Programming Disable ....................................................................................... P.051
Restore Defaults ............................................................................................... P.050
S-Curve Enable ................................................................................................. P.019
Software Version Number ................................................................................. P.098
Speed Display Scaling ...................................................................................... P.028
STOP/RESET Key Disable ............................................................................... P.055
Stop Type .......................................................................................................... P.025
Terminal Strip Analog Input Gain ...................................................................... P.010
Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure .............................................................. P.011
Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset .................................................................... P.009
Terminal Strip Analog Output Source ............................................................... P.012
Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure ............................................................. P.007
Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source .......................................................... P.008
Trim Gain Percentage ....................................................................................... P.015
Trim Reference Source ..................................................................................... P.014
Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation ...................................................................... P.048
Second Menu Volts/Hertz Parameters

AC Line Volts .................................................................................................... H.021
Avoidance Frequency Band 1 ........................................................................... H.011
Avoidance Frequency Enable ........................................................................... H.009
Avoidance Frequency Midpoint 1 ..................................................................... H.010
DC Braking Current ........................................................................................... H.007
DC Braking Enable ........................................................................................... H.005
DC Braking Start Frequency ............................................................................. H.006
DC Braking Time ............................................................................................... H.008
Identification Request ....................................................................................... H.020
Identification Result ........................................................................................... H.019
Input Power/Snubber Configuration .................................................................. H.017
Motor Nameplate Amps .................................................................................... H.002
Motor Nameplate Base Frequency ................................................................... H.001
Motor Nameplate Volts ..................................................................................... H.000
Overfrequency Limit .......................................................................................... H.022
Slip Compensation ............................................................................................ H.004
Sync Direction ................................................................................................... H.016
Torque Boost Voltage ....................................................................................... H.003
Volts/Hertz Curve Type ..................................................................................... H.018
A-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

Second Menu Vector Parameters
AC Line Volts .................................................................................................... U.018
Current Compounding Gain .............................................................................. U.026
Encoder PPR .................................................................................................... U.001
Field Weakening Start RPM .............................................................................. U.016
Flux Current Regulator Integral Gain ................................................................ U.020
Flux Current Regulator Proportional Gain ........................................................ U.019
High DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable .............................................................. U.024
Inertia Compensation Gain ............................................................................... U.027
Losses Compensation Gain .............................................................................. U.028
Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable ............................................................... U.023
Magnetizing Current .......................................................................................... U.006
Motor Nameplate Amps .................................................................................... U.004
Motor Nameplate Base Frequency ................................................................... U.003
Motor Nameplate Horsepower .......................................................................... U.022
Motor Nameplate RPM ..................................................................................... U.005
Motor Nameplate Volts ..................................................................................... U.007
Motor Poles ....................................................................................................... U.002
Motor Top Speed .............................................................................................. U.017
Outer Control Loop Feedback Select ............................................................... U.040
Outer Control Loop Integral Gain ...................................................................... U.046
Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Low Frequency ................................................. U.042
Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Ratio .................................................................. U.043
Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Select ................................................................ U.041
Outer Control Loop Proportional Gain .............................................................. U.045
Outer Control Loop Proportional Trim Enable .................................................. U.048
Outer Control Loop Reference Gain ................................................................. U.044
Outer Control Loop Trim Range Percentage .................................................... U.047
Rotor Time Constant/Fast Flux Up ................................................................... U.021
Speed Regulator Integral Gain ......................................................................... U.013
Speed Regulator Proportional Gain .................................................................. U.012
SVC Slip Adjust ................................................................................................. U.030
SVC Sync Direction .......................................................................................... U.031
SVC Flux Current Regulator Gain .................................................................... U.032
Torque Reference Source ................................................................................. U.000
Torque Regulator Integral Gain ........................................................................ U.015
Torque Regulator Proportional Gain ................................................................. U.014
Torque Self-Tune Enable .................................................................................. U.008
Torque Self-Tune Result ................................................................................... U.009
Zero Speed Hold Time ...................................................................................... U.025
Second Menu RMI Parameters

Analog Input Gain ............................................................................................. r.011
Analog Input Offset ........................................................................................... r.010
Analog Output 1 Gain ....................................................................................... r.003
Analog Output 1 Offset ..................................................................................... r.002
Analog Output 1 Source .................................................................................... r.001
Current Detection Hysteresis ............................................................................ r.060
Current Detection Level 1 ................................................................................. r.057
Digital Input Configuration ................................................................................ r.030
Alphabetical Listing of Parameters A-3

Second Menu RMI Parameters
(continued)
Digital Output 1 Configuration ........................................................................... r.031
Digital Output 1 Delay Time .............................................................................. r.040
Frequency Input Gain ....................................................................................... r.016
Frequency Input Offset ..................................................................................... r.015
Frequency Input Sample Period ....................................................................... r.014
Low Speed Detection Level .............................................................................. r.056
PI Regulator Integral Gain ................................................................................ r.022
PI Regulator Offset ........................................................................................... r.020
PI Regulator Proportional Gain ......................................................................... r.021
Relay Output 1 (NO) Configuration ................................................................... r.035
Relay Output 1 Delay Time ............................................................................... r.044
Relay Output 2 (NO/NC) Configuration ............................................................ r.036
Relay Output 3 (NO/NC) Configuration ............................................................ r.037
Speed Detection Hysteresis Band .................................................................... r.053
Speed Detection Level 1 ................................................................................... r.050
Torque Detection Hysteresis............................................................................. r.066
Torque Detection Level 1 .................................................................................. r.063
Torque/Current Limit Source............................................................................. r.025
Refer to the Remote Meter Interface board manual (D2-3341) for the RMI parameter
descriptions.
A-4 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

APPENDIX B
Record of User Parameter Settings
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Date
First P.000 Control Source
Menu P.001 Accel Time 1 (RAMP 1)
General P.002 Decel Time 1 (RAMP 1)
P.003 Minimum Speed
P.004 Maximum Speed
P.005 Current Limit
P.006 Second Menu Password
Second P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure

Menu P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source
General P.009 Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset
P.011 Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure
P.012 Terminal Strip Analog Output Source
P.013 Output Relay Configuration
P.014 Trim Reference Source
P.015 Trim Gain Percentage
P.016 Draw Gain Percentage
P.019 S-Curve Enable
P.020 Jog Speed Reference
P.021 Jog Ramp Accel Time
P.023 MOP Accel/Decel Time
P.024 MOP Reset Configuration
P.025 Stop Type
P.026 Function Loss Response
P.027 Forward/Reverse Configuration
P.029 Elapsed Time Meter
P.030 Elapsed Time Meter Reset
P.039 Encoder Loss Enable
Record of User Parameter Settings B-1

Second P.040 Motor Overload Enable
Menu P.041 Motor Overload Type
General P.042 Line Dip Ride Through Time
(cont'd) P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts
P.044 Fault Auto Reset Time
P.045 Output Phase Loss Enable
P.048 Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation
P.050 Restore Defaults
P.051 Programming Disable
P.052 AUTO/MAN Key Disable
P.054 Level Sense Start Enable
P.055 STOP/RESET Key Disable
P.060 Network Drop Number
P.061 Network Connection Type
P.062 Option Port: Communication Loss Response
P.063 Option Port: Network Reference Source
P.064 Option Port: Network Trim Reference Source
P.065 Option Port: Type and Version
P.066 Network Output Register 1 Source
P.090 Diagnostics Source
P.091 Diagnostics Display
P.098 Software Version Number
P.099 Power Module Type
B-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

Second H.000 Motor Nameplate Volts
Menu H.001 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency
Volts/ H.002 Motor Nameplate Amps
Hertz H.003 Torque Boost Voltage
H.004 Slip Compensation
H.005 DC Braking Enable
H.007 DC Braking Voltage
H.008 DC Braking time
H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable
H.010 Avoidance Frequency Midpoint 1
H.011 Avoidance Frequency Band 1
H.016 Sync Direction
H.020 Identification Request
H.021 AC Line Volts

Second U.000 Torque Reference Source
Menu U.001 Encoder PPR
Vector U.002 Motor Poles
U.009 Torque Self-Tune Result
U.012 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain
U.013 Speed Regulator Integral Gain
U.014 Torque Regulator Proportional Gain
U.015 Torque Regulator Integral Gain
U.016 Field Weakening Start RPM
U.018 AC Line Volts
U.019 Flux Current Regulator Proportional Gain
U.020 Flux Current Regulator Integral Gain
U.021 Rotor Time Constant/Fast Flux Up
U.022 Motor Nameplate Horsepower
U.023 Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable
U.024 High DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable
U.025 Zero Speed Hold Time
U.026 Current Compounding Gain
U.030 SVC Slip Adjust
U.031 SVC Sync Direction
U.032 SVC Flux Current Regulator Gain
U.040 Outer Control Loop Feedback Source

Second r.001 Analog Output 1 Source
Menu r.002 Analog Output 1 Offset
RMI r.003 Analog Output 1 Gain
r.004 Analog Output 2 Source
r.005 Analog Output 2 Offset
r.006 Analog Output 2 Gain
r.007 Analog Output 3 Source
r.008 Analog Output 3 Offset
r.009 Analog Output 3 Gain
r.010 Analog Input Offset
r.011 Analog Input Gain
r.014 Frequency Input Sample Period
r.015 Frequency Input Offset
r.016 Frequency Input Gain
r.020 PI Regulator Offset
r.021 PI Regulator Proportion Gain
r.022 PI Regulator Integral Gain
r.025 Torque/Current Limit Source
r.030 Digital Input Configuration
r.031 Digital Output 1 Configuration
r.035 Relay Output 1 (NO) Configuration
r.036 Relay Output 2 (NO/NC) Configuration
r.037 Relay Output 3 (NO/NC) Configuration
r.040 Digital Output 1 Delay Time
r.044 Relay Output 1 Delay Time
r.050 Speed Detection Level 1
r.053 Speed Detection Hysteresis Band
r.056 Low Speed Detection Level
r.057 Current Detection Level 1
r.060 Current Detection Hysteresis
r.063 Torque Detection Level 1
r.066 Torque Detection Hysteresis

APPENDIX C
Power Module-Dependent Parameter
Default Values (460 V Series)
Second Menu General Parameters (USA Defaults)

Parameter Parameter Power Module
No. Name 75V4060 100V4060 125V4060 150V4060 200V4060
P.047 Carrier 4 4 4 4 4
Frequency (kHz)
Note: The drives can use any carrier frequency of 2, 4 or 8 kHz. But when 8 kHz of carrier frequency is used, the drive's rated output current is
automatically limited to 80%.
Second Menu Volts/Hertz Parameters (USA Defaults)

No. Name 75V4060 100V4060 125V4060 150V4060 200V4060
H.002 Motor Nameplate 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0
Amps
Second Menu Vector Parameters (USA Defaults)

No. Name 75V4060 100V4060 125V4060 150V4060 200V4060
U.004 Motor Nameplate 96.0 124.0 156.0 180.0 240.0
Amps
U.005 Motor Nameplate 1780 1780 1780 1780 1785
RPM
U.006 Magnetizing Current 49.0 46.0 35.0 35.0 35.0
U.012 Speed Reg. Prop. 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
Gain
U.013 Speed Reg. Int. Gain 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
U.014 Torque Reg. Prop. 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40
Gain
U.015 Torque Reg. Int. Gain 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
U.016 Field Weakening 1780 1780 1780 1780 1785
Start RPM
U.017 Motor Top Speed 1780 1780 1780 1780 1785
U.019 Flux Current Reg. 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
Prop. Gain
U.020 Flux Current Reg. Int. 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
Gain
U.021 Rotor Time Constant/ 250 250 250 250 250
Fast Flux Up
U.022 Motor Nameplate HP 75.0 100.0 125.0 150.0 200.0
U.032 SVC Flux Current 600 550 500 450 400
Reg. Gain
Power Module-Dependent Parameter Default Values C-1

C-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06
APPENDIX D
Default Parameter Settings
First and Second Menu General Parameters

Parameter USA EUROPE JAPAN
Parameter Name
No. (P.049 = USA) (P.049 = EUr) (P.049 = JPn)
P.000 Control Source LOCL LOCL LOCL
P.001 Accel Time 1 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.002 Decel Time 1 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.003 Minimum Speed P.048 = U-H 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.004 Maximum Speed P.048 = U-H 60.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 52.7 Hz
P.048 = UEC 1722 RPM 1400 RPM 1500 RPM
P.005 Current Limit P.048 = U-H 100 100 100
P.048 = UEC 150 150 150
P.006 Second Menu Password Read only Read only Read only
P.007 Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure 0 0 0
P.008 Terminal Strip Speed Reference Source 0 0 0
P.009 Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset 0 0 0
P.010 Terminal Strip Analog Input Gain 1.000 1.000 1.000
P.011 Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure 2 2 2
P.012 Terminal Strip Analog Output Source 0 0 0
P.013 Output Relay Configuration 0 0 0
P.014 Trim Reference Source 0 0 0
P.015 Trim Gain Percentage 0.0 0.0 0.0
P.016 Draw Gain Percentage 0.0 0.0 0.0
P.017 Accel Time 2 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.018 Decel Time 2 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.019 S-Curve Enable P.048 = U-H ON ON ON
P.048 =UEC OFF ON OFF
P.020 Jog Speed Reference P.048 = U-H 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz
P.048 =UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.021 Jog Ramp Accel Time 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.022 Jog Ramp Decel Time 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.023 MOP Accel/Decel 20.0 20.0 20.0
P.024 MOP Reset Configuration 0 0 0
P.025 Stop Type 0 0 0
P.026 Function Loss Response 0 0 1
P.027 Forward/Reverse Configuration 0 0 0
Default Parameter Settings D-1

Second Menu General Parameters (Continued)
Parameter Name (P.049 = EUr)
No. (P.049 = USA) (P.049 = JPn)
P.028 Speed Display Scaling P.048 = U-H 1800 1500 1
P.048 = UEC 1 1450 1500
P.029 Elapsed Time Meter Read only Read only Read only
P.030 Elapsed Time Meter Reset OFF OFF OFF
P.031 Preset Speed 1 P.048 = U-H 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz 5.0 Hz
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.048 = UEC 150 RPM 150 RPM 150 RPM
P.039 Encoder Loss Enable OFF OFF OFF
P.040 Motor Overload Enable ON ON ON
P.041 Motor Overload Type FC FC FC
P.042 Line Dip Ride-Through Time 5.0 5.0 5.0
P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts 0 0 0
P.044 Fault Auto Reset Time 8 8 8
P.045 Output Phase Loss Enable ON ON ON
P.047 Carrier Frequency (kHz) 4 4 4
P.048 V/Hz or Vector Regulation U-H U-H UEC
P.049 Country Defaults USA EUr JPn
P.050 Restore Defaults OFF OFF OFF
P.051 Programming Disable 0 0 0
P.052 AUTO/MAN Key Disable OFF ON OFF
P.053 Manual Reference Preset Enable OFF OFF OFF
P.054 Level Sense Start Enable OFF OFF OFF
P.055 STOP/RESET Key Disable OFF OFF OFF
P.060 Network Drop Number 1 1 1
P.061 Network Connection Type 0 1 0
P.062 Option Port: Communication Loss 0 0 0
1 : Parameter default is Power Module-dependent.
D-2 GV3000/SE 230 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

Second Menu General Parameters (Continued)
Parameter Name
No. (P.049 = USA) (P.049 = EUr) (P.049 = JPn)
P.063 Option Port: Network Reference Source 0 0 0
P.064 Option Port: Network Trim Reference Source 0 0 0
P.065 Option Port: Type and Version Read only Read only Read only
P.066 Network Output Register 1 Source 0 0 0
P.090 Diagnostics Source 0 0 0
P.091 Diagnostics Display Read only Read only Read only
P.095 Power Module Output Amps Read only Read only Read only
P.098 Software Version Number Read only Read only Read only
P.099 Power Module Type Read only Read only Read only
Second Menu Volts/Hertz Parameters

Parameter Name
No. (P.049 = USA) (P.049 = EUr) (P.049 = JPn)
H.000 Motor Nameplate Volts 460 380 320
H.001 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency 60.0 50.0 51.0
H.002 Motor Nameplate Amps 1 1 1
H.003 Torque Boost Voltage 0.5 0.5 0.5
H.004 Slip Compensation 0.0 0.0 0.0
H.005 DC Braking Enable OFF OFF OFF
H.006 DC Braking Start Frequency 1.0 1.0 1.0
H.007 DC Braking Current 10 10 10
H.008 DC Braking Time 3.0 3.0 3.0
H.009 Avoidance Frequency Enable OFF OFF OFF
H.010 Avoidance Frequency Midpoint 1 0.0 0.0 0.0
H.011 Avoidance Frequency Band 1 2.0 2.0 2.0
H.016 Sync Direction OFF OFF OFF
H.017 Input Power/Snubber Configuration 0 0 0
H.018 Volts/Hertz Curve Type 0 0 0
H.019 Identification Result 0 0 0
H.020 Identification Request OFF OFF OFF
H.021 AC Line Volts 460 380 400
H.022 Overfrequency Limit 90.0 65.0 75.0
Default Parameter Settings D-3

1
Second Menu Vector Parameters

Parameter Name
No. (P.049 = USA) (P.049 = EUr) (P.049 = JPn)
U.000 Torque Reference Source 0 0 0
U.001 Encoder PPR 1024 2048 2048
U.002 Motor Poles 4 4 4
U.003 Motor Nameplate Base Frequency 60.0 50.0 51.0
U.004 Motor Nameplate Amps 1 1 1
U.005 Motor Nameplate RPM 1 1450 115000
U.006 Magnetizing Current 1 1 1
U.007 Motor Nameplate Volts 460 380 320
U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable OFF OFF OFF
U.009 Torque Self-Tune Result Read only Read only Read only
U.012 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain 5.00 5.00 5.00
U.013 Speed Regulator Integral Gain 5.00 15.00 5.00
U.014 Torque Regulator Prportional Gain 0.40 0.40 0.40
U.015 Torque Regulator Integral Gain 200.00 200.0 200.0
U.016 Field Weakening Start RPM 1 1450 1500
U.017 Motor Top Speed 1 1450 1500
U.018 AC Line Volts 460 380 400
U.019 Flux Current Regulator Proportional Gain 0.15 0.15 0.15
U.020 Flux Current Regulator Integral Gain 150.0 50.0 50.0
U.021 Rotor Time Constant/Fast Flux Up 250 250 250
U.022 Motor Nameplate Horsepower 1 1 1
U.023 Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable OFF OFF OFF
U.024 High DC Bus Fault Avoidance Enable OFF OFF OFF
U.025 Zero Speed Hold Time 0.0 0.0 0.0
U.026 Current Compounding Gain 0.000 0.000 0.000
U.027 Inertia Compensation Gain 0.000 0.000 0.000
U.028 Losses Compensation Gain 0.000 0.000 0.000
U.030 SVC Slip Adjust 1.00 1.00 1.00
U.031 SVC Sync Direction OFF OFF OFF
U.032 SVC Flux Current Regulator Gain 1 1 1
U.040 Outer Control Loop Feedabck Source 0 0 0
U.041 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Select 0 0 0
U.042 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Low Frequency 1.00 1.00 1.00
U.043 Outer Control Loop Lead/Lag Ratio 10 10 10
U.044 Outer Control Loop Reference Gain 1.000 1.000 1.000
U.045 Outer Control Loop Proportional Gain 2.00 2.00 2.00
U.046 Outer Control Loop Integral Gain 2.00 2.00 2.00
U.047 Outer Control Loop Trim Range Percentage 0.0 0.0 0.0
U.048 Outer Control Loop Proportional Trom Gain OFF OFF OFF
D-4 GV3000/SE 230 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

APPENDIX E
Configuring the Digital Inputs
When the RMI Board Is
Installed in the Drive
The GV3000/SE Regulator board contains three user-configurable digital inputs.

Parameter P.007 (Terminal Strip Digital Inputs Configure) and P.008 (Terminal Strip
Speed Reference Source) are used to specify how these digital inputs are used.
If an optional Remote Meter Interface (RMI) board is installed in the drive, four
additional digital inputs are available. RMI parameter r.030 is used to specify how
the RMI digital inputs are used.
The Regulator board digital inputs and the RMI digital inputs are not permitted to be
used for the same functions. One parameter cannot be set to a value which requires
resources (digital inputs) or a duplication of function which is used or defined by the
value of another parameter.
The acceptable values for P.008 are based on the value selected for P.007 and by
the value selected for r.030:
• P.008 is limited by P.007 and r.030

• P.007 is limited by P.008
• r.030 is limited by P.008
First determine what functions are to be assigned to the three digital inputs on the
Regulator board. Once you have determined this, select the appropriate settings for
P.007 and P.008. As shown in the following tables, the desired value for P.008
must be permissible by both the P.007 and r.030 values. If either column
indicates the value is not acceptable, then P.008 cannot be set to that value. Use
the following tables to help determine the appropriate settings for your application.
Refer to chapter 4 in this manual for a complete description of parameters P.007

and P.008 and their corresponding options. Refer to the RMI board instruction
manual (D2-3341) for a complete description of parameter r.030 and its options.
Configuring the Digital Inputs When the RMI Board Is Installed in the Drive E-1
Summary of Options for P.007, P.008, and r.030
P.007 Options P.008 Options
DIGIN 6 DIGIN 7 DIGIN 8 DIGIN 6 DIGIN 7 DIGIN 8
0= FWD/REV RAMP 1/2 REM/LOC 0= Not used Not used Not used
1= Not used FWD/REV RAMP 1/2 1= MOP MOP Not used
2= Not used FWD/REV REM/LOC 2= 2 Presets Not used Not used
3= Not used RAMP 1/2 REM/LOC 3= 4 Presets Not used
4= Not used Not used FWD/REV 4= 8 Presets
5= Not used Not used RAMP 1/2 5= Analog ref and Not used Not used
6= Not used Not used REM/LOC 1 preset
7= Not used Not used Not used 6= Analog ref and 3 presets Not used
8= FWD/REV TRQ/SPD REM/LOC 7= Analog ref and 7 presets
9= Not used TRQ/SPD REM/LOC
10 = Not used TRQ/SPD FWD/REV
11 = Not used TRQ/SPD RAMP 1/2
12 = Not used Not used TRQ/SPD
r.030 Options
RMI DIGIN 1 RMI DIGIN 2 RMI DIGIN 3 RMI DIGIN 4
0= Ref 1/2 A/F Aux 2 Aux 1
1= Ref 1/2 A/F Aux 2 PI Enable
2= Ref 1/2 MOP MOP Aux 1
3= Ref 1/2 MOP MOP PI Enable
4= Ref 1/2 2 Presets Aux 2 Aux 1
5= Ref 1/2 2 Presets Aux 2 PI Enable
6= Ref 1/2 4 Presets 4 Presets Aux 1
7= Ref 1/2 4 Presets 4 Presets PI Enable
8= Ref 1/2 8 Presets 8 Presets 8 Presets
Option Comparison Tables

Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable Acceptable
P.008 P.008 P.007 r.030
If P.007 = Values If r.030 = Values If P.008 = Values If P.008 = Values
0 0 0 0-6 (all) 0 0-12 (all) 0 0-8 (all)
1 0, 2, 5 1 0-6 (all) 1 4-7, 12 1 0, 1, 4-8
2 0, 2, 5 2 0, 2-6 2 1-7, 9-12 2 0-3
3 0, 2, 5 3 0, 2-6 3 4-7, 12 3 0-3
4 0-3, 5, 6 4 0, 1 4 7 4 0-3
5 0-3, 5, 6 5 0, 1 5 1-7, 9-12 5 0-3
6 0-3, 5, 6 6 0, 1 6 4-7, 12 6 0-3
7 0-7 (all) 7 0, 1 7 7 7 0-3
8 0 8 0, 1
9 0, 2, 5
10 0, 2, 5
11 0, 2, 5
12 0-3, 5, 6
E-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

Example 1
Functions to be assigned to Regulator board terminal strip:
• 2 preset speeds
• TRQ/SPD
• FWD/REV
Function to be assigned to RMI terminal strip:
• MOP
To configure the Regulator board digital inputs for the above functions, P.007
should be set to 10, and P.008 should be set to 2. Using the Option Comparison
Tables, a setting in P.007 of 10 allows P.008 to be set to 2.
To configure the RMI terminal strip for the MOP function, r.030 should be set to 2.
Using the Option Comparison Tables, this setting is acceptable if P.008 is set to 2.
Therefore, these functions can be easily accommodated by the four digital inputs
by setting P.007 = 10, P.008 = 2, and r.030 = 2.
Example 2
Functions to be assigned to the Regulator board terminal strip:
• 4 preset speeds
• TRQ/SPD
• FWD/REV
Function to be assigned to the RMI terminal strip:
• MOP
To configure the Regulator board digital inputs for the above functions, P.007
should be set to 10, and P.008 should be set to 3. Using the Option Comparison
Tables, a setting of 10 in P.007 does not allow a setting of 3 for P.008. This is
because the parameter settings both require the use of digital inputs 7 (the TRQ/
SPD and FWD/REV functions use digital inputs 7 and 8; the four presets use
digital inputs 6 and 7).
In this case, the function to be assigned to the Regulator board terminal strip
need to be re-assessed (for example, reduce the number of preset speeds to 2).
Configuring the Digital Inputs When the RMI Board Is Installed in the Drive E-3
E-4 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06
APPENDIX F
Using the Terminal Strip Analog Input
An analog reference input is provided at terminals 12 through 15 on the drive's

Regulator board. This input accepts either a +/–10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA signal. The
analog-to-digital conversion provides 10-bit plus sign resolution and a digital range
of +/–1023.
The analog input can be used as a reference for:
• Speed reference (P.000, P.007/P.008)

• Trim reference (P.014)
• Torque reference (vector control only) (U.000)
• Outer control loop feedback (U.040)
Parameters P.009 (Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset) and P.010 (Terminal Strip
Analog Input Gain) are used to adjust the converted value for any external signal
errors. Parameter P.011 (Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure) is used to specify
the type of signal used and to invert the converted value, if required.
Three quantities are calculated from the analog input value: scaled, speed
normalized, and torque reference. The scaled value is used for the outer control
loop (OCL) feedback. The speed normalized value is used for either speed or trim
reference. The torque reference value is used for torque reference for vector
control. Figure F.1 shows the relationship between the input and the calculated
values.
In addition, the input, with only the offset applied (P.009), is used for 4-20mA loss
detection and 0-10V start/stop control.
P.011 = 12 A/D Start Command

T3 A/D Stop Command
Analog Input + Analog Input Scaled

G x4
(+/- 1023) 4095 @ 10V (20 mA)
+
P.004
P.011 T2
P.009 P.010
+ Analog Input
P.011 G Normalized to Speed
+ P.004 @ 10V (20 mA)
T1
Loss
Detect P.003
Aln Fault
Aln Alarm Analog Input Torque
x4 Reference
T1: P.091 value when P.090 = 3 150% iq @ 10V (20 mA)
T2: P.091 value when P.090 = 9
T3: P.091 value whne P.090 = 10
Figure F.1 – Terminal Strip Analog Input
Using the Terminal Strip Analog Input F-1

F.1 Configuring the Analog Input
Parameter P.011 is used to specify the type of input and whether it is to be inverted
after it is converted by the drive. The parameter setting should coincide with the
position of jumper J4 on the Regulator board. For example, if a voltage input is
applied, J4 should be set to +/- 10 VDC and P.011 should be between 0 and 3. If a
current input is applied, J4 should be set to 0 to 20 mA and P.011 should be
between 4 and 11.
If P.011 is odd, the digital value of the input is inverted resulting in a positive input
inverted to a negative reference value, and a negative input converted to a positive
reference value. Note that the Forward/Reverse Configuration parameter (P.027) is
applied after the analog input.
For the 4 to 20 mA input can be configured to generate a drive fault or a drive alarm
if the input falls below 2 mA. Refer to the P.011 parameter description for more
information.
F.2 Using the Analog Input as Speed or Trim Reference

When the analog input is used as speed or trim reference, the analog input value
will be interpreted internally as shown in table F.1 and described below:
Table F.1 – Analog Input Conversion Scaling for Speed or Trim Reference
Analog Input
Value Corresponding Internal Value
+10 VDC (20 mA) P.004 (Maximum Speed)
0 VDC (0 mA) P.003 (Minimum Speed)
-10 VDC –P.004 (Negative Maximum Speed; reverse or 0, see P.027)
• The maximum positive analog input value (+10 VDC or 20 mA) corresponds to
the value specified as the maximum speed of the drive (P.004).
• The maximum negative analog input value (-10 VDC) corresponds to -P.004
(reverse or 0, see P.027).
• The minimum analog input value (0 VDC or 0 mA; 4 mA if P.011 = 4, 5, or 8-11)
corresponds to the value specified as the minimum speed of the drive (P.003).
• When P.011 = 0 or 1, there is no hysteresis provided around zero on the input.
Therefore, if the input fluctuates around zero, the reference will toggle between
positive minimum speed (+P.003) and negative minimum speed (-P.003).
Note that the analog input is scaled based on the values entered in P.003 and
P.004. If these parameters are changed while the drive is running, and the analog
input is used as the speed or trim reference, the speed reference will change even
though the input value has not.
F-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

Figure F.2 illustrates how the analog signal is scaled internally by the drive when it
is used as the speed or trim reference. The solid line indicates the conversion when
the non-inverted state is selected (P.011 is even). The dashed line indicates the
conversion when the inverted state is selected (P.011 is odd).
+Max Spd
(P.004)
+Min Spd 0 VDC

(P.003) 0 to 4 mA
-10 vdc +10 vdc

-Min Spd
(P.003) +20 ma
-Max Spd
(P.004)
Terminal Strip Analog Input
P.011 is even = not inverted

P.011 is odd = inverted
Figure F.2 – Analog Input Conversion Scaling (Speed or Trim Reference)
F.2.1 Adjusting for External Signal Errors Using the Offset and Gain
Parameters
When the analog input is used for speed or trim reference, parameters P.009
(Terminal Strip Analog Input Offset) and P.010 (Terminal Strip Analog Input Gain)
can be used to compensate for any offset or gain errors in the external circuitry.
The value in P.009 is first added to the converted 10-bit value and then the gain is
applied. If an offset or gain adjustment is needed, the offset should be adjusted
first, with the minimum input applied, and the gain adjusted last, with the maximum
input applied.
To remove a positive external offset, enter a negative value into P.009. In most
cases, the offset is left at the default value of zero and is only adjusted to counteract
external circuitry errors.
The adjustment range for P.009 is -900 to +900. For 0 to 10 V (or -10 V to +10 V)
input, a value of +1 equals an offset of approximately 10 mV. For 0 to 20 mA input,
a value of +1 equals an offset of approximately 20 µA.

To adjust the offset (P.009):
Step 1. Verify that the analog input is configured as the speed reference control
source (P.000 = rE or LOCAL and AUTO is selected), P.008 = 0, and
U.000 = 0).
Step 2. Display the converted value of the analog input using the selected speed
reference display mode. (Refer to chapter 3 for the procedure for
displaying the selected speed reference.)
Step 3. Adjust P.009 to achieve the value of minimum speed when the analog input
is set to the position where minimum speed is desired.
The gain parameter is typically used to compensate for saturation or insufficient

voltage from the input source.
Unless the input is a 4 to 20 mA signal, before adjusting the gain, set P.011 to 0 to
avoid clamping the reference at 0. After adjusting P.009 and P.010, change P.011
to reflect the intended input.
To adjust the gain (P.010):

Step 1. Verify that the analog input is configured as the speed reference control
source (P.000 = rE or LOCAL and AUTO is selected), P.008 = 0, and
U.000 = 0).
Step 2. Display the converted value of the analog input using the selected speed
reference display mode. (Refer to chapter 3 for the procedure for
displaying the selected speed reference.)
Step 3. Adjust P.010 to achieve the value of maximum speed when the analog
input is set to the position where maximum speed is desired. For
example, if a speed pot is used, rotate the pot to its maximum position.
The adjustment range for P.010 is 0.100 to 5.000.
F.3 Using the Analog Input for Vector Torque Reference

(U.000 = 1)
When the analog input is used as the vector control torque reference (U.000 = 1),
the analog input value will be interpreted internally as shown in table F.2 and
described below. Note that P.009 and P.010 are not used when U.001=1.
Parameter P.011 is used only to enable the analog input signal loss detection
feature.
Table F.2 – Analog Input Conversion Scaling for Torque Reference
Analog Input
Value Corresponding Internal Value
+10 VDC (20 mA) Positive torque limit of the drive. (+150% of the rated motor
torque.)
0 VDC (0 mA) Zero torque reference.
-10 VDC Negative torque limit of the drive. (-150% of the rated motor
torque.)

• The maximum positive analog input value (+10 VDC or 20 mA) corresponds to
the positive torque limit of the drive (+150% of the rated motor torque)
• The maximum negative analog input value (-10 VDC) corresponds to the
negative torque limit of the drive (-150% of the rated motor torque).
• The minimum analog input value (0 VDC or 0 mA) corresponds to zero torque
reference.
Refer to the GV3000/SE drive hardware reference manual for terminal location,
wiring guidelines, and jumper settings.
F.4 Using the Analog Input to Start and Stop the Drive
ATTENTION: The drive may inadvertently start due to the effects of

temperature or electrical noise on the analog input when the analog
! input is configured to start and stop the drive (P.011 = 12), and the
following conditions are true:
• P.000 = rE
• The function loss, stop, and start inputs on the terminal strip are all
closed.
The user is responsible for:
• providing suitable notification to operating personnel that this feature

is being used and the drive could start at any time.
• ensuring that the inadvertent starting of the driven equipment will

equipment.
• ensuring that the input wiring has been installed according to IEEE
Standard 518 to minimize electrical noise.

loss of life.
ATTENTION: Due to the effect of temperature on the analog input, the

possibility exists that the stop threshold cannot be reached. The
application must rely on the terminal strip stop and function loss inputs
as the alternate methods of stopping the drive. Failure to observe this
Important: To reduce the effects of electrical noise on the analog

input, maintain physical separation between the analog
input signal wiring and any noise sources including
power and/or control wiring. The use of shielded
twisted-pair cable with the shield terminated at one point
only is recommended for the analog input.

Setting P.011 (Terminal Strip Analog Input Configure) = 12 configures the analog
input as a 0-10 VDC input and to start and stop the drive based on the analog input
value:
• The drive will start when the input becomes greater than the start threshold and all
other permissive conditions are met.
• The drive will stop when the input becomes less than or equal to the stop
threshold.
Refer to figure F.3
On state
Off state
Analog Input (0 - 10 VDC)
Stop Start
threshold threshold
Default = Default =
0.20 VDC 0.33 VDC
Figure F.3 - Hysteresis Band Created by the Start and Stop Threshold (Default Configuration)
Important: The terminal strip start input then becomes another stop function and
start permissive condition:
• When the start input is open, the drive will stop and remain stopped.
• The start input must be closed to allow the drive to start.
The control source must be the terminal strip (P.000 = rE) to use this feature.
The converted analog input value, after the offset parameter (P.009) has been
applied, can be viewed in P.091 (Diagnostics Display) when P.090 (Diagnostics
Source) is set to 10. This is the value against which the stop and start threshold
values are compared to determine the appropriate input start/stop action.
F.4.1 Adjusting the Stop and Start Thresholds

The start threshold defaults to 0.33 VDC (nominally) and the stop threshold defaults
to 0.20 VDC (nominally) when the Power Module is identified (P.998/P.999).
These thresholds can be viewed and adjusted using parameters P.090 (Diagnostics
Source) and P.091 (Diagnostics Display).
Setting P.090 to 11 selects the analog input stop threshold for viewing and
modifying in parameter P.091.
Setting P.090 to 12 selects the analog input start threshold for viewing and
modifying in parameter P.091.

Note that the default threshold values are not stored when P.050 (Restore Defaults)
is set to ON.
F.4.1.1 Stop Threshold Range

The default value of stop threshold is 20 A/D counts, which corresponds to 0.20
VDC (nominal).
The stop threshold minimum value is 5 counts. The stop threshold maximum value
is 1023 counts.
If the stop threshold is greater than the start threshold, the stop will take
precedence. In other words, if the analog input is less than or equal to the stop
threshold, the drive will stop regardless of the start threshold.
F.4.1.2 Start Threshold Range

The default value of the start threshold is 33 A/D counts, which corresponds to 0.33
VDC (nominal).
The start threshold minimum value is 0 counts. The start threshold maximum value
is 2000 counts.
F.4.2 Using the Level Sense Start Enable Feature and the
Analog Input Start/Stop Feature
The level sense start enable feature, configured with parameter P.054 (Level Sense
Start Enable), can be used with the analog input start/stop feature.
If the drive is configured for edge sense start (P.054 = 0), then the analog input
must transition from the off state to the on state while all permissive conditions are
met to start the drive.
If the drive is configured for level sense start (P.054 = 1), the drive will start
whenever the analog input is in the on state and all permissive conditions are met.
Note, however, that pressing the STOP key on the keypad/display will require a
subsequent off-state to on-state transition on the analog input to restart the drive.
Regardless of the value in P.054 (Level Sense Start Enable), if the analog input is
in the off state, the drive will stop and remain stopped.

APPENDIX G
Drive Regulation Overview
The GV3000/SE digital drive provides vector or volts/hertz regulation of AC motors.

Parameter P.048 (Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation) is used to select the type of
regulation for the application.
Volts/Hertz Regulation (P.048 = U-H)
Volts/hertz regulation provides general purpose open loop AC drive control. It does
not use an encoder feedback device. In this type of control, the regulator maintains
a programmed ratio of voltage to an output frequency, which provides constant or
variable motor torque across a wide speed range. An internal function generator
calculates the output motor voltage based on requested frequency and
user-specified motor characteristics. The control loop output switches the power
device gates, generating a pulse-width-modulated (PWM) waveform to the motor.
Figure G.1 shows a block diagram of the V/Hz regulator.
Vector Regulation (P.048 = UEC)
Vector regulation allows dynamic open- or closed-loop performance in an AC drive

similar to that achieved with a DC drive. Torque is constant across the motor's base
speed range in both forward and reverse directions. The drive uses two digital
control loops, speed and torque, to obtain vector performance. An outer control
loop is also available. The speed loop executes every 5 ms. The outer control loop
executes every 20 ms.
The speed loop reference can be an internal or an external source. For flux vector
control (FVC), speed loop feedback is provided by an encoder attached to the
motor's shaft. For sensorless vector control (SVC), speed feedback is estimated
based on motor parameters. The speed loop provides inertia compensation, losses
compensation, and current compounding.
The torque will vary to maintain the motor at the requested speed. The torque
control loop output controls the switching on and off of the power devices,
generating a pulse-width-modulated (PWM) waveform to the motor.
Figure G.2 shows a block diagram of the flux vector regulator. Figure G.3 shows a
block diagram of the sensorless vector regulator. Figures G.4 and G.5 shows detail
of the reference and speed loop portions of the vector regulator.
The optional outer control loop (OCL) acts as a trim to the speed loop reference
signal. Figure G.6 shows a block diagram of the outer control loop portion of the
vector regulator.
If a network board is installed, the OCL reference comes from the network trim
reference register based on P.064 (Option Port: Network Trim Reference Source) as
defined for each network type. (Refer to the specific network board instruction
manual for more information on P.064.)
Drive Regulation Overview G-1

If a Remote Meter Interface (RMI) board is installed, P.064 is used to select the OCL
reference as follows for FVC/SVC applications only:
• 0 = RMI analog input
• 1 to 8 = Preset speed 1 to 8 (P.031 to P.038), respectively
If no option board is installed, P.064 is used to select the OCL reference for FVC/
SVC applications only:
• 0 = Preset speed 8 (p.038)
• 1 to 8 = Preset speed 1 to 8 (P.031 to P.038), respectively
The OCL feedback is either the drive's scaled terminal strip analog input (default) or
the speed loop PI output (user option). The feedback is fed through a lead/lag block
which can be configured as a lead/lag, lag/lead, or null (bypass) function.
If a network option board is installed in the drive, the OCL enable signal is controlled
by a bit in the drive control word.
If an RMI board is installed, the OCL enable signal is controlled by the RMI digital
input (configured for RMI PI regulator enable) or by the same internal signal used to
control the speed loop enable signal. (Refer to the r.030 parameter description in
the RMI instruction manual, D2-3341, for more information.)
If there is no option board installed, the OCL is enabled when the drive is running
(that is, the speed and torque controllers are active) and is disabled if the drive is
stopped.
If the drive is running and the OCL enable signal is on (closed), the outer loop will
operate. If the enable signal is off (open) or the drive is not running, the outer loop
is held in reset.
G-2 GV3000/SE 460 VAC Drive, Software Reference Version 6.06

q
European
European Headquar
Headquarter
terss SA/NV
SA/NV, Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 06 00, Fax (32) 2 663 06 40
Reliance Electric Standar

Standard
d Drives Business, 24800 Tungsten Road, Cleveland, OH 44117, USA, Tel: (1) 888 374 8370, Fax (216) 266 7095
Publication D2-3391-5 - March 2001 © 2001 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
(This page intentionally left blank)
GV3000/SE AC Drive
ControlNet Network Communication
Option Board
M/N 2CN3000

!
The thick black bar shown on the outside margin of this page will be used throughout this instruction manual to
signify new or revised text or figures.
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with the construction and operation of this
equipment and the hazards involved should install, adjust, operate, and/or service this equipment.
! Read and understand this instruction manual in its entirety before proceeding. Failure to observe
ATTENTION: The drive is at line voltage when connected to incoming AC power. Disconnect,
lockout, and tag all incoming power to the drive before performing installing any option kits. Failure
to observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
disconnected. After disconnecting input power, wait five minutes for the DC bus capacitors to
discharge and then check the voltage with a voltmeter to ensure that the DC bus capacitors are
ATTENTION: The drive contains ESD- (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies.
Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the drive.
Erratic machine operation and damage to, or destruction of, equipment can result if this procedure
is not followed. Failure to observe this precaution can result in bodily injury.
ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.

PLC, GV3000/SE, ReSource, and Reliance are are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
©2001 Rockwell International Corporation
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 About the ControlNet Network Communication Option Board......................... 1-1
1.2 Where to Find Additional Information .............................................................. 1-3
1.3 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric....................................................... 1-3
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 1 to 5HP@460VAC Drives............ 2-4
2.2 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 7.5 to 10HP@460VAC Drives ....... 2-8
2.3 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 1 to 20HP@230VAC Drives ........ 2-12
2.4 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 30 to 100HP@230VAC and
75 to 200 HP@460VAC Drives ..................................................................... 2-16
2.5 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 15 to 25 HP and 25 to 60HP @
460VAC Drives.............................................................................................. 2-21
2.6 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 50 to 100 HP and 100 to 150 HP
@ 460VAC Drives ......................................................................................... 2-26
2.7 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 200 to 400HP@460VAC Drives.. 2-31
2.8 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 2 to 43 Amp GV3000/SE
Bookshelf Drives............................................................................................ 2-34
2.9 Connecting the GV3000/SE Drive to a ControlNet Network.......................... 2-41
2.10 Connecting a Programming Device to the Option Board’s Network
Access Port ................................................................................................... 2-42
Chapter 3 Setting Up the GV3000/SE Drive

3.1 Setting the Control Type (P.048) ..................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Setting the Node Number (P.060) ................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Setting the Control Source (P.000).................................................................. 3-2
3.4 Setting the Run/Program Response (P.061) ................................................... 3-3
3.5 Setting the Communication Loss Response (P.062) ....................................... 3-4
3.6 Setting the Network Output Register Sources P.066 to P.069) ....................... 3-6
3.7 Option Port: Type and Version (P.065) ........................................................... 3-7
3.8 Network Reference Source (P.063) and Network Trim Reference
Source (P.064) ................................................................................................ 3-7
Chapter 4 Programming the Drive

4.1 About ControlNet Network Communication ..................................................... 4-1
4.2 Configuring Drive Reference and Feedback Data as Scheduled Transfers .... 4-1
4.2.1 Configuring Scheduled Data Transfers ................................................. 4-2
4.2.2 Programming Scheduled Drive Reference Data ................................... 4-3
4.2.3 Using Scheduled Drive Feedback Data ................................................ 4-4
4.3 Using Unscheduled Transfers ......................................................................... 4-7
4.3.1 Programming the MSG Instruction in a PLC-5 ...................................... 4-7
4.3.2 About MSG Instruction Timing .............................................................. 4-8
4.3.3 About the Files You Can Access........................................................... 4-8
4.3.4 Using the Drive Parameters Data (N10:X) ............................................ 4-9
4.3.5 Using the Drive Display Data (N11:X) ................................................... 4-9
4.3.6 Using the Drive Reference and Feedback Data (N12:X) .................... 4-10
4.3.7 Using the Write Status File (N20:X) to Troubleshoot a Drive
Parameter Write Command................................................................. 4-10
Contents I
Chapter 5 Register Map
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Diagnostic LEDs...............................................................................................6-1
6.2 Communication Error Codes............................................................................6-2
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index ...........................................................................................................................Index-1
II GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board

List of Figures
Figure 1.1 – ControlNet Network Communication Option Board ............................. 1-2
Figure 2.1 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1 to 5HP @ 460 VAC) ............................. 2-5
Figure 2.2 – 1 to 5HP @ 460VAC GV3000/SE Drive .............................................. 2-6
Figure 2.3 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (7.5 to 10HP) ............................................ 2-9
Figure 2.4 – 7.5 to 10HP @ 460VAC GV3000/SE Drive ....................................... 2-10
Figure 2.5 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1 to 20HP @ 230VAC) .......................... 2-13
Figure 2.6 – 1 to 20HP @ 230 VAC GV3000/SE Drive........................................... 2-14
Figure 2.7 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (30 to 100HP@230VAC and
75 to 200 HP @ 460VAC Drives)....................................................... 2-17
Figure 2.8 – Location of Terminal Cover and Regulator Board Cover in 75 to
200 HP (460 VAC) and 30 to 100 HP (230 VAC) Drives.................... 2-18
Figure 2.9 – Regulator Board’s Connections to Option Board, Keypad, and
Base Board......................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2.10 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (15 to 25 HP @ 460VAC) ..................... 2-22
Figure 2.11 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (25 to 60 HP @ 460VAC) ..................... 2-23
Figure 2.12 – GV3000/SE Drive (15 to 25 and 25 to 60 HP @ 460VAC) .............. 2-24
Figure 2.13 – 50 to 100 HP Drive Components and Locations .............................. 2-27
Figure 2.14 – 100 to 150 HP Drive Components and Locations ............................ 2-29
Figure 2.15 – GV3000/SE Drive (200 to 400 HP)................................................... 2-32
Figure 2.16 – 2 to 15 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives ...................................... 2-36
Figure 2.17 – 24 to 30 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives .................................... 2-37
Figure 2.18 – 43 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives ............................................. 2-38
Figure 2.19 – 24 to 30 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drive (Cover and Front
Panel Removed)............................................................................... 2-39
Figure 2.20 – Installing the ControlNet Option Board ............................................. 2-40
Figure 2.21 – Connecting a GV3000/SE Drive to the ControlNet Network............. 2-42
Figure 3.1 – Signal Selection for Network Output Registers .................................... 3-7
Figure 4.1 – An Example of a MSG Instruction in a PLC-5 ...................................... 4-7

Figure 4.2 – Drive Information Map .......................................................................... 4-9
Contents III
IV GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
List of Tables
Table 2.1 – Locating the Appropriate Installation Procedure.................................... 2-1

Table 2.2 – Model Numbers for 1 to 5HP@460VAC Drives.................................... 2-4
Table 2.3 – Model Numbers for 1 to 20HP@230VAC Drives ................................ 2-12
Table 2.4 – Model Numbers for 30 to 100HP@230VAC and 75 to 200 HP
@460VAC Drives ............................................................................... 2-16
Table 2.5 – Model Numbers for 15 to 60HP @460VAC Drives ............................. 2-21
Table 2.6 – Model Numbers for 2 to 15 Amp and 24 to 43 Amp Drives ................. 2-34
Table 4.1 – Network Update Time Components....................................................... 4-1

Table 4.2 – ControlNet Scheduled Traffic Configuration Information ....................... 4-2
Table 4.3 – Scheduled Drive Reference Data .......................................................... 4-3
Table 4.4 – Scheduled Drive Feedback Data ........................................................... 4-5
Table 4.5 – Signals That Can Be Displayed in Words 2 - 5...................................... 4-6
Table 4.6 – MSG Configuration Information ............................................................. 4-8
Table 5.1 – File N10:X (Drive Read/Write Parameters)............................................ 5-1

Table 5.2 – File N11:X (Drive Display Data (Read Only)) ........................................ 5-6
Table 5.3 – File N12:X (Drive Reference and Feedback Data) ................................ 5-7
Table 6.1 – Health LED ............................................................................................ 6-1

Table 6.2 – Communications LEDs .......................................................................... 6-2
Table 6.3 – Communication Error Codes ................................................................. 6-2
Contents V
VI GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
This manual describes the GV3000/SE™ ControlNet™ Network Communication

Option Board (M/N 2CN3000). This board lets you operate and monitor a GV3000/SE
drive over the ControlNet network.
For normal operation, the GV3000/SE drive can be completely controlled using the
Network Option board. The only connections you need are a network interface
connection, hardwired emergency stop, and three-phase input and output power
wiring. Start, stop, reset, fault codes, and complete control can be done over the
ControlNet network.
1.1 About the ControlNet Network Communication

Option Board
The ControlNet Network Communication Option Board makes the GV3000/SE drive a
node on the ControlNet network. It is a printed circuit board assembly that mounts
inside a GV3000/SE drive and connects to the drive’s Regulator board using a ribbon
cable. The Network Option board is powered from the standard drive power supply.
The Network Option board is equipped with flash memory that lets you easily update
the board with the latest firmware revisions without having to remove the board from
the drive. An RS-232C serial port lets you connect a serial programming device to the
Network Option board for updating the board’s flash memory.
The Network Option board connects to the ControlNet network using two BNC
connectors that provide for redundant communication. You can connect a
programming device for accessing nodes using the Network Access Port, which is an
RJ-45 connector.
Three LEDs provide information to you about the board. Refer to chapter 6 for
descriptions of how the LEDs function.
See figure 1.1 for the locations of the connectors and LEDs.
Introduction 1-1
Ribbon Connector
to Regulator Board
J6
B A
NORM
BOOT
LEDs
ControlNet Network RS-232 Connector

Access Port
ControlNet Network Connectors
Figure 1.1 – ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
1-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board

1.2 Where to Find Additional Information
You must be familiar with all the instruction manuals that describe your system
configuration. These manuals can include:
• GV3000/SE AC General Purpose (Volts/Hertz) and Vector Duty Drive Software
Start-Up and Reference Manual (D2-3359)
• GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Installation, and Troubleshooting
(D2-3360)
• GV3000/SE AC General Purpose (Volts/Hertz) and Vector Duty Bookshelf Drive
Software Start-Up and Reference Manual (D2-3426)
• GV3000/SE AC Bookshelf Drive Hardware Reference, Installation, and
Troubleshooting (D2-3427)
• ControlNet Network System Overview (1786-2.9)
• ControlNet Cable System Component List (AG-2.2)
• ControlNet Cable Planning and Installation Manual (1786-6.2.1)
• ControlNet Coax Tap Installation Manual (1786-5.7)
• ControlNet Network Access Cable Installation Instructions (1786-2.6)
• ControlNet Repeater Installation Instructions (1786-5.8)
You can obtain the ControlNet manuals listed above from The Automation Bookstore
at http://www.theautomationbookstore.com.
1.3 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric

manual, contact your local Reliance Electric sales office. For technical assistance, call
1-800-726-8112.
Introduction 1-3
CHAPTER 2
Installation
Contact Reliance if the drive installation must be in compliance with the European
Community Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards.
The ControlNet option board installation procedure differs depending on the drive
type. Use table 2.1 to locate the appropriate procedure for your drive.
Table 2.1 – Locating the Appropriate Installation Procedure
Rating GV3000/SE Model Number Use the Procedure in Section …
1 HP 1V21xx 2.3
1V24xx
1 HP 1V41xx 2.1
1V44xx
2 HP 2V21xx 2.3
2V24xx
2 HP 2V41xx 2.1
2V44xx
3 HP 3V21xx 2.3
3V24xx
3 HP 3V41xx 2.1
3V44xx
5 HP 5V21xx 2.3
5V24xx
5 HP 5V41xx 2.1
5V44xx
7.5 HP 7V21xx 2.3

7V22xx
7.5 HP 7V41xx 2.2

7V42xx
10 HP 10V21xx 2.3
10V22xx
10 HP 10V41xx 2.2
10V42xx
15 HP 15V21xx 2.3
15V22xx
Installation 2-1
15 HP 15V41xx 2.5
15V42xx
20 HP 20V21xx 2.3
20V22xx
20 HP 20V41xx 2.5
20V42xx
25 HP 25G41xx 2.5
25G42xx
25V41xx
25V42xx
30 HP 30V20xx 2.4
30 HP 30V41xx 2.5
30V42xx
40 HP 40V20xx 2.4
40 HP 40V41xx 2.5
40V42xx
50 HP 50R41xx 2.6
50 HP 50T41xx 2.6
50 HP 50V20xx 2.4
50 HP 50V41xx 2.5
50V42xx
60 HP 60G41xx 2.5
60G42xx
60 HP 60V20xx 2.4
75 HP 75R41xx 2.6
75 HP 75T41xx 2.6
75 HP 75V20xx 2.4
75 HP 75V40xx 2.4
100 HP 100V20xx 2.4
100 HP 100V40xx 2.4

125 HP 125R41xx 2.6
125 HP 125V40xx 2.4
150 HP 150V40xx 2.4

200 HP 200V40xx 2.4

200 HP 200V41xx 2.7

250 HP 250V41xx 2.7
300 HP 300V41xx 2.7
350 HP 350V41xx 2.7

400 HP 400V41xx 2.7
2 to 15 Amp 31ER40xx 2.8

31ET40xx
38ER40xx
38ET40xx
55ER40xx
55ET40xx
85ER40xx
85ET40xx
126ER40xx
126ET40xx
150ER40xx
150ET40xx
24 to 30 Amp 240ER40xx 2.8

240ET40xx
300ER40xx
300ET40xx
43 Amp 430ER40xx 2.8

430ET40xx
Installation 2-3
2.1 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in
1 to 5HP@460VAC Drives

ATTENTION: The drive is at line voltage when connected to incoming
AC power. Disconnect, lock out, and tag all incoming power to the drive
before performing the following procedure. Failure to observe this
minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge and then check the
ATTENTION: The drive contains ESD- (Electrostatic Discharge)
sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required
when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the drive. Erratic machine
operation and damage to, or destruction of, equipment can result if this
procedure is not followed. Failure to observe this precaution can result
in bodily injury.
Use this procedure to install the ControlNet option board in the drives listed in
table 2.2.
Table 2.2 – Model Numbers for 1 to 5HP@460VAC Drives
1V41xx 3V41xx
1V44xx 3V44xx
2V41xx 5V41xx
2V44xx 5V44xx
If the drive is panel-mounted, this procedure will be easier to perform if the drive is
removed from the panel.
Unless otherwise indicated, keep all hardware that is removed. You will need it for
reassembly. This includes screws, lock washers, and rivets.
Important: Read and understand the warning labels on the outside of the drive
before proceeding.

Step 1. Shut Down the Drive
Step 1.1 Disconnect, lock out, and tag all incoming power to the drive.
Step 1.2 Wait five minutes for the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
Step 1.3 Remove the cover by loosening the four cover screws.
Important: Read and understand the warning labels on the inside of the drive before
proceeding.
Step 2. Verify that the DC Bus Capacitors are Discharged

Step 2.1 Use a voltmeter to verify that there is no voltage at the drive’s AC input
power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
Step 2.2 Ensure that the DC bus capacitors are discharged. To check
DC bus potential:
a. Stand on a non-conductive surface and wear insulated gloves.
b. Use a voltmeter to measure the DC bus potential at the DC bus power
terminals as shown in figure 2.1.
+ – + –
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 1 0V 1 0 COM U /T1 V/T2 W/T3

Input Leads Volts
Figure 2.1 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1 to 5HP @ 460 VAC)
Step 3. Remove the Keypad Bracket from the Drive

Step 3.1 Record connections to the Regulator board terminal strip if they must be
disconnected to remove the keypad bracket.
Step 3.2 Use a magnetic screwdriver to remove the three M4 x 10 screws that fasten
the bottom of the keypad support bracket to the drive heat sink.
Important: The keypad support bracket is connected to the drive by wiring. Do not lift
the bracket completely out of the drive to prevent damage to wiring.
Step 3.3 Spread the retaining clips on the 26-conductor Regulator board ribbon
cable connector to disconnect it from the Current Feedback board. The
Current Feedback board is located on the right below the keypad.
Step 3.4 Move the keypad support bracket aside.
Step 3.5 Pinch the retaining clip that is through the center of the Current Feedback
board and carefully pull out the Current Feedback board.
Step 3.6 Unplug the internal fan assembly power connector (CONN7) from the drive.
Installation 2-5
Step 4. Install the ControlNet Option Board in the Keypad Bracket
Refer to figure 2.2 for component locations.
Top View
ControlNet Option
Board
Regulator Board Current Feedback

Board
Front View Side View
Figure 2.2 – 1 to 5HP @ 460VAC GV3000/SE Drive
Step 4.1 Remove the ControlNet option board from its anti-static wrapper.
Step 4.2 Align the key on the connector of the ControlNet option board ribbon cable
with the key on the Regulator board connector. Press the ribbon cable
connector in until it locks into position.
Step 4.3 Route the 26-conductor ribbon cable for the Current Feedback board out of
the side of the keypad bracket.
Step 4.4 Align the ControlNet option board on the four mounting tabs on the keypad
bracket. Make sure that the ribbon cable is not pinched between the keypad
bracket and the ControlNet option board.
Step 4.5 Fasten the right side of the ControlNet option board to the keypad bracket.
Use the two metal M3 screws and lock washers for grounding.
Important: You must use the lock washers to properly ground the option board.
Improper grounding of the option board can result in erratic operation of
the drive.

Step 4.6 Fasten the left side of the ControlNet option board to the keypad bracket
using the two plastic rivets.
Step 5. Reinstall the Keypad Bracket in the Drive

Step 5.1 Reconnect the internal fan assembly power connector (CONN7) to the
drive. Align the key on the connector with the slot in the receptacle. Press
the connector into position.
ATTENTION: Proper alignment of the Current Feedback board is critical.

Verify that the connector pins on the Current Feedback board are
! correctly aligned with their corresponding connectors on the drive. Failure
to observe this precaution can result in bodily injury.
Step 5.2 Reinstall the Current Feedback board. Carefully align the two sets of
connector pins on the Current Feedback board with their matching
connectors on the drive. Gently press the board into place. The board
should go in easily. If you feel resistance, a pin might be bent or misaligned.
Recheck alignment and retry installation.
Step 5.3 Inspect the Current Feedback board connector thoroughly for bent or
misaligned pins.
Step 5.4 Align the keypad support bracket with the mounting holes in the drive heat
sink. Fasten the bracket with the three M4 x 10 screws removed earlier.
Step 5.5 Align the Regulator board’s 26-conductor ribbon cable connector with the
Current Feedback board connector. Press it in until it locks into position.
Step 5.6 Route the Network Drop Cable through the left-most opening at the bottom
of the drive.
Step 5.7 Connect the brown wire to terminal 1 of the 2-connector terminal strip.
Connect the white wire to terminal 2.
Step 5.8 Reconnect any wiring that was removed from the Regulator board.
Step 5.9 NEMA 4X/12 drives only: Before installing the cover, check that the gaskets
on the cover are flat and within the gasket channels.
Step 5.10 Reinstall the cover. Align all cover screws into the heat sink before
tightening any of them.
To maintain the integrity of NEMA 4X/12 drives, sequentially tighten the
cover screws to ensure even compression of the gaskets. Do not exceed
2.2 Nm (20 in-lb) of torque on these screws.
This completes the hardware installation of the ControlNet option board. Do not
remove the lockout and tag until you have completed section 2.9, which provides
instruction on connecting to the ControlNet network.
Installation 2-7
7.5 to 10HP@460VAC Drives

in bodily injury.
Use this procedure to install the ControlNet option board in drives with model numbers
7V41xx, 7V42xx, 10V41xx, or 10V42xx.
before proceeding.

proceeding.

DC bus potential:
terminals shown in figure 2.3.
+ – + –

Input Leads Volts
Figure 2.3 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (7.5 to 10HP)

Step 3.2 Loosen the thumb screw on the left side of the keypad bracket. Hold the
bracket on the left and lift the bracket up and to the left to separate it from
the keypad support bracket.
Important: The bracket is connected to the drive by wiring. Do not attempt to lift the
bracket out completely as this can damage or pull out wiring. Tie up or
support the bracket to prevent damage to the wiring.
Step 3.3 Spread the retaining clips on the 26-conductor Regulator board ribbon
cable connector to disconnect it from the Current Feedback board. The
Current Feedback board is located on the right below the keypad.
Installation 2-9
Top View
Current Feedback Board

Network Option Board
Regulator Board Front View
Side View
Figure 2.4 – 7.5 to 10HP @ 460VAC GV3000/SE Drive
Step 4.3 Route the 26-conductor ribbon cable for the Current Feedback board out of
the side of the keypad bracket.
the drive.

Step 4.7 Reconnect the keypad bracket to the keypad support bracket by inserting
the mounting tabs into the slots in the support bracket and tightening the
thumb screw.
Step 4.8 Align the Regulator board’s 26-conductor ribbon cable connector with the
Current Feedback board connector. Press it in until it locks into position.
Step 5. Reinstall the Keypad Support Bracket in the Drive

of the drive.
Installation 2-11

in bodily injury.
table 2.3.
Table 2.3 – Model Numbers for 1 to 20HP@230VAC Drives
1V21xx 7V21xx
1V24xx 7V22xx
2V21xx 10V21xx
2V24xx 10V22xx
3V21xx 15V21xx
3V24xx 15V22xx
5V21xx 20V21xx
5V24xx 20V22xx
before proceeding.

proceeding.

DC bus potential:
+ – + –

Input Leads Volts
Figure 2.5 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1 to 20HP @ 230VAC)

Step 3.2 Use a magnetic screwdriver to remove the M4 x 10 screws that fasten the
bottom of the keypad support bracket to the drive heat sink.
Step 3.3 Spread the retaining clips on the Regulator board ribbon cable (on the right
side) to disconnect it from the Base Board.
Step 3.4 Remove the keypad bracket. Place it with the keypad down on a flat
surface. If you cannot lay it flat, tie it up to prevent damage to wiring.
Installation 2-13

Step 4.3 Route the other ribbon cable out of the side of the keypad bracket.
the drive.
Keypad Bracket
Regulator Board
Terminal Strip
Power Terminal
Strip
Figure 2.6 – 1 to 20HP @ 230 VAC GV3000/SE Drive

Step 5.1 Place the keypad support bracket back into position. Use a magnetic
screwdriver to fasten it to the heatsink with the screws removed earlier.
Step 5.2 Realign the 26-conductor ribbon cable connector with the connector inside
the slot in the keypad support bracket. Carefully press the ribbon cable
connector in until the retaining clips lock into place.
of the drive.
Installation 2-15
30 to 100HP@230VAC and 75 to 200 HP@460VAC
Drives

in bodily injury.
table 2.4.
Table 2.4 – Model Numbers for 30 to 100HP@230VAC and 75 to 200 HP@460VAC Drives
30V20xx 100V20xx
40V20xx 100V40xx
50V20xx 125V40xx
60V20xx 150V40xx
75V20xx 200V40xx
75V40xx
before proceeding.

DC bus potential:

DC Bus
Volts
P (+) N (-)
R S T
GND
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
Figure 2.7 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (30 to 100HP@230VAC and 75 to 200 HP @ 460VAC Drives)
Step 3.1 If the drive has:
• A Regulator board cover and terminal cover: Remove the three M4

screws from the Regulator board cover. Remove the cover. See
figure 2.8.
• A terminal cover only: If you have this type of drive, this procedure is
easier to perform if you lay the drive on its side. Remove the side cover
from the drive. Use a long magnetized screwdriver to unfasten the four
screws that hold the keypad bracket in.
Installation 2-17
Figure 2.8 – Location of Terminal Cover and Regulator Board Cover in 75 to 200 HP (460 VAC) and 30 to 100 HP (230 VAC) Drives
Step 3.3 Remove the terminal cover, which is below the keypad and fastened with
two M4 screws. See figure 2.8.
Step 3.4 Pull the keypad assembly partly out of the drive. Spread the retaining clips
on the Regulator board ribbon cable (on the right side) to disconnect it from
the Base Board. See figure 2.9.
Step 3.5 Remove the keypad bracket. Place it with the keypad down on a flat
surface. If you cannot lay it flat, tie it up to prevent damage to wiring.

Regulator Board
Front
Ribbon Cable
Ribbon Cable Connecting
Connecting Regulator Board and
Regulator Board and Option Board
Base Board Top View Network
To Base Board
Option Board
Back Side of
Metal Screw
Regulator Board Insulator
Ribbon Cable
Connector to
Connect Base
Board
Ribbon Cable
Connector to
Ribbon Cable Connect Option
Connector to Board
Connect Keypad
Rear View of Regulator Board

Plastic Rivet Terminal Strip
Figure 2.9 – Regulator Board’s Connections to Option Board, Keypad, and Base Board
Refer to figures 2.8 and 2.9.

Step 4.3 Route the other ribbon cable out of the side of the keypad bracket.
the drive.
Installation 2-19

Step 5.1 Align the Regulator board ribbon cable connector with the connector to the
Base board. Carefully press the ribbon cable connector in until the retaining
clips lock into place.
Step 5.2 Place the keypad bracket back into position.
Step 5.3 If the drive has:
• A Regulator board cover and terminal cover: Replace the Regulator board
cover. Fasten it using the three M4 screws removed earlier.
• Only a terminal cover: Use a long magnetized screwdriver to fasten the
four screws that hold the keypad bracket. Replace the side cover on the
drive.
of the drive.
Step 5.7 Replace the terminal cover (below the keypad). Fasten it using the two M4
screws removed earlier.

2.5 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 15 to 25 HP
and 25 to 60HP @ 460VAC Drives

in bodily injury.
Use this procedure to install the ControlNet option board in drives with the model
numbers listed in table 2.5.
Table 2.5 – Model Numbers for 15 to 60HP @460VAC Drives
15V41xx 30V41xx
15V42xx 30V42xx
20V41xx 40V41xx
20V42xx 40V42xx
25G41xx 50V41xx
25G42xx 50V42xx
25V41xx
25V42xx 60G41xx
60G42xx
before proceeding.
Installation 2-21
proceeding.

DC bus potential:
terminals as shown in figures 2.10 (15 to 25 HP) and 2.11 (25 to 60 HP).
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 + – R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
DC Bus AC Power
Motor Leads Volts Input Leads
Figure 2.10 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (15 to 25 HP @ 460VAC)

DC Bus Volts Input Wiring
+ – R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
D1
RV2 RV3
Figure 2.11 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (25 to 60 HP @ 460VAC)

Step 3.2 Loosen the thumb screw on the left side of the keypad bracket. Hold the
bracket on the left and lift the bracket up and to the left to separate it from
the keypad support bracket.
Important: The bracket is connected to the drive by wiring. Do not attempt to lift the
bracket out completely as this can damage or pull out wiring. Tie up or
support the bracket to prevent damage to the wiring.
Step 3.3 Disconnect the 26-conductor Regulator board ribbon cable from the Power
Supply board (located on the right side below the keypad). You can see the
connector through the slot on the keypad support bracket. Use a small
screwdriver inserted through the slot to spread the retaining clips on the
connector to release it.
Installation 2-23
Top View
Top View

Regulator Board Regulator Board
Front View
Front View
15 to 25 HP @ 460VAC 25 to 60 HP @ 460VAC
Figure 2.12 – GV3000/SE Drive (15 to 25 and 25 to 60 HP @ 460VAC)

the drive.
Step 4.6 Realign the 26-conductor ribbon cable connector with the Power Supply
board connector inside the slot in the keypad support bracket. Carefully
press the ribbon cable connector in until the retaining clips lock it into place.

Step 5.7 Reconnect the keypad bracket to the keypad support bracket by inserting
the mounting tabs into the slots in the support bracket and tightening the
thumb screw.
of the drive.
Installation 2-25
50 to 100 HP and 100 to 150 HP @ 460VAC Drives

in bodily injury.
Use this procedure to install the ControlNet option board in drives with the model
numbers 50R41xx, 50T41xx, 75R41xx, 75T41xx, or 125R41xx.
before proceeding.

Step 1.3 Remove the cover from the drive by removing the six cover screws.
proceeding.

power terminals (1L1, 1L2, 1L3).
DC bus potential:
b. 50 to 100 HP @ 460 V only: Use a voltmeter to measure the DC bus
potential at the diode bridge. Refer to figure 2.13.
c. 100 to 150 HP @ 460 V only: Take care not to touch any conductive
traces. Use a voltmeter to measure the DC bus potential at the bottom of
the fuse holders on the Power Module Interface board on the back of the
Regulator panel. Refer to figure 2.14.
–
DC Bus
Measuring Points
+
45 47 45 47
Keypad
Regulator
Board
Power Module
Interface Board
Figure 2.13 – 50 to 100 HP Drive Components and Locations

Step 3.1 Loosen the two screws from the top of the hinged panel (where the keypad
bracket is mounted). Tilt the mounting panel forward out of the drive
chassis.
Step 3.3 Spread the retaining clips on the Regulator board’s 60-conductor ribbon
cable connector to disconnect it from the Power Module Interface board.
This ribbon cable runs from the top of the Regulator board through a slot in
the mounting panel to the Power board on the other side. Slip the ribbon
cable out of the slot to free it from the mounting panel.
Installation 2-27
Step 3.4 Use a magnetic screwdriver to remove the four screws and lock washers
that fasten the keypad bracket to the hinged mounting panel. Hold the
keypad bracket as you remove the screws.
Refer to figure 2.13 (50 to 100 HP drives) or 2.13 (100 to 150 HP drives) for
component locations.
the drive.

Power Module Interface Board
Fuses
(-) (+)
DC Bus Measuring Points
Regulator Panel
DC bus measuring
points are behind the
Regulator Panel on the
Power Module Power Module Interface
Interface Board board.
Keypad
Regulator Board
Power Module
Interface Board
Figure 2.14 – 100 to 150 HP Drive Components and Locations

Step 5.1 Reconnect the keypad bracket to the hinged mounting panel using the four
screws and lock washers removed earlier.
Step 5.2 100 to 150 HP drives only: Remove the tie that was fastened to the Power
Module Interface board earlier.
Installation 2-29
Step 5.3 100 to 150 HP drives only: Align the Power Module Interface board on the
eight plastic standoffs on the back of the mounting panel. Carefully press it
into place. Make sure that good contact has been made with the two
grounding standoffs.
Step 5.4 Route the Regulator board’s 60-conductor ribbon cable through the slot in
the hinged mounting panel to the connector on the Power Module Interface
board. Align the two connectors. Place your thumb beneath the Power
Module Interface board for support and carefully press the ribbon cable
Step 5.5 Swing the hinged mounting panel back into position. Make sure no wires or
cables are pinched by the panel.
Step 5.6 Refasten the two screws at the top of the panel.
Step 5.7 Route the Network Drop Cable through the right-most opening at the
bottom of the drive, away from the AC lines.
Step 5.10 Replace mounting panel and fasten with two screws at the top of the hinged
panel (where the keypad bracket is mounted).
Step 5.12 Reinstall the cover with the six screws removed in step 1.3. Make sure no
wires or cables are pinched by the cover.
To maintain the integrity of NEMA 4X/12 drives, sequentially tighten the six


in bodily injury.
Use this procedure to install the ControlNet option board in drives with part number
200V41xx, 250V41xx, 300V41xx, 350V41xx, or 400V41xx.
before proceeding.
proceeding.
Step 2.1 Open the drive’s outer cabinet door.

Step 2.2 Lower the plastic terminal strip shield at the top of the drive.
power terminals, R, S, and T.
Step 2.4 Replace the plastic terminal strip shield.
Installation 2-31
DC bus potential:
a. Stand on a non-conductive surface and wear insulated gloves. (600 V)
b. Use a voltmeter to check the DC bus potential at the Voltmeter Test
Points on the Power Module Interface board. See figure 2.15.
POW ER CONNECT IONS

FULL SHIELD TABS IN AND ROTATE SHIEL D OUT
CON NECT U SING 360MCM TWO HOLE TER MINAL LUGS
TORQUE TO 325IN- LB
W ir in g Tr ay
GND DC– DC+ W T1 W T2 W T3 RL1 SL2 T
GND DC– DC+ U V W R S T
Power Module
DANGER Interface Board
R PM
VO LTS
AM P S
RU N NI NG
R EM O TE
JO G
Keypad
Hz AU TO
Kw FO R WAR D
TO R QU E R EV ER SE
Pa sswo d
r PR O GR AM
ENTER
STO P
RE SET S TA R T
Regulator
Board
Network
Option
Board
Side View
(Enlarged)
Front View
Figure 2.15 – GV3000/SE Drive (200 to 400 HP)
Step 3.2 Use a magnetic screwdriver to remove the four screws and lock washers
that fasten the keypad bracket to the hinged mounting panel. Hold the
keypad bracket as you remove the screws.
Step 3.3 Disconnect the Regulator board ribbon cable from the Power Module
Interface board.
Step 4. Install the ControlNet Option Board
The ControlNet option board mounts on four standoffs behind the
Regulator board.
Step 4.2 Align the ControlNet option board’s four mounting holes with the four
standoffs on the hinged mounting panel of the drive.

Step 4.3 Fasten the board to the drive with four 7⁄32 ″ nuts. Metal nuts must be used
for proper grounding of the ControlNet option board.
Step 4.6 Route the Network Drop Cable through the signal wiring tray on the right
side of the drive.

Step 5.1 Align the key on the connector from the Regulator board with the key of the
connector on the Power Module Interface board. Press the ribbon cable
Step 5.2 Reconnect the keypad bracket to the hinged mounting panel using the four
screws removed earlier.
Step 5.4 Close and secure the outer cabinet door of the drive.
Installation 2-33
2.8 Installing the ControlNet Option Board in 2 to 43 Amp
GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives

in bodily injury.
Use the procedure in this section to install the ControlNet option board in the drives
listed in table 2.6.
Table 2.6 – Model Numbers for 2 to 15 Amp and 24 to 43 Amp Drives
2 to 15 Amp 24 to 30 Amp 43 Amp
31ER40xx 240ER40xx 430ER40xx

31ET40xx 240ET40xx 430ET40xx
38ER40xx 300ER40xx
38ET40xx 300ET40xx
55ER40xx
55ET40xx
85ER40xx
85ET40xx
126ER40xx
126ET40xx
150ER40xx
150ET40xx
This procedure requires access to the right side of the drive. Remove the drive from
the panel if necessary.

before proceeding.

Step 1.3 Disconnect all faceplate wiring.
Important: The cover is connected to the drive by the keypad/display cable. To
disconnect the cover, use the procedure below. Do not remove the
keypad/display.
Step 1.4 Remove the cover as follows:
a. Unscrew the attaching screw on the cover.
b. Lift the cover and carefuly take it out of the heatsink as far as the flat
ribbon keypad cable will allow. This cable connects the display with the
Regulator board.
c. Use a screwdriver to slide the cable out of the connector on the
Regulator board to competely detach the cover.
Step 1.5 24 to 43 A drives only: Remove the front panel by unscrewing the two
attaching screws.

power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Refer to figure 2.16 or 2.19 for the
location of these terminals.
DC bus potential:
terminals ((–)45, (+)47) shown in figure 2.16 or 2.19.
Step 2.3 24 to 43 A drives only: Reattach the front panel after checking the DC bus
potential.
Installation 2-35
Cover Screw
Breakout Panel
AC Input Power
Terminals
(L1, L2, L3)
DC Bus
Measuring Points
(-)45, (+)47
Figure 2.16 – 2 to 15 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives

Cover Screw
Front Panel Screws
Breakout Panel
Figure 2.17 – 24 to 30 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives
Installation 2-37
Cover Screw
Front Panel *AC Input Power

Screws Terminals Breakout Panel
(L1, L2, L3)
8 9 :
3( / / / *Terminals are located
behind the cover and
front panel.

*DC Bus
Measuring Points
(-)45, (+)47
Figure 2.18 – 43 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drives

Keypad/Display
Cable Connector
Regulator
Board
Regulator Board
Ribbon Cable
AC Input Power
Terminals
(L1, L2, L3)
DC Bus
Measuring Points
(–)45, (+)47
Figure 2.19 – 24 to 30 Amp GV3000/SE Bookshelf Drive (Cover and Front Panel Removed)

! when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the drive. Erratic machine
in bodily injury.
Step 3. Install the ControlNet Option Board in the Drive

Step 3.3 Fasten the ControlNet option board to the drive using the screws provided.
Step 3.4 Connect the brown wire of the Network Drop Cable to terminal 1 of the
2-connector terminal strip. Connect the white wire to terminal 2.
Installation 2-39
Keypad/Display
Cable Connector
Regulator Board
Regulator Board
Ribbon Cable
ControlNet Option
Board
Figure 2.20 – Installing the ControlNet Option Board
Step 4. Reattach the Cover

Step 4.1 Remove enough tabs on the faceplate breakout panel to allow the Network
Drop Cable through.
Step 4.2 Route the Network Drop Cable through the breakout panel.
Step 4.3 Reconnect the keypad/display cable to the cover.
Important: Check that the display cable is reconnected to the Regulator board. You
will need to fold and route the cable under the heatsink before replacing
the cover.
Step 4.4 Reattach the cover using the single faceplate screw.
Step 4.5 Reconnect all faceplate wiring.

2.9 Connecting the GV3000/SE Drive to a
ControlNet Network
ATTENTION: Do not let any metallic surfaces on the BNC connectors,

plugs, or optional accessories touch grounded metallic surfaces. This
! contact could cause noise on the network.
The ControlNet network is composed of:

• trunk cables
• drop cables (run from a tap on the trunk cable to a node)
• taps
• terminators
• repeaters
Refer to your ControlNet Network Planning and Installation manual for a detailed
description of how to install a ControlNet network and add a drop to an existing
ControlNet network.
Step 4.1 Stop any application tasks that are running.
Step 4.2 Remove the lockout and tag. Apply power to the drive. SELF is displayed
while the drive performs power-up diagnostics. If there is an error during
diagnostics, it is logged. See your drive software manual for information on
errors.
Step 4.3 Connect a ControlNet Network drop cable to one of the BNC connectors on
the option board. Connect the other end to a tap.
See figure 2.21 for cabling and termination connections.
Installation 2-41
Channel B
Programmable
Channel A
Logic Controller
(PLC)
Repeater
Drop Cable
GV3000/SE Drive Tap
Note: This diagram shows

redundant media
Terminator
being used.
Trunk Cable
Figure 2.21 – Connecting a GV3000/SE Drive to the ControlNet Network
You can run a second trunk cable between your ControlNet nodes for redundant
media.With redundant media, nodes send signals on two separate segments. The
receiving node automatically compares the quality of the two signals and accepts the
better signal. This also provides a backup cable should one cable fail. When using
redundant media, you must use two passive taps.
If you do not use redundant media, the option board can operate using only channel A
or channel B, as long as all other drops on the network are using the same channel.
2.10 Connecting a Programming Device to the Option

Board’s Network Access Port
You can gain full access to the ControlNet network by connecting a programming
device to the option board’s network access port, an RJ-45 connector.
Important: Be sure to use a network access cable that is approved by a ControlNet

vendor. Using an unsuitable cable could result in possible network
failures.

3.5 Setting the Communication Loss Response (P.062)
ATTENTION: This parameter allows you to configure the drive to

continue to run if a loss of network communication occurs. You must
provide some form of hardwired stop in case of communication loss,
since stopping the drive through the network might not be possible.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury or damage
to, or destruction of, equipment.
Parameter P.062 defines how the drive responds when a loss of scheduled
communication is detected. This parameter can be written over the ControlNet
network.
When P.062 = 0 (IET fault), the drive will fault stop when loss of communication is
detected.
When P.062 = 1 (Hold last reference), the drive maintains the last reference until
communication is re-established and the programmable controller has completed one
scan to evaluate a new drive reference value.
If network communication is re-established, the drive will again follow the reference
and sequencing control inputs supplied by the network master. Note that if P.054
(Level Sense Start Enable) = ON and the start and stop inputs are on (1), the drive
may start.
ATTENTION: In volts/hertz regulation, if P.000 (Control Source) is set to

OP (Option Port), and P.062 is set to 1 (Hold Last Reference), and the
drive loses communication with the network, the drive will maintain the
last frequency command sent to it. Ensure that drive machinery, all
drive-train mechanisms, and application material are capable of safe
operation at the maximum operating speed of the drive. Failure to
ATTENTION: In vector regulation, if U.000 (Torque Reference Source)
is set to 2 (Option Port), and P.062 is set to 1 (Hold Last Reference), and
the drive loses communication with the network, the drive will no longer
be regulating speed. Instead, motor speed will vary according to the load,
up to the overspeed limit. Ensure that driven machinery, all drive-train
mechanisms, and application material are capable of safe operation at
the maximum operating speed of the drive. Failure to observe this
When P.062 = 2 (Use terminal strip reference), the drive uses the terminal strip analog
input for the reference value if P.008 = 0. If P.008 ≠ 0, the selected source will be used.
After communication is re-established and the programmable controller has
completed one scan to evaluate a new drive reference value, ControlNet will resume
control. Note that when using this setting, the terminal strip Stop input must be
maintained for the drive to run.
Note that if P.054 (Level Sense Start Enable) = OFF and the drive is stopped while in
this mode, it cannot be restarted until network communication is re-established or the
Control Source (P.000) is changed.
Also note that if P.054 (Level Sense Start Enable) = ON and the start and stop inputs
are on (1), the drive may start.

CHAPTER 4
Programming the Drive
This section describes how to program the drive over the ControlNet network.
4.1 About ControlNet Network Communication

The ControlNet network transports time-critical control information (e.g. drive
reference and feedback information) as well as non-time-critical information (e.g.
accessing drive parameters). The transportation of the non-time-critical information
does not interfere with the time-critical messages.
A node’s access to the network is controlled by a time-slice access algorithm, which

determines a node’s opportunity to transmit in each network update interval. You
configure how often the network update interval repeats by selecting a network update
time in milliseconds. The minimum network update time you can specify is 2 msec.
See table 4.1 below for more information about the components of the network update
time.
Table 4.1 – Network Update Time Components
This network update

time component Allows:
scheduled Information that is time-critical (drive reference and
feedback) should be sent during this part of the NUT
interval.
unscheduled Information that can be delivered without time constraints
should be sent during this part of the NUT interval.
The amount of time available for the unscheduled portion is

determined by the traffic load of the scheduled portion.
During this part of the interval, nodes may have many or no
chances to transmit.
For optimum throughput, assign addresses to ControlNet nodes in a sequential order.
4.2 Configuring Drive Reference and Feedback Data as

Scheduled Transfers
This section describes how to:
• configure scheduled traffic for the GV3000/SE drive
• control the drive using the drive reference data
• use scheduled drive feedback data
Programming the Drive 4-1

4.2.1 Configuring Scheduled Data Transfers
Before the drive can communicate on the ControlNet network, you must configure its
scheduled traffic information by using some type of ControlNet configuration software.
By configuring scheduled traffic, you define how much data the drive will send, how
often the data is sent, and where the data is written to and read from (mapped) in the
programmable controller.
You must configure each drive on the ControlNet network. Table 4.2 lists the
configuration information you must enter.
Table 4.2 – ControlNet Scheduled Traffic Configuration Information
In this field: Enter this information:

Node Enter the drive’s node number that you defined in P.060.
Slot These fields are not used by the GV3000/SE drive.
Message
Module Enter GV3000/SE.
API This field is read only.
RPI Enter how often you want to exchange scheduled data between
the programmable controller and the drive.
Connection Type Select “Exclusive Owner.”
The GV3000/SE does not support Multicast operation.
Input Address Enter the programmable controller’s input file number that will
store data received from the drive (drive feedback data).
Input Size Enter the number of words of drive feedback data that you want
the programmable controller to receive from the drive (1 to 6).
See section 4.2.3 for information about the type of data that is
sent.
Output Address Enter the programmable controller’s output file number that will
store data sent to the drive (drive reference data).
Output Size Enter the number of words of drive reference data that you want
the programmable controller to send to the drive (1 to 6).
See section 4.2.2 for information about the type of data that is
sent.
Status Address Enter the programmable’s integer file number that will store the
status of the ControlNet connection to the drive.
Config Address These fields are not used by the GV3000/SE drive.
Config Size

4.2.2 Programming Scheduled Drive Reference Data
To control the drive over the ControlNet network with the scheduled drive reference
data, parameter P.000 must be set to OP, specifying the option board as the drive’s
control source. The programmable controller controls the drive by using the drive
reference data, which is transmitted over the ControlNet network as scheduled data.
You can write from one to six words of data to the file you defined during drive
configuration as the Output Address. The value you defined as the Output Size
determines how many words of data the option board can accept from the
programmable controller. During a scheduled data transfer, the programmable
controller writes the data contained in the Output Address to the option board.
Scheduled drive reference data is composed of from one to six words. The first word
of the scheduled drive reference data is always the drive control word. Should you
configure less than six words of output data, you can access the drive reference data
through file N12 as an unscheduled data transfer. See section 4.3.
Table 4.3 describes the function of each word of the scheduled drive reference data.
Table 4.3 – Scheduled Drive Reference Data
Word: Bit: Description:

Word 0 – — Set and reset (clear) the bits in this word via your
Drive Control programmable controller application program to control the
state of the drive.
The drive control bits that are used for drive sequencing are
evaluated in the drive every 20 msec.
0 Use this bit to start the drive.
Start
When the drive is in run mode, a 0-to-1 transition starts the
drive.
When the drive is in jog mode, a value of 1 jogs the drive. A

value of 0 stops the drive.
1 Use this bit to stop the drive.
Stop 0 = stop the drive
1 = allow the drive to run
2 Use this bit to reset latched faults. Faults are reset via a
Fault Reset transition from 0 to 1. The error log in unaffected by this bit.
3 Use this bit to select run or jog mode.
Run/Jog 0 = run mode
1 = jog mode
4 Use this bit to select the direction of the drive.
Forward/Reverse 0 = forward
1 = reverse
5 Use this bit to enable the Outer Control Loop.
OCL Enable 0 = OCL disabled
1 = OCL enabled

Table 4.3 – Scheduled Drive Reference Data (Continued)

7 Use this bit to select torque or speed regulation.
Torque/Speed
The drive must be configured for vector control
(P.048 = UEC and U.000 = 3).
0 = torque regulation
1 = speed regulation
8 Use this bit to reset the error log.
Error Log Clear The error log resets when this bit transitions from 0 to 1.
The latched faults are not affected by this bit.
Word 1 – — Use this word to control a speed or torque reference.
Speed/Torque Reference 1, 2
When using volts per hertz (V/Hz) control, a value of 4095
corresponds to the frequency in parameter P.004
(Maximum Speed).
When using vector speed regulation, a value of 4095

corresponds to the speed in parameter U.017.
When using torque regulation, a value of 4095 corresponds

to 150% of rated torque.
Word 2 – — Use this word to control the trim reference value. The
Trim Reference1 scaling for the trim reference is the same as the speed
reference. This word is not used for torque regulation.
Word 3 – — Use this word to provide the inertia compensation input to
Inertia Compensation1 the speed loop. To to use this data, you must set bit 1 of
parameter P.030.
Word 4 – — Use this word to modify the speed loop PI high limit. The
Speed PI High Limit1 output of the speed PI will not be greater than this value. A
value of 4095 represents 150% of the rated torque. To use
this data, set bit 2 of parameter P.030.
Word 5 – — Use this word to modify the speed loop PI low limit. The
Speed PI Low Limit2 output of the speed PI will not be less than this value. A
value of -4095 represents -150% of the rated torque. To use
this data, set bit 2 of parameter P.030.
1
If the drive is configured as a speed regulator, the speed reference, trim reference, inertia compensation, and PI limits are used in the
speed loop, which is evaluated every 5 msec.
If the drive is configured as only a torque regulator, the torque reference is used in the torque loop, which runs every 500 µsec. The fastest
2
network update time is 2 msec, so in torque mode the drive uses the same torque reference value a minimum of four times.
4.2.3 Using Scheduled Drive Feedback Data
The drive feedback data provides status to the programmable controller. This data is
sent over the ControlNet network as scheduled data, which is transmitted at the
configured update rate. However, the drive sends the feedback data to the option
board every 5 msec. Feedback data is sent to the option board regardless of the value
of parameter P.000.

Scheduled drive feedback data is composed of from one to six words. The value you
defined as the Input Size determines how many words of data the programmable
controller accepts from the option board. During a scheduled data transfer, the option
board writes the data contained in the Input Address to the programmable controller.
The first word of the scheduled drive feedback data is always the drive status word.
Should you configure less than six words of input data, you can access the drive
reference data through file N12 as an unscheduled data transfer. See section 4.3.
Table 4.4 describes the function of each word of the scheduled drive feedback data.
Table 4.4 – Scheduled Drive Feedback Data

Word 0 – — The drive writes to these bits to provide status about the drive.
Drive Status 0 This bit indicates the status if the drive is ready.
Drive Ready 0 = interlock missing
1 = drive ready
1 This bit indicates whether the drive is running.
Drive Running 0 = stopped
1 = running
2 This bit indicates whether the drive has faulted.
Fault Active 0 = no fault
1 = fault
3 This bit indicates whether the drive is in run or jog mode.
Run/Jog 0 = run
1 = jog
4 This bit indicates the drive’s direction.
Forward/Reverse 0 = forward
1 = reverse
5 Use this bit to determine the drive’s stopping status.
Stop in Progress 0 = not stopping
1 = stopping
6 This bit indicates whether the drive is in auto or manual mode.
Auto/Manual 0 = auto
1 = manual
7 This bit indicates whether the drive is using torque or speed control.
Torque/Speed 0 = torque
1 = speed
8 This bit indicates the status of digital input 1.
Digital In 1 (Start)
Digital In 2 (Stop)

Table 4.4 – Scheduled Drive Feedback Data (Continued)

Digital In 3
(Reset)
Digital In 4
(Run/Jog)
Digital In 5 (FL)
Digital In 6
Digital In 7
Digital In 8
Word 1 – — This word indicates the speed reference being used by the drive.
Speed Reference Values range from ±4095.
Word 2 – — This word indicates the value selected in parameter P.066. See table
Selected Output 1 4.5.
Table 4.5 explains the values that are available for words 2 - 5.
Table 4.5 – Signals That Can Be Displayed in Words 2 - 5
Value: Parameters
P.066 P.067 P.068 P.069
0 Motor KW Motor Torque Power Factor Encoder Counts
1 Speed reference limited output 1
2 Speed reference plus OCL output 1
3 Speed feedback 1
4 Speed error 1
5 Speed PI output 1
6 OCL feedback 1
7 OCL error 1

Table 4.5 – Signals That Can Be Displayed in Words 2 - 5
Value: Parameters
8 OCL output 1
9 Terminal Strip Analog Input (Normalized)

10 Terminal Strip Analog Input
11 Torque Reference 1
12 Torque Feedback 1
1 These signals are valid only in vector control.
4.3 Using Unscheduled Transfers

Use the unscheduled transfer portion of the network update time (NUT) to:
• read and write drive parameters that are not time-critical
• read drive display data
• read and write drive reference and feedback data that are not time-critical
• read the status of Typed Write messages.
In a PLC-5, you can use the MSG instruction to initiate unscheduled transfers.
4.3.1 Programming the MSG Instruction in a PLC-5
By including the PLC-5 MSG instruction in your application program you can read data
from the drive and write data to the drive during the unscheduled transfer time. You
can have up to four MSG instructions enabled at the same time.
Figure 4.1 shows an example of an MSG instruction in a PLC-5.
Sets when the block is enabled

Sets when a response has been received by the
programmable controller
Sets when an error occurs during the response
MSG
(EN)
Read/Write Message
Control block MG40:0 (DN)
Setup Screen (ER)
Lets you configure the

MSG instruction.
Defines the file in the programmable
MG = message file type
controller that stores the details
about the message. 40 = file number
0 = element 0
Figure 4.1 – An Example of a MSG Instruction in a PLC-5

To configure the MSG instruction, you must enter information about the data’s
location, size etc. Use table 4.6 to help you.
Table 4.6 – MSG Configuration Information
In this field: Do this:

PLC-5 Configuration
Communication Command To read information from the drive, enter PLC5
Typed Read.
To write data to the drive, enter PLC5 Typed Write.
Data Table Address When reading information from the drive, enter the
file in which you want to store the data received
from the drive.
When writing information to the drive, enter the file
that will contain the data you want to send to the
drive.
Size in Elements Enter the number of words to read or write. The
largest size you can use depends upon which file is
being accessed.
Port Number Enter 2 to select ControlNet communication.
Target Device Configuration
Data Table Address Enter the file in the drive where you want to read
data from or write data to. See section 4.3.3
ControlNet Path Enter the node number of the drive.
4.3.2 About MSG Instruction Timing
When a Typed Read message is sent to the drive, the response is sent to the PLC-5
programmable controller in under 20 msec. When a Typed Write message is sent to
the drive, the message is first processed by the drive. Therefore, 100-200 msec may
elapse before the response is returned to the PLC-5 programmable controller. These
times are applicable only when the network update time and unscheduled traffic
bandwidth are not limiting factors.
4.3.3 About the Files You Can Access
When you send an unscheduled message to the drive, the data table address you
specify for the target device determines what drive information you want to access.
The data table address is in the form of:
Nff:eee
where: N specifies the file type as integer, ff is the file number, and eee is the
element number (word).
The GV3000/SE ControlNet Option Board supports these file numbers:

• N10 – Drive parameters (read and write)
• N11 – Drive display data (read only)
• N12 – Drive reference and feedback data (read and write)
• N20 – Status of the most recent write parameter command (read only)

Figure 4.2 shows how the drive information maps to the drive information integer files.
Unscheduled Data Transfers (MSG) Instruction
File in
Drive N10:0 N10:100 N11:0 N12:0 N20:0
Option
Board N10:99 N10:148 N11:14 N12:31 N20:148
Drive P.000 H/U.000 Drive Reference

and Write
Information Display
Feedback Status
P.099 H/U.048 Data
Data
Scheduled Data Transfers
Figure 4.2 – Drive Information Map
4.3.4 Using the Drive Parameters Data (N10:X)
Use file N10 to access drive parameters with unscheduled data transfers. Parameters
P.000 through P.099 map to N10:0 to N10:99. The H (Volts/Hertz) and U (Vector)
parameters map to N10:100 to N10:148 and share the same element numbers.
You can access all the parameters with one MSG instruction. By specifying only a
range of words in the MSG instruction, you can change any subset of contiguous
parameters without sending a complete new copy of the file to the drive.
See chapter 5 for a complete listing of the parameters and the drive file elements to
which they are mapped.
4.3.5 Using the Drive Display Data (N11:X)
Use file N11 to access the drive display data. This file lets you access information
such as the drive fault bits, information about the motor, and the error log.
The GV3000/SE drive updates the drive display data every 100 msec. The drive
operation data is averaged over a 500 msec period. See chapter 5 for a complete
listing of the data you can access and its location.

4.3.6 Using the Drive Reference and Feedback Data (N12:X)
When you use scheduled data transfers to transmit less than six words of either drive
reference or feedback data, you can access the information that is not transmitted as
scheduled data by using unscheduled data transfers. Use a MSG instruction to access
any or all of the data, except the drive control word, which is read only. See chapter 5
for a complete listing of the data you can access and its location.
4.3.7 Using the Write Status File (N20:X) to Troubleshoot a Drive

Parameter Write Command
You can troubleshoot errors that may occur when you write values to parameters in
the drive. The drive may not accept the values because the drive is running or the
value is less than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value. When this
occurs, the MSG instruction’s ER coil is set and an error code is written into an
element in N20 that corresponds to the drive parameter’s location in N10. Each
element in file the N20 corresponds to an element in file N10. For example: N10:0
stores the Control Source parameter data (P.000). If you were writing a value to N10:0
and an error occurred, you could read N20:0 and determine that an error occurred
when writing to parameter P.000.
See table 6.3 for the error codes that the drive will return to the PLC when a Typed
Read or Typed Write message fails.

CHAPTER 5
Register Map
Table 5.1 – File N10:X (Drive Read/Write Parameters)
File Parameter
Address Parameter Name Number Type Notes
N10:0 Control Source P.000 Configurable 0 = Front Panel (Local)
1 = Terminal strip
2 = Option Port (Network)
3 = Serial Port (PC-host)
N10:1 Accel Time 1 (RAMP 1) P.001 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:2 Decel Time 1 (RAMP 1) P.002 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:3 Minimum Speed P.003 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz / 150 = 150 RPM
N10:4 Maximum Speed P.004 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz / 150 = 150 RPM
N10:5 Current Limit P.005 Tunable 100 = 100%
N10:6 Second Menu Password P.006 Tunable Note 1
N10:7 Term Strip Dig Inputs Config P.007 Configurable 0 through 12
N10:8 Term Strip Spd Ref Source P.008 Configurable 0 through 7
N10:9 Term Strip Anlg In Offset P.009 Tunable 100 = 100
N10:10 Term Strip Anlg In Gain P.010 Tunable 1000 = 1.000
N10:11 Term Strip Anlg In Configure P.011 Configurable 0 through 7
N10:12 Term Strip Anlg Out Source P.012 Tunable 0 through 3
N10:13 Output Relay Configuration P.013 Configurable 0 through 3
N10:14 Trim Reference Source P.014 Configurable 0 through 3
N10:15 Trim Gain Percentage P.015 Tunable 999 = 99.9%
N10:16 Draw Gain Percentage P.016 Tunable 999 = 99.9%
N10:17 Accel Time 2 (RAMP 2) P.017 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:18 Decel Time 2 (RAMP 2) P.018 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:19 S-Curve Enable P.019 Configurable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:20 Jog Speed Reference P.020 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz / 150 = 150 RPM
N10:21 Jog Ramp Accel Time P.021 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:22 Jog Ramp Decel Time P.022 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:23 MOP Accel/Decel Time P.023 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:24 MOP Reset Configuration P.024 Tunable 0 to 2
N10:25 Stop Type P.025 Tunable 0 = Coast; 1 = Ramp
Note 1: This parameter cannot be changed from the ControlNet network, or it is reserved. When writing to this parameter, use
a value of 0. When you read this parameter, you receive a value of 0.
Register Map 5-1

File Parameter
N10:26 Function Loss Response P.026 Tunable 0 = IET; 1 = Coast
N10:27 Forward/Reverse Configure P.027 Tunable 0 = enable; 1 = rev. disable; 2 = latch
N10:28 Speed Display Scaling P.028 Tunable Units

N10:29 Elapsed Time Meter P.029 Read Only Days
N10:30 Control Bits P.030 bit 0 = Elapsed Time Reset
bit 1 = CNI Inertia Compensation
bit 2 = CNI Speed PI Limit Enable
N10:31 Preset Speed 1 P.031 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz / 150 = 150 RPM
N10:39 Encoder Loss Enable P.039 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:40 Motor Overload Enable P.040 Configurable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:41 Motor Overload Type P.041 Configurable 0 = nC; 1 = FC
N10:42 Line Dip Ride-Through Time P.042 Configurable 1 = 0.1sec
N10:43 Fault Auto Reset Attempts P.043 Configurable 0 to 10
N10:44 Fault Auto Reset Time P.044 Configurable 8 = 8 sec
N10:45 Output Phase Loss Enable P.045 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:46 Reserved P.046 Note 1
N10:47 Carrier Frequency (kHz) P.047 Configurable 0 = 2 kHz; 1 = 4 kHz; 2 = 8 kHz
N10:48 V/Hz or Vector Regulation P.048 Configurable 0 = V/Hz; 1 = Vector
N10:49 Country Defaults P.049 Configurable 0 = USA; 1 = EUr; 2 = JPn
N10:50 Restore Defaults P.050 Note 1
N10:51 Programming Disable P.051 Tunable Enter the password (26)*
N10:52 AUTO/MAN Key Disable P.052 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:53 Manual Ref. Preset Enable P.053 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:54 Level Sense Start Enable P.054 Configurable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:55 STOP/RESET Key Disable P.055 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
* When you write to P.051, entering the password toggles disabling programming from the drive keypad. When you
read P.051, 0 = programming enabled, 1 = programming disabled.

File Parameter
N10:60 Node Number P.060 Read Only 2 to 99
N10:61 Prog/Run Mode P.061 Configurable 0 = stop,1 = not stop,
3 = term strip control
N10:62 Option Port: Communication P.062 Tunable 0 = IET flt; 1 = hold last; 2 = term strip
Loss Response reference; 3 = term strip control
N10:63 Option Port: Network Ref. P.063 Note 1
Source (not used)
N10:64 Option. Port: Network Trim P.064 Note 1
Ref. Source (not used)
N10:65 CNI Version P.065 Read Only 5200 = CNI version 2.00
N10:66 Network Output Reg 1 P.066 Tunable 0 to 12
| |
N10:89 P.089
N10:90 Diagnostics Source P.090 Tunable 0 to 19
N10:91 Diagnostics Display P.091 Read Only
N10:95 Power Module Output Amps P.095 Read Only 100 = 10.0 A
N10:98 Software Version Number P.098 Read Only 600 = version 6.00
N10:99 Power Module Type P.099 Read Only 4.005 = 460 V, 5 HP
H Parameters
N10:100 Motor Nameplate Volts H.000 Configurable 460 = 460 V
N10:101 Motor Nameplate Base Freq H.001 Configurable 600 = 60.0 Hz
N10:102 Motor Nameplate Amps H.002 Configurable 100 = 10.0 A
N10:103 Torque Boost Voltage H.003 Configurable 5 = 0.5%
N10:104 Slip Compensation H.004 Tunable 0 = 0.0%
N10:105 DC Braking Enable H.005 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:106 DC Braking Start Frequency H.006 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz
Register Map 5-3

File Parameter
N10:107 DC Braking Current H.007 Tunable 1 = 1%
N10:108 DC Braking Time H.008 Tunable 30 = 3.0 sec
N10:109 Avoidance Freq. Enable H.009 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:110 Avoidance Freq. Midpoint 1 H.010 Tunable 50 = 5.0 Hz
N10:111 Avoidance Freq. Band 1 H.011 Tunable 20 = 2.0 Hz
N10:116 Sync Direction H.016 Configurable 0 = off; 1 = F; 2 = r; 3 = Fr; 4 =rF
N10:117 Input Pwr/Snubber Config. H.017 Configurable 0 to 5
N10:118 Volts/Hertz Curve Type H.018 Configurable 0 to 2
N10:119 Identification Result H.019 Read Only 0 to 6
N10:120 Identification Request H.020 Configurable Note 1
N10:121 AC Line Volts H.021 Configurable 460 = 460 V
N10:122 Overfrequency Limit H.022 Configurable 900 - 90.0 Hz
N10:123 Reserved Note 1
|
N10:148
U Parameters
N10:100 Torque Reference Source U.000 Configurable 0 to 3
N10:101 Encoder PPR U.001 Configurable 0 = 512; 1 = 1024; 2 = 2048; 3 = 4096;
4 = SE
N10:102 Motor Poles U.002 Configurable 0 = 2; 1 = 4; 2 = 6; 3 = 8
N10:103 Motor Nameplate Base Freq U.003 Configurable 600 = 60.0 Hz
N10:104 Motor Nameplate Amps U.004 Configurable 100 = 10.0 A
N10:105 Motor Nameplate RPM U.005 Configurable 1785 = 1785 RPM
N10:106 Magnetizing Current U.006 Configurable 500 = 50.0%
N10:107 Motor Nameplate Volts U.007 Configurable 460 = 460 V
N10:108 Torque Self-Tune Enable U.008 Configurable Note 1
N10:109 Torque Self-Tune Result U.009 Read Only 0 to 7
N10:110 Reserved U.010 Note 1
N10:112 Spd. Reg. Prop. Gain U.012 Tunable 500 = 5.00
N10:113 Spd. Reg. Integral Gain U.013 Tunable 500 = 5.00
N10:114 Torque Reg. Prop. Gain U.014 Tunable 40 = 0.40

File Parameter
N10:115 Torque Reg. Integral Gain U.015 Tunable 2000 = 200.0
N10:116 Fld. Weakening Start RPM U.016 Configurable 1785 = 1785 RPM
N10:117 Motor Top Speed U.017 Configurable 7200 = 7200 RPM
N10:118 AC Line Volts U.018 Configurable 460 = 460 V
N10:119 Flux Cur. Reg. Prop. Gain U.019 Tunable 500 = 5.00
N10:120 Flux Cur. Reg. Integral Gain U.020 Tunable 400 = 40.0
N10:121 Rotor Time Constant U.021 Tunable 100 = 100 msec
N10:122 Motor Nameplate HP U.022 Configurable 10 = 1.0 HP
N10:123 Low DC Bus Flt. Avoid En. U.023 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:124 High DC Bus Flt. Avoid En. U.024 Tunable 0 = off; 1 = on
N10:125 Zero Speed Hold Time U.025 Tunable 1 = 0.1 sec
N10:126 Current Compounding Gain U.026 Tunable 1 = 0.001
N10:127 Inertia Compensation Gain U.027 Tunable 1 = 0.001
N10:128 Losses Compensation Gain U.028 Tunable 1 = 0.001
N10:130 SVC Slip Adjust U.030 Tunable 100 = 1.00
N10:131 SVC Sync Direction U.031 Configurable 0 = Off; 1 = F; 2 = r; 3 = Fr; 4 = rF
N10:132 SVC Flux Cur. Reg. Gain U.032 Tunable 500 = 500 rad/sec
N10:140 OCL Feedback Source U.040 Configurable 0 = TS analog in; 1 = Spd Loop PI out
N10:141 OCL Lead/Lag Select U.041 Tunable 0 = bypass; 1 = lead/lag; 2 = lag/lead
N10:142 OCL Lead/Lag Low Freq. U.042 Tunable 1 = 0.01 rad/sec
N10:143 OCL Lead/Lag Ratio U.043 Tunable 1=1
N10:144 OCL Reference Gain U.044 Tunable 1 = 0.001
N10:145 OCL Proportional Gain U.045 Tunable 10 = 0.10
N10:146 OCL Integral Gain U.046 Tunable 1 = 0.01
N10:147 OCL Trim Range Percent U.047 Tunable 1 = 0.1% (gain of 0.001)
N10:148 OCL Prop.Trim EnableFil U.048 Configurable 0 = off; 1 = on
Register Map 5-5

Table 5.2 – File N11:X (Drive Display Data (Read Only))
File
Address Name Description
N11:0 Fault Word 1 This element displays the status of the drive fault bits. Some are vector (v),
some are V/Hz (h), and some are common to both regulators(c).
b00 Overcurrent (c) b08 Function Loss (c)
b01 Overcurrent Accelerating (c) b09 Check Sum Failed (c)
b02 Overcurrent Decelerating (c) b10 Loss of Serial Communication (c)
b03 DC Braking Fault (h) b11 Serial Port Spurious Interrupt (c)
b04 HIgh DC Bus (c) b12 Self Tune Failed (u)
b05 Low DC Bus (c) b13 Overspeed (u)
b06 Electronic Thermal Overload (c) b14 Motor Phase Loss (c)
b07 Overtemperature (c) b15 Overfrequency (c)
N11:1 Fault Word 2 This element displays the status of the drive fault bits. Some are vector (v),
some are V/Hz (h), and some are common to both regulators(c).
b00 Network Communication Loss (c) b08 Asymmetrical Bus (c)
b01 Bypass Contact (c) b09 MIssing PU Connector (c)
b02 HIgh Time ID Aborted (h) b10 PU Not Selected (c)
b03 Drive ID Aborted (c) b11 Input Phase Loss (c)
b04 High Line (h) b12 Encode Loss (u)
b05 EEPROM Write Failed (c) b13 Analog Input 4-20 mA Loss
b06 PU Overload (c) b14
b07 Ground Current (c) b15 Fatal System Error (c)
N11:2 Motor Speed This element displays drive speed as scaled by P.028.
N11:3 Motor Volts This element displays motor voltage, where 460 = 460 VAC)
N11:4 Motor Amps This element displays motor current, where 150 = 15.0 amps)
N11:5 Motor KW This element displays motor kilowatts, where 150 = 1.50 kW.
N11:6 Motor Torque This element displays torque, where 100 = 100%.
N11:7 Power Factor This element displays power factor, where 10000 = 1.0
N11:8 Error Log Count This element displays the number of entries in the error log.
N11:9 Error Log 0,1 These elements display the drive error log packed in bytes. For example:
N11:10 Error Log 2,3 N11:8 = 3; the value 3 indicates there are 3 errors in the error log.
N11:9 = 0408; the value 04 in the upper byte indicates that the first error is a
N11:11 Error Log 4,5 High DC Bus. The value 08 in the low byte indicates that the second
N11:12 Error Log 6,7 error is a Function Loss. Hex values 00 - 0F correspond to Fault Word
N11:13 Error Log 8,9 1 above, bits b00 - b15. Hex values 10 - 1F correspond to Fault Word
2 above, bits b00 - b15. See the GV3000/SE Software Reference for a
listing of drive fault codes.
N11:10 = 1Bxx; the value 1B in the upper byte indicates that the third error is
an Input Phase Loss.
N11:14 Secondary b00 OCL Enabled (vector only)
Status Bits

Table 5.3 – File N12:X (Drive Reference and Feedback Data)
Drive Reference Data Drive Feedback Data

N12:0 Drive Control Word N12:16 Drive Status Word
N12:1 Speed/Torque Reference N12:17 Speed Feedback
N12:2 Trim Reference N12:18 Selected Output 1
N12:3 Inertia Comp N12:19 Selected Output 2
N12:4 Speed PI High Limit N12:20 Selected Output 3
N12:5 Speed PI Low Limit N12:21 Selected Output 4
N12:6 Reserved N12:22 Reserved
| |
N12:15 N12:31
Register Map 5-7

CHAPTER 6
Troubleshooting
6.1 Diagnostic LEDs

The ControlNet Network Communication Option board has three bicolor (red/green)
LEDs. The Health LED indicates the status of the network communication board and
each of the two Communications LEDs indicates the status of its associated channel.
The Health LED provides the status of the network option board. It indicates whether
or not the board has power and is operating properly.
Table 6.1 – Health LED
LED State Probable Cause Recommended Action

Off Power off Turn power on.
Falshing Device Test None
Red/Green
Flashing Incorrect node Check network address and other
Green/Off configuration ControlNet configuration parameters
Steady Green Normal operation The network communication board is
configured correctly.
Flashing Non-critical Fault An invalid configuration is loaded.This
Red/Off is the indication that no OS is loaded.
Steady Red Critical Fault The network communication board
has an unrecoverable fault.
The Communications LEDs can be off, red, green, or some alternating pattern. In
table 6.2, the term “flashing” is used to describe LEDs that are always in the same
state, or in phase. The term “alternating” is used to describe LEDs that are always in
opposite states, or out of phase.
Troubleshooting 6-1
Table 6.2 – Communications LEDs
LED State Probable Cause Recommended Action

Off No power Turn power on
Steady Red (A & B) Faulted unit Cycle power. If the fault persists, contact your Reliance
Electric representative.
Alternating Self test None
Red/Green (A & B)
Alternating Incorrect node configuration Check the network address and other ControlNet
Red/Off (A & B) configuration parameters.
Off Channel disabled None; configure for communication.
Steady Green Normal operation None
Flashing Green/Off Temporary error Verify that the node number has been set.
Node is not configured Check that the cable is properly terminated.
Verify that the config manager node is working.
Flashing Red/Off Media Fault Check media for problems.
No other nodes present on Add other nodes to the network.
the network
This channel’s cable is not Never remove the green channel if the other is red;
as good as the other. communication may be lost.
Flashing Incorrect network Cycle power. If the fault persists, contact your Reliance
Red/Green configuration Electric representative.
6.2 Communication Error Codes

Table 6.3 defines the error codes that are returned by the drive for Typed Read and
Typed Write messages.
Table 6.3 – Communication Error Codes
Status
ControlLogix PLC-5
Error Extended Error Error Description
0 0 0 No Error
00F0 0002 -4094 (0xF002) Incomplete address
00F0 0003 -4093 (0xF003) Incorrect address
00F0 0006 -4090 (0xF006) Addressed file does not
exist in target processor
00F0 0007 -4089 (0xF007) Destination file is too small
for number of words
requested
00F0 000B -4085 (0xF00B) Privilege error, access
denied
00F0 000C -4084 (0xF00C) Requested function is not
available
00F0 0011 -4079 (0xF011) Data type requested does
not match available

GLOSSARY
This section defines some ControlNet network and GV3000/SE drive terminology.
Configuration Manager Node

The node responsible for distributing ControlNet configuration data to all nodes on the
network.
Configurable (parameter)
A parameter that can be adjusted or changed only when the drive is stopped.
Connection
An opened communication path between two nodes on a ControlNet network.
ControlNet Status Indicators

Channel A and channel B indicators on your node indicating status on the ControlNet
link.
D
Drop Cable
A cable that connects a node to the trunk cable.
F
Frame
A single data transfer on a ControlNet link.
L
Link
A collection of nodes within unique addresses (in range of 1-99). Segments connected
by repeaters make up a link; links connected by bridges make up a network.
M
Maximum Scheduled Node
The node with highest network address that can use scheduled time a ControlNet link.
Maximum Unscheduled Node

The node with highest network address that can use unscheduled time a ControlNet
link.
Glossary Glossary-1
MSG Instruction (Message Instruction)
Instructions used by ControlNet PLC-5 processors for peer-to-peer communications.
N
NAP (Network Access Port)
A port that provides a temporary network connection through an RJ-45 connector.
Network
A series of nodes connected by some type of communication medium. The
connection paths between any pair of nodes can include repeaters, routers, bridges,
and gateways.
Network Address
A node's address on the network.
Node
The port of a physical device connected to the network that requires a network
address to function on the network. A link may contain a maximum of 107 nodes.
NUI (Network Update Interval)

A single occurrence of the network update time (NUT)
NUT (Network Update Time)

Repetitive time interval in which data can be sent on the ControlNet network.
R
Redundant media
A dual cable system that lets you receive the best signal over a network.
Repeater
A two-port active physical-layer device that reconstructs and retransmits all traffic it
hears on one segment to another segment.
Scheduled transfer
Deterministic and repeatable transfers that are continuous and asynchronous to the
ladder-logic program scan.
Segment
Trunk-cable sections connected via taps with terminators at each end; a segment
does not include repeaters.
Glossary-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board

T
Tap
A component that connects products to the ControlNet trunk cable. A tap is required
for each node and for both sides of each repeater.Terminator
Terminator
A 75-Ω resistor (mounted in a BNC plug) placed on the ends of segments to prevent
reflections from occurring at the ends of cables.
Trunk-Cable
The bus or central part of the ControlNet cable system.
Trunk-Cable Section
The length of trunk cables between any two taps.
Tunable (parameter)
A parameter that can be adjusted or changed when the drive is running or stopped.
Unscheduled Transfers
Non-deterministic data transfers through ladder-initiated communication or
programming devices.
Glossary Glossary-3
Glossary-4 GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
INDEX
Numerics G
9-pin D-shell connector, 1-1, 1-2 glossary, A-1
GV3000/SE drive, connecting to ControlNet
network, 2-41
B
BNC connector, 1-1, 1-2 I
installation, 2-1
C 230 VAC drives, 1 to 20 HP, 2-12
230 VAC drives, 30 to 100 HP, 2-16
communication error codes, 6-2 460 VAC drives, 1 to 5 HP, 2-4
communication loss response, setting, 3-4 460 VAC drives, 100 to 150 HP, 2-26
connector 460 VAC drives, 15 to 25 HP, 2-21
9-pin D-shell, 1-1, 1-2 460 VAC drives, 200 to 400 HP, 2-31
BNC, 1-1, 1-2 460 VAC drives, 25 to 60 HP, 2-21
network access port, 1-1, 1-2 460 VAC drives, 50 to 100 HP, 2-26
ribbon cable, 1-1, 1-2 460 VAC drives, 7.5 to 10 HP, 2-8
RS-232, 1-1, 1-2 460 VAC drives, 75 to 200 HP, 2-16
control source, setting, 3-2 Bookshelf drives, 2-34
control type, setting, 3-1
ControlNet
Network Communication Option board,
L
description, 1-1 LEDs, 1-2, 6-1
network, connecting to, 2-41 communication, 6-2
health, 6-1
D
M
drive
connecting to ControlNet network, 2-41 MSG instruction
display data, 4-9 configuration, 4-8
feedback data, 4-4 example, 4-7
parameters data, 4-9 timing, 4-8
reference and feedback data, 4-10
reference data, 4-3 N
setting up for use on ControlNet network, 3-1
N10:X (Drive Read/Write Parameters), 4-9, 5-1 to
E 5-5
N11:X (Drive Display Data) (Read Only), 4-9, 5-6
error codes, 6-2 N12:X (Drive Reference and Feedback Data), 4-10,
5-7
N20:X (Write Status), 4-10
F network
drop cable, 1-1
file numbers, 4-8 option board description, 1-1
transfer rates, 4-1
network access port, 1-1, 1-2
connecting to, 2-42
node number, setting, 3-2
Index Index-1
P
P.000 (Control Source), 3-2
P.048 (Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation), 3-1
P.060 (Network Drop Number), 3-2
P.061 (Run/Program Response), 3-3
P.062 (Communication Loss Response), 3-4
P.063 (Network Reference Source), 3-7
P.064 (Network Trim Reference Source, 3-7
P.065 (Option Port: Type and Version, 3-7
P.066 to P.069 (Network Output Register Source 1
to 4), 3-6
passive tap, 1-1
publications, related, 1-3
R
Reliance Electric, contacting, 1-3
ribbon cable connector, 1-1, 1-2
RS-232 connector, 1-1, 1-2
run/program response, setting, 3-3
S
scheduled data transfers, 4-2
scheduled drive feedback data, 4-4
scheduled drive reference data, 4-3
T
technical assistance, 1-3
transfer rates, network, 4-1
troubleshooting, 1-3
U
unscheduled transfers, 4-7
W
write command troubleshoooting, 4-10
Index-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board

DIF
Documentation
Improvement Form
Use this form to give us your comments concerning this publication or to report an
error that you have found. For convenience, you may attach copies of the pages with
your comments. After you have completed this form, please return it to:
Reliance Electric
Technical Documentation
24800 Tungsten Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44117
Fax: 216.266.7785
Publication Name: GV3000/SE AC Drive ControlNet Network Communication Option Board
Publication Number: D2-3390-1 Publication Date: March 2001
Comments:
Your Name: Date:

Company Name: Phone: ( )
Address:
Thank you for your comments.
Technical Writing Internal Use
Date: DIF Number:
Follow-Up Action:
Publication D2-3390-1 - March 2001  2001 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
General Parameters General Parameters (Continued) Vector Parameters RMI Parameters
P.000 Control Source P.050 Restore Defaults U.000 Torque Ref Source r.001 Analog Output 1 Source
P.001 Accel Time 1 (Ramp 1) P.051 Programming Disable U.001 Encoder PPR r.002 Analog Output 1 Offset
P.002 Decel Time 1 (Ramp 1) P.052 AUTO/MAN Key Disable U.002 Motor Poles r.003 Analog Output 1 Gain
P.003 Minimum Speed P.053 Manual Ref Preset Enable U.003 Motor Nameplate Base Freq r.004 Analog Output 2 Source
P.004 Maximum Speed P.054 Level Sense Start Enable U.004 Motor Nameplate Amps r.005 Analog Output 2 Offset
P.005 Current Limit P.055 STOP/RESET Key Disable U.005 Motor Nameplate RPM r.006 Analog Output 2 Gain
P.006 Second Menu Password P.060 Network Drop Number U.006 Magnetizing Current r.007 Analog Output 3 Source
P.061 Network Connection Type U.007 Motor Nameplate Volts r.008 Analog Output 3 Offset
P.007 TS Digital Inputs Config P.062 Comm Loss Response U.008 Torque Self-Tune Enable r.009 Analog Output 3 Gain
P.008 TS Speed Ref Source P.063 Network Ref Source U.009 Torque Self-Tune Result r.010 Analog Input Offset
P.009 TS Analog Input Offset P.064 Network Trim Ref Source U.012 Speed Reg Prop Gain r.011 Analog Input Gain
P.010 TS Analog Input Gain P.065 Option Port: Type and Version U.013 Speed Reg Integral Gain r.014 Freq Input Sample Period
P.011 TS Analog Input Config P.066 Network Output Reg 1 Source ________ U.014 Torque Reg Prop Gain r.015 Frequency Input Offset
P.012 TS Analog Output Source P.067 Network Output Reg 2 Source ________ U.015 Torque Reg Integral Gain r.016 Frequency Input Gain
P.013 Output Relay Config P.068 Network Output Reg 3 Source ________ U.016 Field Weakening Start RPM r.020 PI Regulator Offset
P.014 Trim Ref Source P.069 Network Output Reg 4 Source ________ U.017 Motor Top Speed r.021 PI Regulator Prop Gain
P.015 Trim Gain Percentage P.090 Diagnostics Source U.018 AC Line Volts r.022 PI Regulator Integral Gain
P.016 Draw Gain Percentage P.091 Diagnostics Display U.019 Flux Curr Reg Prop Gain r.025 Torque/Current Limit Source
P.017 Accel Time 2 (Ramp 2) P.095 Power Module Output Amps U.020 Flux Curr Reg Int Gain r.030 Digital Input Config
P.018 Decel Time 2 (Ramp 2) P.098 Software Version Number U.021 Rotor Time Const r.031 Digital Output 1 Config
P.019 S-Curve Enable P.099 Power Module Type U.022 Motor Nameplate Horsepower r.032 Digital Output 2 Config
P.020 Jog Speed Ref U.023 Low DC Bus Fault Avoidance r.033 Digital Output 3 Config
P.021 Jog Ramp Accel Time U.024 High DC Bus Fault Avoidance r.034 Digital Output 4 Config
P.022 Jog Ramp Decel Time U.025 Zero Speed Hold Time r.035 Relay Output 1 Config
P.023 MOP Acc/Dec Time U.026 Current Compounding Gain r.036 Relay Output 2 Config
P.024 MOP Reset Configuration Volts/Hertz Parameters U.027 Inertia Compensation Gain r.037 Relay Output 3 Config
P.025 Stop Type H.000 Motor Nameplate Volts U.028 Losses Compensation Gain r.040 Digital Output 1 Delay Time
P.026 Function Loss Response H.001 Motor Nameplate Base Freq U.030 SVC Slip Adjust ________ r.041 Digital Output 2 Delay Time
P.027 Fwd/Rev Configuration H.002 Motor Nameplate Amps U.031 SVC Sync Direction r.042 Digital Output 3 Delay Time
P.028 Speed Display Scaling H.003 Torque Boost Voltage U.032 SVC Flux Curr Reg Gain r.043 Digital Output 4 Delay Time
P.029 Elapsed Time Meter H.004 Slip Compensation U.040 OCL Feedback Source r.044 Relay Output 1 Delay Time
P.030 Elapsed Time Meter Reset H.005 DC Braking Enable U.041 OCL Lead/Lag Select r.045 Relay Output 2 Delay Time
P.031 Preset Speed 1 H.006 DC Braking Start Freq U.042 OCL Lead/Lag Low Freq r.046 Relay Output 3 Delay Time
P.032 Preset Speed 2 H.007 DC Braking Current U.043 OCL Lead/Lag Ratio r.050 Speed Detection Level 1
P.033 Preset Speed 3 H.008 DC Braking Time U.044 OCL Ref Gain r.051 Speed Detection Level 2
P.034 Preset Speed 4 H.009 Avoidance Freq Enable U.045 OCL Proportional Gain r.052 Speed Detection Level 3
P.035 Preset Speed 5 H.010 Avoidance Freq Midpoint 1 U.046 OCL Integral Gain r.053 Speed Detect Hysteresis
P.036 Preset Speed 6 H.011 Avoidance Freq Band 1 U.047 OCL Trim Range Percentage r.056 Low Speed Detection Level
P.037 Preset Speed 7 H.012 Avoidance Freq Midpoint 2 U.048 OCL Prop Trim Enable r.057 Current Detection Level 1
P.038 Preset Speed 8 H.013 Avoidance Freq Band 2 r.058 Current Detection Level 2
P.039 Encoder Loss Enable H.014 Avoidance Freq Midpoint 3 r.059 Current Detection Level 3 ________
P.040 Motor Overload Enable H.015 Avoidance Freq Band 3 r.060 Current Detection Hysteresis
P.041 Motor Overload Type H.016 Sync Direction r.063 Torque Detection Level 1
P.042 Line Dip Ride-Through Time H.017 Input Power/Snubber Config r.064 Torque Detection Level 2
P.043 Fault Auto Reset Attempts H.018 V/Hz Curve Type r.065 Torque Detection Level 3
P.044 Fault Auto Reset Time H.019 Identification Result r.066 Torque Detection Hysteresis ________
P.045 Output Phase Loss Enable H.020 Identification Request
P.047 Carrier Frequency H.021 AC Line Volts
P.048 Volts/Hertz or Vector Regulation H.022 Overfrequency Limit
Alarm Codes Regulator Board Terminal Strip RMI Terminal Strip
AIn Analog Input Signal Loss 1. RS-232 Transmit* 41. Digital Input 1
HIdc High DC Bus Warning 2. RS-232 Receive* 42. Digital Input 2
I-Ac V/Hz Identification Active
3. RS-232 Common* 43. Digital Input 3 GV3000/SE AC Drive
I-En V/Hz Identification Enabled
4. Encoder +15 Volts 44. Digital Input 4
LIL Low Input Line Quick Reference
S-Ac Vector Self-Tuning Active 5. Encoder Phase A 45. Digital Input +24 Vdc
S-En Vector Self-Tuning Enabled 6. Encoder Phase A Not 46. Digital Output External +24 Vdc Version 6.06
7. Encoder Phase B 47. Digital Output 1
Fault Codes 8. Encoder Phase B Not 48. Digital Output 2
AIn Analog Input Signal Loss 9. Encoder Common 49. Digital Output 3
bYC DC Bus Charging Bypass Not Closed 10. Analog Meter Output 50. Digital Output 4
CHS Checksum Error 11. Analog Meter Common 51. Digital Output Common
EC Earth Current Failure (Ground Fault) 12. Isolated Reference Voltage 52. Relay 1 Common
EEr Non-volatile Memory Failure 13. Vdc Analog Speed Reference 53. Relay 1 N.O.
EL Encoder Loss 14. mA Analog Speed Reference 54. Relay 2 N.C.
FL Function Loss
15. Isolated Reference Ground 55. Relay 2 Common
HId V/Hz Identification Aborted
16. Digital Input +24 Volts 56. Relay 2 N.O.
HIL High Input Line
HU High DC Bus Fault 17. Digital Input 8 (Rem/Loc) 57. Not Used
IPL Input Phase Loss 18. Digital Input 7 (Ramp1/Ramp2) 58. Relay 3 N.C.
LU Low DC Bus Fault 19. Digital Input 6 (Fwd/Rev) 59. Relay 3 Common
nCL Network Comm Loss 20. Function Loss 60. Relay 3 N.O.
nId V/Hz Identification Not Performed 21. Run/Jog 61. Not Used
OC Overcurrent 22. Reset 62. Analog Input 0 – 10 Vdc
OCA Overcurrent at Acceleration 23. Stop 63. Analog Input 0 – 20 mA
OCb Overcurrent at DC Braking
24. Start 64. Analog Input Common
OCd Overcurrent at Deceleration
OF Overfrequency
25. +24 Vdc Common 65. Analog Output 1: 0 to 10 Vdc
OH Drive Overtemperature 26. Snubber Resistor Braking Output* 66. Analog Output 2: +/- 10 Vdc
OL Motor Overload 27. +24 Vdc Common* 67. Analog Output 3: 0 to 10 Vdc; 0 to 20 mA
OPL Motor Output Phase Loss 28. N.C. Relay Contact** 68. Analog Output Common
OSP Overspeed (Vector Only) 29. N.C. Relay Common** 69. Frequency Input: 0 to 200 kHz
PUc Missing Power Module ID Connector 30. N.O. Relay Contact**
PUn Power Module Not Identified 31. N.O. Relay Common**
PUo Power Module Overload
SF Vector Self-Tuning Aborted *Not available on Bookshelf drives.
Srl Serial Comm Lost **Located on remote terminal strip on Bookshelf drives.
UAr PC Comm Spurious Interrupt
UbS Asymmetrical Bus Charge
Refer to the following software (S/W) and hardware (H/W) Refer to the following manual for detailed information
manuals for detailed information about the GV3000/SE AC about the Super Remote Meter Interface (RMI) board:
ATTENTION: This material is not intended drive.
to provide operational instructions. Qualified
• D2-3341 Super Remote Meter Interface (RMI) D-157-2
electrical personnel must read and GV3000/SE Drive S/W I/M H/W I/M
understand the applicable instruction Board for use with GV3000/SE and
1 to 400 HP @ 460 VAC D2-3359 D2-3360 VTAC 7 Drives
manuals in their entirety prior to installing,
75 to 200 HP @ 460 VAC D2-3391 D2-3392
adjusting, operating, and servicing this
equipment. Failure to observe this 1 to 20 HP @ 230 VAC D2-3387 D2-3388
precaution could result in severe bodily 30 to 100 HP @ 230 VAC D2-3416 D2-3417
injury or loss of life. 2 to 30 A Bookshelf D2-3426 D2-3427
Printed in U.S.A. D-157-2 March 2001

Variador Reliance Nru

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Variador Reliance Nru

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GV3000/SE AC Drive

Hardware Reference, Installation,

Instruction Manual D2-3360-5

DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.

©2000 Rockwell International Corporation

Chapter 2 About the Drive

Chapter 3 Planning Before Installing

Chapter 5 Installing Input Power Wiring

Chapter 6 Installing Output Power Wiring

Chapter 7 Wiring the Regulator Board Terminal Strip

Chapter 8 Completing the Installation

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting the Drive

Appendix A Technical Specifications........................................................................................... A-1

Appendix B Compliance with Machinery Safety Standard EN 60204-1:1992 ............................. B-1

Appendix C Compliance with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards ..................................... C-1

Appendix D 200-400 HP GV3000/SE System Wiring Diagrams ................................................. D-1

II GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Figure 2.1 – Identifying the Drive Model Number ..................................................... 2-1

Figure 3.1 – Drive Dimensions ................................................................................. 3-3

Figure 4.1 – Wire Routing Locations for 1-5 HP Drives............................................ 4-3

Figure 5.1 – Typical AC Input Electrical Connections............................................... 5-3

Figure 7.1 – Two-Wire Start/Stop Sample Control Wiring ........................................ 7-4

Figure 9.1 – DC Bus Voltage Terminals (1-25 HP Drives) ....................................... 9-3

Table 2.1 – Power and NEMA Enclosure Ratings .................................................... 2-2

Table 3.1 – Environmental Conditions...................................................................... 3-2

Table 5.1 – AC Line Reactors................................................................................... 5-2

Table 7.1 – RS-232 Connections (Terminals 1-3) .................................................... 7-1

Table 9.1 – Resistance Checks ................................................................................ 9-9

This manual is intended for qualified electrical personnel. It is organized according to

GV3000/SE drives will typically be referenced by horsepower in the manual. If

1.1 Related Publications

• D2-3359 GV3000/SE AC General Purpose (V/Hz) and Vector Duty Drive

1.2 Getting Assistance from Reliance Electric

The GV3000/SE AC drive is a PWM (pulse-width-modulated) drive that provides

2.1 Identifying the Drive by Model Number

Figure 2.1 – Identifying the Drive Model Number

About the Drive 2-1

2-2 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

About the Drive 2-3

Figure 2.2 – 1-5 HP Drive Component Locations

2-4 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Figure 2.3 – 7.5-10 HP Drive Component Locations

About the Drive 2-5

Figure 2.4 – 15-25 HP Drive Component Locations

2-6 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

M/N M/N M/N

Figure 2.5 – 25-60 HP Drive Component Locations

About the Drive 2-7

2-8 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Figure 2.7 – 100-150 HP Drive Component Locations

About the Drive 2-9

2-10 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

Three Regulator boards are used on the GV3000/SE drives:

About the Drive 2-11

26-Pin Ribbon Cable

J3 - Option Board Connector J8 - RS232C Port

Figure 2.9 – 1-60 HP Regulator Board Component Locations

2-12 GV3000/SE AC Drive Hardware Reference, Version 6.06

USER I/O TERMINAL STRIP

J3 - Option Board Connector J9 - Keypad/Display Connector

Figure 2.10 – 60-150 HP Regulator Board Component Locations

About the Drive 2-13

USER I/O TERMINAL STRIP

J3 - Option Board Connector J9 - Keypad/Display Connector